diff options
| -rw-r--r-- | .gitattributes | 4 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 75217-0.txt | 6035 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 75217-h/75217-h.htm | 8497 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 75217-h/images/cover.jpg | bin | 0 -> 693156 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 75217-h/images/frontispiece.jpg | bin | 0 -> 97929 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 75217-h/images/title.jpg | bin | 0 -> 29236 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | LICENSE.txt | 11 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | README.md | 2 |
8 files changed, 14549 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d7b82bc --- /dev/null +++ b/.gitattributes @@ -0,0 +1,4 @@ +*.txt text eol=lf +*.htm text eol=lf +*.html text eol=lf +*.md text eol=lf diff --git a/75217-0.txt b/75217-0.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..bf0a8d1 --- /dev/null +++ b/75217-0.txt @@ -0,0 +1,6035 @@ + +*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK 75217 *** + + + + + + Transcriber’s Note + Italic text displayed as: _italic_ + Bold text displayed as: =bold= + + + + +[Illustration: + + “I have a feeling that we’ll never be bothered with them again,” said + Buck. + + (_Page 234_) (_In the Camp of the Black Rider_) +] + + + + + IN THE CAMP + OF THE + BLACK RIDER + + By CAPWELL WYCKOFF + + AUTHOR _of_ + + “The Mercer Boys Series,” “The Secret of + the Armor Room,” etc. + + [Illustration: Decoration] + + A. L. BURT COMPANY + + _PUBLISHERS_ + + New York Chicago + + Printed in U. S. A. + + + + +ADVENTURE AND MYSTERY SERIES FOR BOYS + +12 TO 16 YEARS OF AGE + + + =Tom Blake’s Mysterious Adventure.= By Milton Richards. + =Barry Dare and the Mysterious Box.= By Gardner Hunting. + =The Black Skimmer.= By Philip Hart. + =The Wreck of the Dauntless.= By Philip Hart. + =The Valdmere Mystery.= By Milton Richards. + =The Flight of the Mystic Owls.= By Philip Hart. + =The Secret of the Armor Boom.= By Capwell Wyckoff. + =Adventures of a Patriot.= By Philip Hart. + =Donald Price’s Victory.= By L. P. Wyman. + =The Mystery of Eagle Lake.= By L. P. Wyman. + =In the Camp of the Black Rider.= By Capwell Wyckoff. + =The Mystery at lake Retreat.= By Capwell Wyckoff. + + + Copyright, 1931 + By A. L. BURT COMPANY + + IN THE CAMP OF THE BLACK RIDER + + + + +CONTENTS + + + CHAPTER PAGE + + I. TED TAKES A POST 5 + + II. IN THE CAMP OF THE BLACK RIDERS 16 + + III. FOLLOWING THE LIGHT 26 + + IV. A STARTLING SIGHT 33 + + V. SETTING UP CAMP 44 + + VI. A PROWLER IN THE NIGHT 56 + + VII. WEIRD SOUNDS 66 + + VIII. A GRIM FIND EXPLODED 76 + + IX. TED LAYS DOWN THE LAW 88 + + X. MOUNTAIN CHASE 99 + + XI. THE LONE LIGHT 110 + + XII. HEAVEN’S ARTILLERY 119 + + XIII. BUCK MAKES A DISCOVERY 129 + + XIV. THE STORY OF THE BLACK RIDERS 140 + + XV. MUTINY 152 + + XVI. THINGS ARE SETTLED MAN-FASHION 165 + + XVII. BUCK’S SQUAD TAKES THE FIELD 177 + + XVIII. AN UNEASY CAMP 188 + + XIX. DRUMMER SAVES HIS CHIEF 198 + + XX. A VISIT TO HOGS’ HOLLOW 210 + + XXI. THE WATCHING POST 220 + + XXII. GHOST MEETS GHOST 229 + + XXIII. A GAME OF NICKY NIGHT 238 + + XXIV. MYSTERIES ARE CLEARED UP 249 + + + + +IN THE CAMP OF THE BLACK RIDER + + + + +CHAPTER I + +TED TAKES A POST + + +The noon whistles blew in the little inland town of Ridgefield and the +sound, flung from many a hoarse factory siren, reached the ears of the +few men who worked at piling lumber in Thorn’s Lumber and Millwork +Company yard. The work of the men was instantly suspended and most of +them walked off to look into well-filled lunch pails. A few, fortunate +enough to live close by, started off for their homes. + +At the first sound of the whistles two clean-cut young fellows at +the far end of the yard had just lifted a long plank, preparatory to +tossing it on a towering pile beside them. They looked smilingly at +each other as the whistles, joined by others, increased in volume of +sound. + +“That’s what we have been listening for!” smiled Ted Thorn, son of the +owner of the lumber yard. + +“Be careful!” warned Buck Dalton, his constant companion and devoted +chum. “You will come under the heading of a whistle-listener! That’s +the next worse thing to being a clockwatcher!” + +“Can’t help it,” grinned Ted. “My stomach has been listening for that +sound for some time past.” + +“Mine has, too,” confessed Buck. “Let’s heave this last board up.” + +With a concerted heave they sent the long board flying upward to the +top of the pile and then, after washing at the nearby faucet, they set +off for home and the noon meal. It was a noontime in late July and as +they walked along they talked of summer plans. + +“I hope we can get in some camping before long,” Ted said, as they +turned down the shady street upon which they both lived. “We’ve made a +little extra money this summer so far and we’re in fine shape for the +football season this year. I think that it is time we knocked off our +work and figured on a little camping trip.” + +“I agree with you on that,” nodded Buck. “I’m just about ready for a +good outdoor trip and a few weeks under canvas. There is nothing I like +as well as the woods and a tent.” + +“That, and a fire which glows a dull red,” cried Ted, his eyes shining. + +“You bet! Well, here’s your gate, so the best of friends must part. See +you after dinner.” + +Ted Thorn went into the plain old house while Buckley Dalton continued +on his way to a house a little way further along the street. These two +boys had been loyal comrades since they had been old enough to play +together. Ted was the son of the owner of the local lumber yard, a man +of quiet personality and moderate means, who was wrapped up in the +lives of his two children and his wife. Ted’s sister Dorothy was one +year his junior and his companion of more than one good time in the +events of the local school. The household was a happy one and in such +an atmosphere Ted had grown up to be a clean-cut, manly fellow, now +eighteen, and about to enter upon the last year at the local academy. + +Buck was Ted’s age and was a worthy companion, a fun-loving fellow who +was honest and generous to the core. In physical proportions he passed +Ted, weighing a few pounds more and being gifted with a wider span of +shoulders. Both of the boys had been working throughout the summer +at Ted’s father’s lumber yard, to store up a little money to their +accounts at the bank and to keep themselves in trim for the coming +football season. On the Ridgefield Academy team Buck played fullback +and Ted had been for the past two years the quarterback of the team. It +was the intention of the boys to work at least a month or more and then +to spend some time during the summer on a camping trip, to round off +their summer training in that way. Now, with August near at hand, they +were beginning to think more seriously of the trip into the woods. + +Ted entered the house quickly and washed up, after which he reported +to the dining room table. His father and mother were there, though +his sister was visiting at another house. With all the evidence of a +healthy appetite Ted attacked the food which his mother placed before +him. + +“The foreman tells me that you and Buck are becoming first class men,” +his father, a middle-aged man with heavy gray hair, told him. + +“Glad to hear that,” Ted smiled. “When we first started to work at +the yard it seemed that all we could do was to collect sore hands and +blisters! I guess that after we finish at the academy you may be able +to hire us for good, Dad!” + +“I shouldn’t wonder if you might be able to do something else beside +pile lumber, after you graduate from the academy,” returned his father. + +“Hope so,” his son said. “Pretty soon we’ll have to pick out a +preparatory school or college for me, won’t we Dad?” + +“In another six months,” his father nodded, deriving pleasure from the +thought. The fact that Ted was going to college outweighed the thought +of personal expense with Mr. Thorn. + +“Ted, there was a telephone call for you today,” his mother, a fine +looking, sweet-faced woman, put in. “Mr. Calvert called up and left a +message for you.” + +“Mr. Calvert?” frowned Ted. “Let’s see, he’s the president of the Boys’ +Club of the town, isn’t he?” + +“Yes, and also a prominent lawyer,” replied his father. “I wonder what +he wants you for?” + +“Can’t guess,” Ted shook his head. “What message did he leave, Mother?” + +“He asked to tell you to get in touch with him as soon as possible,” +she replied. + +“All right, I will. I suppose I had better go to his house this +evening.” + +“Go to his office this afternoon,” his father said. “It may be +something important and there is no use keeping Mr. Calvert waiting. I +guess the lumber yard can spare you for a little while.” + +“I guess you won’t lose any money while I’m gone,” grinned Ted. +“All right, I’ll call him and make an appointment with him for this +afternoon.” + +After the noon meal Ted called up the lawyer and made an appointment +with him for an early hour. He then went out to the gate and waited +for Buck to come by. In a few moments his chum came swinging along the +street. + +“Come on, back to the field of battle,” he called, gaily. + +“You go ahead,” Ted advised him. “I won’t be over there right away. +I’ve got an appointment with Lawyer Calvert.” + +They discussed the item for a few moments before they parted. “He must +want you for something pretty important,” Buck thought. “Maybe he wants +you to work for him during the rest of the summer.” + +“If that is what he wants, he won’t get it,” Ted shook his head. “I’m +going camping with you, Buck old boy.” + +“Well, don’t be foolish about that,” Buck advised. “We can go camping +some other time, you know, and Mr. Calvert doesn’t offer jobs every +day.” + +“We’re getting a bit ahead of the game,” Ted smiled. “We don’t know yet +what he does want. I’ll see you later in the day and tell you all about +it.” + +Buck went on the way returning to his work in the lumber yard, while +Ted waited until it was time to go downtown to see the lawyer. Promptly +at the appointed hour he reported at the office of Mr. Calvert and +after his name had been sent in, he was admitted to the presence of the +man. + +Ted had seen Mr. Calvert before but he was not personally acquainted +with him. The lawyer was a fine, upstanding man, a power in the little +community, and a great lover of boys and their activities. Ted was a +little surprised when the handsome, middle-aged lawyer got up from his +deep leather chair and smilingly shook hands with him. + +“How do you do, Thorn!” he asked, giving Ted a hearty pressure of the +hand. “I’m glad you found the opportunity to drop in and visit me. I +suppose you have no idea why I sent for you!” + +“None at all, sir,” Ted confessed. + +“Take a seat,” the lawyer directed, and when Ted had seated himself +opposite him the man went straight to the point. + +“Thorn, you know that I am president of the Boys’ Club of this town, an +organization of young fellows numbering about twenty young fellows, all +pretty wide-awake boys who are banding their activities together and +learning some pretty useful things in life. These boys are younger than +you are and that is the reason that you and some of your particular +friends have never been asked to join. Well, the time has come when +these boys are asking for a regular summer camping trip, and the +officers of the club have agreed that the boys shall have a month of +camping life this year, under the direction of the club. We want some +one trustworthy to take these boys off on a camping trip and take care +of them, and we feel that we couldn’t get a better leader than you.” + +Ted’s face flushed with pleasure but he hesitated, questions surging +in his mind. “That’s a very kind thought, Mr. Calvert,” he said. “But +don’t you think I am a little young?” + +“No, I don’t, and besides, you’d have help. We know that you travel +constantly in the company of Buckley Dalton and if you accept the post, +we want your comrade to go with you. Between the two of you, you’d have +no trouble in handling the boys. You speak of being young. Well, we +wouldn’t consider anyone as young as you are unless he was the power +among younger fellows that you are. For the past two years you have +been quarterback on the academy team, and the boys in the club have +looked at you with eyes of worship! Your clean playing, your clear head +work on the field, has captured their imagination so that they will hop +with joy when they are told that you will lead the camping trip. We +propose to pay you and Buck a small salary for your work. How about it, +Thorn?” + +“On one condition,” said Ted, instantly. + +“What is that?” Calvert asked. + +“That you withdraw what you said about the salary. Buck and I were +planning to go for a camping trip very soon and this plan which you +propose would simply be a bigger trip than we had planned. If you pay +all expenses for food, as I suppose you will, that will be enough.” + +“Nonsense, Thorn! If we hired a professional man, we’d have to pay +him,” the lawyer said. + +“Yes, but we’re not professionals. Buck and I have camped before, +and this trip will be a new experience for us. Now, if our food and +equipment is to be furnished, Buck and I will be saving, and that will +be plenty as it is. How do you know that we’ll make a success of it?” + +“The men in this town notice a thing or two, Thorn,” was the quiet +answer. + +“This is something new,” Ted said. “But we’ll try it—with no salary! I +think we’ll both feel more like doing the job right if we do it for the +benefit of the club and the boys, than if we do it because we are paid +for it. The Boys’ Club is a fine institution, and Buck and I will be +glad to help it along.” + +“I appreciate your good spirit,” smiled the lawyer. “I am glad that we +are able to get leaders like you two. And now I want to speak to you +about the camping site.” + +“I was wondering where the camp would be,” Ted nodded. + +“Have you ever heard of Black Riders’ Camp?” the lawyer asked. + +Ted considered. “That is the place where a number of patriots used to +meet in a band at the time of the Revolutionary War, isn’t it?” + +Mr. Calvert nodded. “Yes. This state played a big part in the +Revolution and a band of mounted men, known as the Black Riders, used +to meet in a camp near here and sally forth to worry the British all +over the countryside. That camp is now owned by the members of the +Boys’ Club Trustee Board, and it is on that spot that we wish the +camp to be pitched. A large and beautiful stream of water, called +Bear Creek, runs through the hollow where the camp was, there is an +excellent natural swimming hole, and all in all the spot is ideal, +except in one particular.” + +“What is that?” Ted asked. + +“Unfortunately,” replied Mr. Calvert slowly. “The camp of the Black +Riders is said to be a haunted spot!” + + + + +CHAPTER II + +IN THE CAMP OF THE BLACK RIDERS + + +“The camp is haunted!” Ted asked, quickly, leaning forward in interest. + +Mr. Calvert smiled. “It is said to be, at any rate. There are all sorts +of foolish stories connected with the place, and I have no doubt that +people residing in the surrounding country could tell you many of them. +It is all probably nonsense, but I thought it better to tell you.” + +“Do any of the boys who are going on the camping trip know that the +camp is supposedly haunted?” + +“As far as I know they don’t, but they will be told of it by someone. +You may have a little difficulty on that score, but not much, I think.” + +“I don’t think that we will,” affirmed Ted. “Most of the boys are +sensible fellows and they will take care of the rest. The camp is some +little distance away from here, isn’t it?” + +“About forty miles. Some of the parents may wonder why we select a +spot so far away, but there is not much real fun out of a camping +trip unless the camp is some distance away. There are other spots +nearer, but none of them is as ideal as the Black Riders’ Camp, and +the trustees wish that particular spot to be used. The creek that +runs through the natural basin has a fine curve in it which makes the +swimming hole I spoke of and seldom have I seen anything to even equal +it for attractiveness. If our boys get a month in a place like that, +with constant outdoor work and play, I’m sure that it will do them a +world of good.” + +“There is no doubt of it,” Ted agreed. “I’m very glad to be in on the +thing. Buck and I have had enough camping experience to swing the job +and I think we’ll both enjoy the experience of handling a big crowd +instead of just a few fellows. How will we get to the place?” + +“A couple of trucks will take you there and all of the necessary +equipment will be provided. Anytime that you desire fresh food you +can call me up and it will be sent. I’m very glad that you are going, +Thorn, because I feel sure that the camp will be in the hands of two +trustworthy fellows. I wasn’t sure whether your friend Buck would be +free to go along and so I only asked you to come and see me.” + +“Buck will be glad to go along,” smiled Ted. “We don’t go very many +places without each other! By the way, do you think it would be wise +for me to run out and look over Black Riders’ Camp before the camp +actually settles there?” + +“I think it would be an excellent idea. Take the Black Horse Pike out +past Montvery, turn off on a dirt road which you will find on your left +as you leave Montvery, and you’ll have no trouble locating the camp. If +you see the site of the location you will have no trouble in setting up +camp, because you have time ahead to figure out space.” + +“All right, I’ll do that. How soon will the boys be ready to go?” + +“In a week. There are some few details to be worked out and then +everything will be in readiness.” + +After some more talk Ted left the lawyer’s office, well pleased with +the project which loomed up before him, and made his way quickly to the +lumber yard. The sense of responsibility which would rest upon him gave +him something serious to think about, but the more he thought it out +the more it seemed to him that the experience would be a good one. On +the other camping trips there had always been a few fellows and every +one had had his own affairs to look out for, but this club camping trip +promised to tax his executive powers. There would have to be system and +obedience and he liked the prospect of organizing such a camp. + +“Buck and I will learn a whole lot out of this trip,” he thought, as he +entered the lumber yard. + +Buck was in the yard office, busily checking up on some lumber when Ted +came in, and he looked up with his customary grin. “Here comes the big +boss!” he cried. “Good morning, Mister Thorn!” + +“Good morning is right!” flashed back Ted. “Arriving to work at three +o’clock in the afternoon is quite a privilege, isn’t it? Never mind, +when you get to be an old and trusted employee, as I am, you can do the +same!” + +“I’ll do that. What did Mr. Calvert have to say, if it is for me to +know.” + +“It is very much for you to know, Buck,” replied Ted, seating himself +on a stool beside his chum. “You and I have been appointed camp +leaders for the Boys’ Club during their August encampment!” + +“Get out! You’re fooling!” + +“I thought Mr. Calvert was, but he wasn’t. No, he wants us to go and +take charge of the camp, which will be out in the woods at the camp of +the Black Riders.” + +“Hello, the haunted camp!” + +“Where did you hear that it was haunted?” Ted asked, quickly. + +“Oh, a cousin of mine told me, but it is just some foolishment, as our +friend Jake Meyers would say. Some countryman went to sleep there one +time and a rock rolled down hill, passing close to his head. It was a +big rock and the man wouldn’t believe but that some ghost or goblin +or something did it, and I guess from that time on there have been +stories. They don’t amount to anything, though.” + +“They don’t with us, but I don’t know how things will be with younger +boys. You and I will have to laugh off any such feelings if they do get +around, and if possible, we must do our best to see to it that they +don’t get around. You’ve never been there, have you?” + +“No. Have you?” + +“No, but in accordance with a suggestion which Mr. Calvert approved, +I’m going to run up there on Saturday afternoon and look the place +over. Want to come along?” + +“I won’t be able to, because I’m going visiting with the family. But +you go ahead and look things over. Now, let’s have the whole story of +what Mr. Calvert said.” + +Ted told Buck the arrangements and his companion was enthusiastic. +“We’ll get a good insight on how to run a big camp,” he declared. “Of +course, in some respects, it won’t be as much fun as camping alone, +because when you are with one or two fellows you can do pretty much as +you please, but we’ll try our hand at something new. I’m all for it.” + +“I knew you would be, and I told Mr. Calvert so. What I’ll do is this: +I’ll drive up there in the Rattletrap and look over the spot, to get a +fair idea of the place. Then you and I will figure out just where we +want the tents to go and how we’ll want things arranged.” + +That night the two boys told the news at their respective homes and +the plans for the rest of the summer were approved. Buck was the only +son of his parents and they were very proud of their stalwart son. +Between the two families there existed a warm friendship which was of +years standing. And although Buck went to Ted’s house presumably to see +Ted, it was no secret that he hoped on each visit to see Ted’s sister, +Dorothy. + +On the following Saturday both boys terminated their work at the mill +yard and that afternoon Ted went to the old barn back of his house and +took out his battered old car, which he capped with a fitting name when +he termed it the Rattletrap. It was of an ancient vintage and rattled +before each start and halt with singular energy and application. But it +always went and it had more than once taken the two boys to school and +other events, keeping to date a record for performance of which any car +might well be proud. + +In this old wreck of a car Ted left Ridgefield and headed out for the +Black Horse Pike, one of the oldest roads in the State. He followed +this for the forty miles which Mr. Calvert had told him of, and reached +the small town of Montvery. Traversing this same road he passed through +the village and came to a grass-grown old road that led away toward +the encircling forest. Judging this to be the road in question, Ted +followed it, and after passing about a half mile of fields, the road +dipped into thick woods. As soon as he left the open grounds the gloom +seemed to wall him in and the woods were cool. + +A farmer was approaching and Ted brought the Rattletrap to a stop, +hailing the man. “Am I anywhere near the camp of the Black Riders?” + +“Keep going for another half mile,” was the answer. “Then you’ll get +to the end of the road and you’ll have to hike down the path into the +gully.” He rested his foot on the runningboard of the shaking car. +“Don’t many people come up to see the camp any more,” he confided. + +“How is that?” Ted asked. + +“Oh, people get tired of lookin’ at nothing but an open space. If it +was a building or something else it would be different. You going to +take a look at it?” + +“Yes,” Ted nodded. “A bunch of fellows are going to camp there in a +week or so.” + +“I see. Well, you won’t have nobody bothering you.” + +“That is comforting news,” Ted thought, as he left the farmer and moved +on. “That will be something like real camp life.” + +He came to the end of the rough road and left the car, starting out +on a steadily descending path until he came at last to the camp of the +Black Riders. Before going to the bottom of the basin he paused to +look around him. The place was a perfect bowl, the sides of which were +sheathed with fine pine trees. At the bottom ran Bear Creek with its +curve that made the swimming pool. On all sides, sloping upward, the +forest rippled away into the distance, solid and green. + +Ted descended to the bottom of the basin and looked closely over the +camp site. His satisfaction was complete as he discovered two fine +springs at a little distance above the spot where he figured that the +tents should go. The streams from the springs flowed down and into Bear +Creek. + +“Two dandy springs,” he reflected. “That’s fine. The water goes into +the creek, and I guess that makes the water pretty cold, but I suppose +we won’t mind that.” + +He continued to look over the spot, noting all the natural advantages +of the place. As far as he knew there were no disadvantages attached +to it. The ground was carpeted with soft pine needles and the air was +charged with a fragrant tang. Lost in his thoughts, Ted did not notice +the swift passage of time. + +The gloom of the woods increased and he awoke at last to the lateness +of the hour. His start that afternoon had not been an early one and he +realized that he must hurry back. The suddenness with which darkness, +aided by a group of dull clouds, came up, amazed him. He could scarcely +see before him as he turned to leave. + +“Golly, it certainly did get dark in a hurry,” he thought. “I must be +getting out of here. I must be the only one for miles around.” + +But a moment later, as he glanced up the towering mountains to the left +of the camp site, he knew that he was mistaken. In the darkness above a +lantern bobbed and swung. + + + + +CHAPTER III + +FOLLOWING THE LIGHT + + +The sight of a lantern high up in the mountains captured Ted’s +imagination as well as his attention. The region seemed to be a +particularly lonely one and he wondered who the lantern-carrier could +be. While there had been light he had looked along the mountain side +but had seen no house or barn. The wooded slopes had appeared untouched +by the hand of man and altogether too dense and forsaken for a house of +any kind. Yet the bearer of the lantern was going somewhere. + +The light flashed in and out among the trees as the bearer carried it +onward and upward, winking at irregular intervals as it passed back +of trees. The gleam was yellow and a trifle dim, yet there was power +enough to it for the watching boy to see. Although it was perhaps +perfectly natural for someone to walk the mountains with a lantern, +Ted’s mind pondered it. + +“Wonder where he can be going? It really isn’t any of my business, and +I suppose that the person carrying the lantern knows what he is up to, +but it looks a bit mysterious. Still, it isn’t necessary to follow it.” + +His mind had already considered the possibility of following, but at +first he rejected the idea wholly. In the first place, the action would +probably end in his seeing the man enter some hidden barn on perfectly +proper business, and in the second place, it was the right of anyone to +walk along the mountain at any time. But the upward twist and turn of +the tiny, bobbing light fascinated him. + +“I guess I will follow it,” he finally decided. “I’d like to see where +it goes to. I may learn something about the region if anything can be +learned on a dark night like this, and anyway, I’ll feel a little more +satisfied if I see where the light is going. Now, let’s see how good I +am at finding my way around here in the dark!” + +Centering his eyes upon the light’s feeble gleam Ted started on his +climb up the side of the mountain. As soon as he plunged into the trees +he lost sight of the gleam which he was trying to trace, but from time +to time he caught sight of it again as he came out into a cleared +space. It was no longer moving up but was keeping on a level of the +mountain side and he took an abrupt cut across the contemplated line of +march. The light moved slower and slower now and he gained upon it. + +In one stretch of his climb Ted lost sight of the light altogether and +for some moments he was unable to locate it. He was about to give it +up as a bad job when a fleeting flash came to him through the trees. +Now he made out that the lantern-bearer was standing still and in this +interval he hoped to catch up. With this in mind Ted rapidly climbed +the last slope and stood on comparatively level ground on what was a +great shoulder of the mountains, heavily wooded as was the rest of +the region. Before him the lantern, hung in an invisible hand, cast a +circle of light around the ground. + +In the shelter of some bushes and trees Ted crouched and looked at the +lantern. It was an extremely old-fashioned one, with three rounded +sides open and the fourth blank. Due to this structure of the lamp +Ted was unable to see who it was who held the thing. The uncompleted +circle cast by the lantern showed only the tips of two large shoes and +the shadowy outline of a pair of trousers which seemed much the worse +for wear. Above this, the bearer was invisible and might have been +looking in Ted’s direction as well as in any other, for all that the +boy knew. In fact, the continued silence of the man, combined with his +motionlessness, made Ted somewhat uneasy, for it was possible that he +was simply standing there and looking around. Ted imagined that he had +made a lot of noise in his climb. + +At last the lamp was slightly shifted, much to Ted’s relief, and he saw +at once the object of the man’s search, or at least the goal of it. The +feeble rays from the old lantern showed dimly the outline of an old +house. In the fitful gleam there was revealed a short section of the +foundation, which was crumbling away, and a limited view of the warped +boarding on the side of the house. It was to this spot that the lone +prowler had come and he seemed to be intent upon his job. + +As Ted remained at his post watching the lantern and the man moved +away, passing along the side of the house. The watcher had a hurried +glimpse of broken masonry and rotting boards occasionally obscured by +masses of bushes and creepers. The man went around to the back of the +house and for a few moments the light was entirely withdrawn from Ted’s +sight. + +By this time Ted had entered fully into the sense of adventure of +the thing. Surely, there was something unusual going on. Something +important must be bringing this man out with his lantern to look around +an old house. The building itself aroused Ted’s curiosity. Who could +have built it up in the solitary fastness of the woods and how long had +it been standing idle? Something beside the beauty of the place must be +responsible for the intent prowling of the man with the lantern. + +“I must see this house by daylight,” Ted decided. + +The light winked suddenly around the far corner of the house and moved +along the front. Rough steps were revealed and the man with the shadowy +legs mounted the steps, crossed the porch and passed through a gaping +doorway into a front door. A swift glimpse was afforded Ted of white +plaster on the walls and then the light disappeared. + +It was gone for some little time, finally appearing briefly in an upper +window. After that it disappeared again and was gone so long that Ted +grew highly impatient and seriously contemplating leaving. He knew that +he should be getting back to the town, for it was late and he had a +long drive before him. But the subject in hand fascinated him and he +wanted to see it through. + +“I’ll give the gentleman a few more minutes,” he thought. “If nothing +shows up then, I’ll have to beat it.” + +Crouching there in the bushes he waited straining his eyes toward the +blackness of the house. The whole mountainside had now become so black +that the house was not even distinguishable as a darker blot, and if +the man with the lantern had not revealed it, Ted could not possibly +have become aware of its presence except by bumping into it. With the +light out of sight the darkness was a solid wall. + +Just as Ted’s impatience was nearing the breaking point he heard the +man with the light returning. There was a sound of crunching footsteps +and he came down a staircase in the house and before long the flashing +beam of the lantern showed. Man and lantern crossed the front porch and +without hesitation approached the bushes off to the left of where Ted +was concealed. + +Now the lantern was placed on the ground and the man, still invisible +and keeping out of the rays of the lamp in a manner that was +particularly irritating, crashed his way into the bushes. Something was +hauled forth with a rustling, crackling noise. For a brief instant the +sides and rungs of a ladder were disclosed and then the thing passed +out of the light circle. But there was a bump which led Ted to believe +that the ladder, an old common farm ladder, had been placed against the +side of the house. + +In this guess he was correct. The lantern was lifted from the ground +and the two mysterious legs sought the bottom rung of the ladder. As +Ted watched, the light and the legs went up step by step, the side of +the house, briefly illuminated, sliding by as the man mounted to the +top. + + + + +CHAPTER IV + +A STARTLING SIGHT + + +A flash of the lantern showed the slope of the roof and a broken tin +gutter. Plainly the intention of the man was to mount this roof and the +watching boy wondered how he was going to do it, as there was a decided +slope to the house covering. But the man with the lantern evidently +knew his territory, for he stepped from the top of the ladder and his +foot descended to the roof, resting in a hole which the elements had +eaten through the shingles. He began to climb upward, picking his way +along the top of the roof with a certain foot, knowing the breaks and +the rough spots where he could travel in safety. Without wavering he +pressed on and reached the top of the house, where a crooked chimney +was shadowily revealed in the glow of the light. The man raised the +lantern. + +Ted peered eagerly from his post in the bushes, hoping to get a good +look at the man but he was doomed to disappointment, at least as far +as the man’s face was concerned. He had his back to the boy and only +the general outline was disclosed by his act of raising the lantern. He +was outlined against the sky in a blurred picture, and he seemed to be +tall and thin. His clothing was of the roughest sort and his hat was a +relic which might, at one time, have been a soldier’s campaign hat. The +roof seemed to be familiar to the man, for he proceeded to business as +coolly as though he was standing on the firm ground instead of on the +slope of a rotting roof on a solitary house in the mountains. + +He rested the lantern on the top of the tilted chimney and then dropped +his hands to his waist, fumbling there for a few moments and puzzling +Ted, who could not make out this latest move. At length the question +was cleared up, for the man began to pull on something which revealed +itself as a rope and which was coiled around his waist. In a few +minutes it slipped off of his person and then he proceeded to tie one +end of it to the handle of the lantern. Then he dropped the lantern +down the mouth of the chimney, paying the rope out gradually, his body +bent over so that he could look down the shaft. + +Ted was rooted to the spot by the strangeness of the thing. The light +had ceased to shine abroad, instead, it now shot up a feeble shaft from +the interior of the chimney, bathing the head and shoulders of the lone +man in its wavering, uncertain gleam. The lower part of the man’s body +was lost to sight and the upper portion, half disclosed, gave a weird +appearance, as though the man was a half-spirit materializing in the +air. With absorbed attention the man lowered the lantern until the end +of his rope put an end to the process and then he began what looked +to be a profound search of the depth of the brick shaft. He moved the +rope from side to side, backward and forward, the ray of light shifting +as he did so, becoming larger and smaller as the man persisted in his +efforts. + +Whether or not his work proved profitable Ted never knew, for he could +not see the face of the man and there was nothing to be learned as long +as the purpose of the thing was a mystery. But the man concluded his +search in short order, drawing up the rope rapidly and pulling out the +lantern. Rapidly he untied the rope, wound it around his waist and +then descended the roof, finding the places where he dared to walk. His +foot found the top rung of the ladder and he reached the earth a few +seconds later. + +The lantern was once more deposited on the ground. The ladder was +removed and placed in the bushes, and the work of the man seemed to be +finished. He picked up the lantern and walked off, passing so close +to the hiding Ted that the boy felt the perspiration start suddenly +as he realized that the faltering rays of the lantern might disclose +his hiding place. The looks of the man were unknown and the prospect +of being seen by a man whose features were still formless in his mind +did not look inviting to Ted. But the man passed the spot while he was +thinking of these things and started down the mountain, leaving him to +lie there and wait until it was safe to go on. + +It was manifestly not safe to go on just then. The man was below him +and in the darkness Ted might start a stone down and advertise his +presence, in which case the game would be very much against him, for +the man with the light knew the country and he was a stranger in a +strange land. He watched the lantern bobbing down the slope until it +was out of sight and then he sat up, turning the whole thing over in +his mind. + +“By George, that surely was a funny one!” he thought. “What in the +world should he go and lower the lantern down the chimney for?” + +The whole circumstance was so unusual that he was forced to give up +the solution as a bad job and one far beyond his powers to figure out. +The house which the boy had caught brief glimpses of was apparently a +deserted old place of no value whatsoever and why any one should take +the trouble to search it with a lantern for was beyond him. + +“Can it be possible that there is something of value in the house?” he +wondered, as he stood up and looked in vain for the light. “I can’t see +why else a man should look around a place in the night. I wonder why he +doesn’t look around in the daytime? Probably he would have to have a +lantern in the daytime as well as in the night if he wanted to explore +the bottom of that chimney.” + +Ted glanced toward the black outline of the house, hesitating as a +thought entered his mind. He was debating the question of entering +and looking around the place. In one sense, he wanted to do so, and +in another he did not want to. The curiosity of the whole thing was +strongly upon him, yet the solitary house was not inviting. He had no +way to make a light and he knew better than to think of prowling a dark +house, yet he could make an expedition around the house and get a fair +idea of the place. Then another thought caused him to abandon that idea. + +“There may be some well close to the house, and I couldn’t afford to +fall into it. No, I guess I’ll be better off to stay out and away from +it. After we have made our camp up here I’ll go through the house some +day.” + +Realizing that it was becoming far later than he had had any idea of, +Ted decided to go back to his little car and drive home. For a moment +he paused, undecided. In his haste to track the man with the lantern +he had not taken time to map out in his mind the direction in which +he had come and for a moment he was dismayed at the blackness of the +woods. Anyone used to at least the partial illumination that exists at +all points in a city is apt to be disagreeably surprised at the total +blackness of the night in the woods, and Ted was experiencing this +feeling now. But he fought off his uneasiness. + +“I’ll get back to the car,” he told himself. “I’ve got to! I’ll just +follow down the side of the mountain. Gosh, I never knew how dark the +woods could be!” + +He began to descend carefully, feeling his way before him, covering to +the best of his knowledge the route which he had followed as he tracked +the man with the light. Once or twice he came out on ledges which ended +abruptly and he was compelled to retrace his steps and work further +down, but before long he found ground which was more level. In a few +moments he heard the murmur of the stream and recognized it as that of +Bear Creek. + +“Landed almost at home!” he exulted. “Now I guess I can find my way to +the Rattletrap!” + +He started to cross the long glade which had been the camp of the Black +Riders and came in sight of the springs. A light flashed there and he +stopped quickly. + +Beside one of the springs the lantern rested on the ground and the +figure which had carried it bent over the spring, washing his hands. +Ted’s foot touched and rolled a stone, which made a slight noise as it +rolled. + +The man at the spring bent forward without looking around and with a +single breath blew the light out. + +The situation was an odd one and not at all a comfortable one. The +man with the lantern was there in the darkness, crouching beside his +darkened instrument, doubtless peering around him to ascertain who it +was who had approached. Ted stood on the spot where he had first seen +the man at the spring, undecided as to what to do, his nerves tingling. +The one comforting thought that he had was to the effect that the man +did not know who it was that had come up behind him and so he felt a +certain reassurance. But if the prowling man knew from what direction +the sounds of approach came he might take it into his head to explore +in the dark, a thing which might be very bad for Ted. + +In silence they both kept their positions—at least Ted hoped that the +man was keeping his, and as for the boy he never moved a muscle, but +listened with straining ears. No sound of a footstep or anything else +reached him, the woods were silent and as far as sound went Ted might +just as well have been in another world. But he knew that the man was +there near him and the feeling was not a happy one. + +It was always possible for him to call out and explain his presence +there, trusting to luck that the man before him was no madman and +that his explanation would be accepted on its face value. But the +actions of the man were so stealthy, so mysterious, that they could not +possibly be honest ones. For any man to bend forward and blow out a +lantern in one, swift decisive breath was worthy of comment by the most +unsuspicious, and it would be reasonable to suppose that explanations +would not be accepted by a man engaged in the type of business that +this was employed in. + +So he waited for what seemed an age and when the situation had become +almost unbearable he heard a stone roll and a twig snap some distance +away from the spring, conclusive proofs that the man with the lantern +was stealing away. Other sounds, accidental but informing, came to him +in the distance which the man was trying to put between himself and the +boy and Ted felt a sense of relief. + +“But he knows that I am here,” he realized. “He must be up to something +so shady that he doesn’t want to see anyone, no matter who they may +be. Maybe he is one of the fellows who gives this camp the reputation +of being haunted, and I don’t wonder that anyone would think of such +a thing if they saw him dodge around with his lamp. I hope he doesn’t +show up and give the boys a scare, because some of them are pretty +young.” + +Guided solely by a sense of direction, Ted found the path and located +his car in the same spot where he had left it. A rapid inspection +convinced him that the little machine had not been harmed and he got +in, starting his engine and leaving the spot as rapidly as possible. + +“I must get home,” he thought. “My folks will be worrying and I don’t +want them to do that. Tomorrow I must hunt up Buck and tell him what I +saw out there. I think that he will agree with me that we ought to keep +it quiet.” + +Ted’s folks were beginning to get worried but his appearance reassured +them and he gave the excuse that certain things about the camping spot +had interested him so much that he had remained at the place longer +than he had intended to. Conscious that he had told the truth and not +wishing to alarm them with any further details, he retired for the +night and enjoyed a good sleep. + +On the following day he and Buck attended the local Young Men’s Bible +Class in their church and on the way back they discussed the things +which Ted had related to his chum on the way to the church. Buck was +unable to figure anything out and he agreed that they should make it +their own secret. + +“We’ll take a look at that old house when we get camping there,” he +said. “Maybe when we see what it looks like in the daylight we will be +able to tell something. Whatever we do, we mustn’t allow the boys to +know what you saw and we’ll have to laugh down any silly stories that +are brought up.” + +“When the gentleman with the lantern sees that there is a camp around +he’ll probably stay away,” replied Ted. + +“You’re not even going to tell Mr. Calvert, are you?” + +“No, I’ll just tell him that I am impressed with the camp site itself. +No use in spreading alarm, and it might get out. After all, that man +might have had a good reason to walk around in the woods at night, and +we’d only look silly making a big story out of it.” + +“Sure. Well, I’m all set for the trip. We start this week, and it can’t +come too soon for me.” + + + + +CHAPTER V + +SETTING UP CAMP + + +One morning later in that same week the two chums arose early and +gathered up their camping outfits. Ted said goodbye to his folks, swung +his pack on his back and sallied forth to meet Buck, who was standing +at his own gate and waiting for him. Buck was rigged out in a style +similar to Ted’s, with a good camping pack, a campaign hat, buckskin +blouse, stout trousers, heavy shoes, pick and camp shovel, and an axe. + +“Well, here we go at last!” hailed Buck, delightedly, eager for the +trip before them. “Seemed like this morning would never come!” + +“I was awake a couple of times myself,” smiled Ted, as they swung along +toward the club house in town. “We have a dandy day for a start.” + +It was a cool morning, bright and clear, and a more promising day could +not have been ordered. Their blood tingled as they looked forward to +the coming encampment. + +“Are they going to have one or two trucks?” Buck asked, as they turned +down the street upon which the club house was located. + +“One big one,” Ted replied, “for the fellows, and a little one for +supplies. The tents and the grub will take up plenty of space and I +guess the number of boys who are going will fill up the big truck. +Eighteen boys have given their names and with the two of us we’ll have +twenty, a big enough crowd to handle.” + +“It surely will be,” murmured Buck. “Especially if you have never done +that sort of thing before.” + +“We won’t have any trouble if we start right,” said Ted. “If we show +the right authority and set up a sort of military discipline we’ll get +along very well. Most of these club boys are just small fellows and +things shouldn’t be so difficult with them.” + +By this time they had arrived at the club rooms of the Boys’ Club and +there they found about half of the young boys assembled. Mr. Calvert +was with them and the two trucks stood at the curb. With interest the +two camp leaders looked the boys over. + +They were young boys of the age ranging between twelve and fifteen and +there was one boy sixteen. They seemed to be a lively bunch of young +fellows who were all obviously keen for the trip before them. Some of +the boys Ted and Buck knew, either by sight or by name, but there were +several that they did not know. The boys all had variously assorted +packs and kits with them and while waiting they were amusing themselves +by chattering and tossing around a large hand medicine ball. + +But if the two leaders did not know the boys, the boys knew them. There +was an immediate rush toward them as they entered the yard before the +frame building which housed the club. A number of boys plied them with +questions. + +“You’re really going to be the leader, Thorny?” a boy asked Ted, who +nodded in smiling assent. + +“I am, along with Buck,” he said. + +“Gee, that’s great!” was the enthusiastic reply. A stout boy of +fourteen pushed up to Ted, with an anxious look on his face. + +“Mr. Thorn, is it true that we won’t have anything but oatmeal and +bread on our camping trip?” + +“Why, I don’t know!” puzzled Ted, looking toward Mr. Calvert, who +winked. “Why do you ask that?” + +“All these fellows been telling me that,” said the chubby one. “I don’t +like just oatmeal and bread! I guess they’re fooling, eh?” + +“I hope so myself,” smiled Ted. “I’d like something else beside that!” + +Mr. Calvert joined the group. “Don’t mind this boy and his demands +for food, Thorn,” he said. “This is Al Barker, but the boys call him +Drummer.” + +“Why? Does he play a drum?” Ted asked. + +There was a general laugh and Mr. Calvert explained. “No but he spends +his time between meals drumming up an appetite for the next one! So the +boys have always called him Drummer!” + +“We’ll try to keep him so well filled that he won’t have to drum,” +grinned Buck, while the stout boy looked pleased and relieved. + +The boys drifted away to various occupations and the two chums talked +over details with Mr. Calvert. A few more boys had arrived and the +lawyer remarked that they were almost all on the spot. + +“Are all of the boys of this same age?” Buck asked. + +“All but one of them,” Mr. Calvert said, lowering his voice. “Or I +should say, two of them, for we have one young boy of eleven and one +boy of seventeen. It is of the older boy I wish to warn you. His name +is Ralph Plum and he is actually too old for the club boys, but an +uncle of his gave quite a bit of money toward starting the club and +so has always been allowed to join in with them, though none of the +trustees have felt very cheerful about it. He is a big hulking fellow +and apt to be a trouble maker, so keep your eyes on him and use your +own judgment. We’re hoping all the time that he’ll get tired of the +club and leave, but so far he hasn’t, and it was with much regret that +we learned that he was going to go on this trip. We’ve tried here to +teach him something in the manly line, but haven’t progressed very far, +I’m afraid. Speaking of bad pennies, there he is now.” + +They turned to look at the boy who walked into the club house yard and +were not impressed. He was as Mr. Calvert had described him, a huge +fellow with wide-spreading shoulders and a rolling, careless walk. His +camping outfit was brand new and his axe and knife were of the best. A +fine pack was strapped to his back. But his face was a discontented one +and he chewed gum with an assurance that was insolent. He passed them +easily, nodding to Mr. Calvert and immediately took the ball away from +the smaller boys and kept it for some time. + +“Something of a bully,” murmured Ted, his eyes narrowing. + +“Quite a bit, I’m sorry to say,” was the reply. + +The boys all seemed to be on the ground, Mr. Calvert said, as he +glanced around. “All except the smallest boy, the eleven-year-old I was +telling you about,” he went on. “Little Tom Clayton, but I guess he +isn’t coming, although he was eager to come.” + +But at that moment the small boy appeared in company with his father +and Mr. Clayton was introduced to Ted and Buck. He had come with his +boy for a purpose. + +“I heard that you two boys were going to lead the camp,” he told the +boys. “It was only because Mrs. Clayton knew you that she allowed Tom +to go along.” He smiled in a somewhat nervous manner. “Tom’s our only +boy—only child, in fact, and we set a lot of store by him. His mother +would spoil him by not letting him go anywhere and certainly never +on a trip like this, but I want Tom to grow up to be a real man.” He +glanced down at his son, a somewhat pale and sensitive-looking boy, and +then went on: “We had a hard time getting permission for this camping +trip, didn’t we, Tommy? But we finally made it. I just want to ask you +fellows to see to it that the boy is well taken care of and that he is +properly developed. I know you will, but I just wanted to make sure +that everything will be all right, you know.” + +The two leaders made haste to reassure him. They could visualize +without any trouble the condition of the boy’s home and they +sympathized with him. The father’s desire to have the boy grow up to be +a fine, strong man was evident. + +All of the boys were now assembled and Mr. Calvert called for their +attention. “I want you all to file into the club room and sit down +for a last word of instruction from me,” the president of the club +announced, and with more or less noise they obeyed, pushing and +scrambling to the seats inside the long frame club house. In the front +of them Mr. Calvert and the two chums stood. + +“Now, boys,” the president announced, when he had obtained their +attention. “I simply want to give you some last minute instructions. +Most of you know that Mr. Thorn and Mr. Dalton will be in complete +charge of the camp to which you are going, and you are to give them +your very best support in making the camp a good and effective one. +This point I want you to get clearly in your minds: these two young men +are in absolute charge. Their word is law. If they do something that +you don’t feel is the right thing to do, you do it anyway, and if you +think it is so bad that you can’t stand it, you write to me or call me +up somewhere before you refuse to obey orders! We want this camp to be +a credit to the Boys’ Club of this city, and it can’t be that unless it +is an orderly one!” + +“You will have a certain amount of camp work to do, and these leaders +will be in charge of that. Obey them without question. In that way +you will make the most out of your camping trip and I’m sure that in +another year you’ll want to go again. Any questions, before you start?” + +“This Black Riders’ Camp is said to be haunted, isn’t it?” Ralph Plumb +spoke up, from where he was lolling around on a bench. + +There was a moment of silence and the two boys felt some annoyance. But +Ted spoke up. + +“There used to be some silly stories about that,” he smiled. “But they +were just old women’s tales! We’re too sensible to give any thought to +anything like that. If twenty fellows couldn’t scare away a poor little +ghost or witch or whatever it is they used to say hung around the +place, then we’d better go camping over in the City Park!” + +There was a laugh at this and Plum muttered something, but no attention +was paid to him. There was a scene of confusion as packs were slung and +then the big truck shook as the boys swarmed over the sides and into +it. The smaller truck with the supplies had already started off. + +It had been agreed that Ted would drive the big truck to the camp and +that the driver of the supply truck would drive it back. The little +truck was the property of the club and would remain in camp with them, +in case they wished at any time to drive to town for fresh food. The +big truck, which was a hired one, would go back to the city and return +at the end of the month for the boys. + +“Buck, maybe you had better get into the body of the truck and see +to it that none of these fellows get to fooling and fall off,” Ted +said, as the boys pushed and jostled in the truck. “I’d like to have +you drive along with me, but we had better have somebody on duty back +there.” + +“Guess you’re right,” nodded Buck. “I’d like to drive alongside of you, +but I’ll get back.” He tossed his pack on board and climbed into the +truck. “All shipshape back here!” he sang out. + +Ted warmed up the engine, shaking hands in farewell with Mr. Calvert. +“Lots of good luck!” smiled the lawyer. + +“Thanks! I’m sure we’ll have a fine time!” + +The president leaned nearer. “If there is any trouble, Thorn, let me +know at once.” + +“I will,” Ted nodded, “but I’m sure everything will be fine. Goodbye.” + +The truck rumbled off in a cloud of dust and gasoline smoke, the boys +gave a shrill cheer, and the journey to Black Riders’ Camp had begun. + +The ride was a long one in the truck but the boys did not mind it. In +the back of the truck the boys talked and sang and Buck joined them in +their conversation, answering a number of questions concerning camping +life in general. + +Outside the last town on their route they met the supply truck waiting +and in company they proceeded down the bumpy wood road until the autos +could go no farther. They were in the shelter of the trees and a +stone’s throw from the camp of the Black Riders. + +“All out and grab some equipment!” shouted Buck, and they descended +from the truck in a torrent, making shrill demands for their packs from +those who were still in the truck. These were supplied and then Ted and +Buck ordered them to unload the supply truck. This was soon done and +the boys began to descend the slope to the camping spot. + +The driver of the supply truck took the big truck back to the city, +leaving the smaller vehicle alone there in the woods. Ted then made his +way to the camping grounds and heard with pleasure the cries of delight +as the boys looked over the spot. + +“It surely is a dandy,” Buck told him. “Well, I suppose we had better +step to it and get the tents up.” + +To this work they fell with a will and before long four big brown tents +had been pegged down tightly. They were on a slight slope facing the +creek, with the springs off to one side and back of them. By the time +the canvas shelters were up it was growing dusk and Buck and a squad +made haste to gather a big load of wood for night. Others, under Ted’s +leadership, built a fine, substantial fireplace. By the time that this +was done the darkness had settled over them like a blanket, and the new +fires tossed a yellow and flickering light to the sky. + +“This will be our first night out here,” Ted reflected, as he looked +around him. “Wonder what it will be like?” + + + + +CHAPTER VI + +A PROWLER IN THE NIGHT + + +An event for which the boys had long been waiting now came, after some +confusion, to pass. Several requests had been made for something to eat +but Ted turned a deaf ear to it until the camp had been put in shape. +The noon meal had been a sandwich affair and now the hungry stomachs +were demanding something solid. Ted gave orders for the meal. + +He and Buck took care of the cooking for that one meal and they had +a big job on their hands. The two fires were used to cook beans and +soup and warm up coffee and before long the fragrant smell of the food +floated through the woods around them. Impatiently the boys awaited +their meal. + +“Seems like I never was so hungry before!” sighed Drummer, gazing at +the big pot of cooking beans with wistful eyes. + +“You drummed up a good appetite this afternoon, didn’t you?” someone +asked, and the stout boy nodded. + +They used a flat stump to cut the bread on and for a general table, +finding that its location to the fires made it a handy natural object. +Buck organized a number of the boys to go and bring pails of water so +that they could be put on the fire as soon as the food was off, to heat +for dish water. + +“Do we have to wash dishes here?” was an innocent inquiry. + +“Well, I want mine washed,” grinned Buck. “If you want to eat from +yours without washing, why, go right ahead!” + +“Who is going to wash them, Mr. Dalton?” a boy asked. + +“We’ll have a volunteer gang tonight,” responded Buck, seeing to it +that each boy had a pail. “After that, we’ll have regular squads to do +the work. Go to it, boys.” + +Ted had found that the supply truck was well filled and figuring even +recklessly he was of the opinion that they would not soon have to renew +their main supplies, though things such as butter and eggs and milk +would have to be taken care of from day to day. Much care and thought +had been taken by the leaders of the Boys’ Club in the selection of +the goods, and Ted was pleased. + +At length the supper was cooked, the beans lifted from the fire and the +coffee pushed back to keep warm. “Come and get it!” called Buck, and +they obeyed loyally and enthusiastically. Forming in a line they pushed +their cups and plates toward Buck and Ted and for some minutes the two +leaders were busy dishing and pouring. Within the circle of the fires +the boys sat around, most of them silent as they applied themselves to +the subject at hand. + +“Golly, nothing ever seemed so good at home!” declared Drummer, +munching contentedly. + +“I don’t think so much of beans,” struck in Ralph Plum. “I wouldn’t eat +’em home!” + +“You aren’t home,” was Drummer’s retort. “What do you eat them here +for?” + +“There isn’t anything else, is there?” retorted Plum. + +“I guess not,” replied Drummer. “Any time you don’t want your beans you +just let me know, Ralph.” + +The little fellow, Tom Clayton, sat close beside Ted as they ate and +Ted smiled down into his serious face. “How are you enjoying it, Tom?” + +“Great!” was the answer. “I’m glad I could come along, Mr. Thorn!” + +“So am I,” agreed Ted. “We’ll have a lot of fun out of this camping +trip. You won’t get homesick, will you?” + +“No, I guess not,” was the slow answer. “I’ve only been away from home +once before this, but I guess I won’t be homesick. Anyway, if I do, I +won’t let these fellows see it, because they’ll kid me about it!” + +“That’s the spirit!” approved Buck. + +After the meal was over came the task which was not welcomed any too +cheerfully. A multitude of greasy tin plates and cups lay piled up near +the creek and the pails of water were ready. Ted asked for volunteers, +and a few of the boys helped the two leaders do the washing and drying. +Most of the boys were content to lie around and chatter. When the +camp work was finished they all gathered around the fires while Ted +addressed them. + +“Now, fellows,” he began, when he had claimed their attention. “Tonight +is rather an informal time and we’re just getting acquainted. Tomorrow +we’ll settle down to real business. Up to now I don’t even know the +names of all of you, but I’ll get on to them pretty quickly. In order +to get the best results out of our encampment we’ll have to have good +discipline and willing workers. For instance, we’ll have to have a +wood-gathering committee, a fire committee, a cooking committee, a +water committee, and a dishwashing committee. Some of these committees +won’t be as popular as others, I know, but we won’t be on the same +committees all of the time. Frequent changes will give us all a chance +to work at something different. Buck and I will take our share of the +work along with the rest of you.” + +“That makes me think of something else. Some of you are calling me Mr. +Thorn and calling Buck, Mr. Dalton. That’s very nice, but we want to be +all fellows here together and so we are just plain Ted and Buck to you. +We’ll all work together and have a good time. Now about the tents: we +have four of them and that means that there will be five in a tent. We +have plenty of room, and Buck will sleep in one of the tents and I in +another. For the other two tents I’ll appoint a captain and he is to +be in complete charge of that tent. To him you will make any complaint +or suggestion and he can take it up with me. We’ll want to go to bed +early at night so that we’ll get plenty of good sleep. We’ll be up +early in the mornings.” + +“Why didn’t we put the tents up in between the trees?” a boy asked. + +“Because there will be such things while we are here as thunder +storms,” smiled Ted. “And if we do have them we want to be out in the +open and not under a tree which might be struck by lightning and fall +over!” + +This was a thought which had not as yet struck any of them and for a +moment there was complete silence. They were all young boys and the +woods experience was new to them. Thunder storms had been witnessed by +most of them from a secure house or a comfortable bed and the thought +that they would now be almost exposed to the elements was somewhat +staggering. They looked around and up into the blackness of the +crouching mountains. + +“Gee, it does get some dark up here, doesn’t it?” inquired one boy, in +an awe-struck voice. + +The circle of light from the fires was not a large one and the +blackness around them seemed an immensity which held untold things +mysteriously unpleasant. Buck laughed to reassure them. + +“Yes, they don’t have any street lights up here,” he said. “The animals +like dark nights!” + +“Animals!” cried another boy. “Are there any animals up here? Do they +call the water Bear Creek on purpose!” + +“I don’t know,” said Ted. “Some day we’ll look up the animals and see +if any of them live around here.” + +The talk was resumed and under cover of it Buck and Ted conferred. “You +think I had better sleep in another tent than the one you are going to +have?” Buck asked. + +“I think so,” nodded Ted. “You take the one on that end and I’ll take +the one at this end. We’ll put the smaller fellows in the two middle +tents and that will reassure them a little more.” + +“Do you think they are going to be scared?” + +“No, not when they get used to the camp, but you see they didn’t have +much in the way of daylight today while here and the night seems so +black. Probably a lot of them won’t sleep and it will seem an age +before the sun comes up tomorrow.” He glanced at his watch. “I guess we +had better turn in now.” + +The word to this effect was passed around and the boys were not +reluctant to turn in. Ted told off Bob Gilmore as the captain of one +tent and Charlie Wells as leader of the other one. + +“Each one of you will undress by the light of a single lantern which +will be hung from the pole of the tent,” he directed. “As soon as the +last man is in bed the captain of that tent will personally put out the +light. No loud talking after you are in your beds, in fact, none at all +would be better, because you’ll keep somebody else awake. Now go to it.” + +The fires burned low and the four tents glowed with a subdued light +as the boys all prepared for bed. In the tent with Ted was little Tom +Clayton and three other fine young fellows and they were speedily in +their beds which they had built from boughs and packed leaves. Ted had +purposely placed the bed of the small boy beside his own. They were +all in under their blankets when he put out the light and crawled in +between his own. + +The talking in the other tents died down as the lights were +extinguished. That some of the boys were restless was attested to by +the rustling turnings in their beds. One boy had gathered his boughs +with too much wood attached to the smaller branches and they made +him so uneasy and uncomfortable that he was compelled to throw most +of it out and sleep closer to the canvas covering that served as a +tent floor. Some deep breathing announced that a few boys had fallen +instantly asleep, tired out with the events of the day. + +There was no talking on the part of the boys in Ted’s tent, inspired +probably by his presence and the little boy at least did not remain +awake long. Ted’s eyes began to close and the last sounds and +impressions were somewhat dim. The fire snapped once or twice, the +wind blew with a very faint rustle of leaves, and a katydid started +his endless fiddling, being joined by several others who tried to +out-fiddle him. Then Ted went to sleep. + +He slept on for what seemed to be some hours and then a light struck +quickly and fleetingly across his eyes. The flap of the tent was +half open and he could look out, but there was no repetition of the +incident. He was puzzled and sat up. + +“Was that from the fires?” he wondered, poking his head out of the tent +and glancing towards the two fireplaces. + +It was not. Both fires had gone out and not a single spark glowed to +show even where they had been. But there was no question in his mind +as to whether there had been a light, for the thing had been very +definite. He stepped out of the tent, unmindful of the cool, damp earth +under his bare feet, and stood there in his pajamas, looking keenly +around. + +A wandering beam of light came from around the last tent, the tent in +which Buck was sleeping, and Ted frowned. “Now, who the dickens can be +prowling around with a lantern?” he wondered, starting forward. “I’m +going to find out.” + + + + +CHAPTER VII + +WEIRD SOUNDS + + +The faint shaft of light vanished as Ted made his way along the line +of the silent tents and for a moment he almost doubted that he had +seen it. His total glimpses had consisted of flashes and nothing more, +and the fact spurred him on with greater curiosity. When he had first +seen the light he thought it might have been one of the boys or even +Buck prowling around, but the way the gleams came and went he began to +doubt it seriously. Remembering the man whom he had previously seen, +he became cautious as he stepped to the end of Buck’s tent and looked +around. + +He was not able to see a thing, for the darkness was so dense that it +presented to him only a solid wall. His ears were listening keenly but +he heard nothing. He supposed he had better look back of the tents, but +this thought brought a problem. There was no use in doing that unless +he took a lantern with him, and he might alarm the boys if he did so. +The question was not an agreeable one. + +A low hiss reached his ears, a sound which came from the tent. He +thrust his head inside the flap. + +“That you, Buck?” + +An answering whisper came back to him. “Yes. What are you doing up?” + +“I’m just looking around, that is all. Can’t you sleep?” + +“I was sleeping until you flashed your light in here! What are you +looking for?” + +“Come on outside a minute,” directed Ted, still in the same low +whisper. Buck made motions which led his chum to think that he was +tossing aside his blanket and then he joined him outside of the tent, +grunting as his feet touched the cool earth. + +“Gosh, this ground is cold! What in the world are you—” + +“Buck, did you see a light before?” + +“Yes, when you passed by with the lantern.” + +“That’s just the point—I didn’t pass by with any lantern! I was +awakened by a flash in my eyes and then as I looked out of the tent +flap I saw the light dodge down this way. Somebody who doesn’t belong +to the camp is prowling!” + +Buck was impressed at once. “But we don’t know if everybody is in their +tents,” he pointed out. + +“They are all in my tent and I suppose they are all in yours, but we +don’t know about the others. The worst part of it all is that we can’t +go snooping into the tents to see, because if we wake the youngsters +up we’ll throw a scare into them. I guess we’ll have to do all the +investigating ourselves.” + +“I’ve got a flashlight inside and I think I can locate it,” whispered +Buck. “Hope I don’t wake anybody up!” + +He felt his way into the blackness of the tent and located the +flashlight, appearing with it immediately afterward. “All right, let’s +go,” he whispered. “I don’t like this barefoot business though.” + +“Best we can do. Keep your light shaded away from the tents.” + +Buck carefully switched the light on, keeping the glare of it away from +the tent, playing the beam on the undergrowth in back of the tent. +Nothing out of the ordinary was disclosed to their view and they walked +with tense muscles around in the back of the shelters. Here the light +was played around the bushes and trees but everything around the camp +was normal. In silence they moved away and even went as far as the +springs, but their trip was in vain and their only reward wet and cold +feet. + +“Nothing doing,” shrugged Buck, turning off the light. + +“I’m glad that you saw the light, though,” said Ted. “I would have +begun to think that I was seeing things. Well, I don’t know what we had +better do.” + +“The only thing that we can do is to go to bed and sleep as lightly +as possible,” returned Buck. “We are on the ends and if anyone comes +into the camp we should hear ’em. Funny thing, though, we didn’t hear +anything out of that prowler after he put his light out. Confound it, +looks like somebody was trying to make this a haunted camp!” + +“Well, we won’t let the boys know anything about it. Suppose we get to +bed and keep our ears open as much as we can.” + +They parted, each to return to his own tent, and in his Ted carefully +eased himself into his bed listening intently. There were no sounds +abroad, however, and for a long time he managed to keep awake but at +last the effort was too much for him and he went to sleep. + +Morning came without incident and early the whole camp was astir. The +day was a fine and clear one, a little warm but not too much so. Some +of the hardier souls went for their initial swim in Bear Creek but to +most of the boys the black waters looked too cool. Ted and Buck were +among those who went in, and Ted, after probing for depth with a pole, +was perfectly satisfied that it was deep enough at one point to dive +in. He led the way in a splendid dive. + +The water struck a sharp shock through him and by its very coldness he +knew that springs surely fed the brook somewhere. But he showed no sign +of his shock when he bobbed to the top, shaking his head and clearing +his eyes. + +“How is it?” Buck cried, from his post on the bank. + +“Fine!” replied Ted. “Warm as toast!” + +“Doesn’t feel like any toast I ever had to my feet,” Buck replied, +poising for his dive. “But I guess it is all right when you get in. +Here goes!” + +He flashed downward in a fine dive and when he appeared on the surface +of the water he looked at the grinning Ted. “Wow! what nice cold +water!” he shouted. “This may be Bear Creek, and I’ll say it is a bear! +Warm as toast, eh?” + +After the invigorating swim they dressed and the task of preparing +breakfast was undertaken. The effects of the camping trip were +beginning to tell, for all the boys had developed hearty appetites and +looked in a fair way to sinking the provision pile alarmingly. + +Ted and Buck managed to take a quick look back of the tents but there +was no trace of the night visitor. They were inclined to think that it +was merely some neighboring farmer, though they confessed that his zeal +must have been great to have brought him in curiosity to that spot at +such a time. + +“Anyhow, nobody knows about it,” Buck said, but he was mistaken. Plum +spoke up as they were eating breakfast. + +“Who was going around with a lantern last night?” he asked. There was a +general stir of interest. + +“Who says anybody was?” Buck asked, coolly. + +“I saw it,” was the confident assertion. “I slept in your tent and you +went out and talked to Ted, only I couldn’t make out what you said. +Then you two went for a walk around the tents.” + +“You didn’t do much sleeping, did you?” inquired Buck. + +“No. But how about the light? Was somebody walking around the camp last +night?” + +Ted and Buck exchanged glances. They were annoyed that Plum had brought +up the subject but they saw that he was not to be denied. Ted took it +upon himself to answer. + +“We think somebody did pass the tents,” he was forced to admit. +“Perhaps it was some farmer who took a shortcut or something, because +we didn’t find him. That is all there was to it.” + +But Plum had ideas of his own. “But you two were worried, weren’t you?” +he pressed. “I heard you talking and then Buck got his flashlight and +you went exploring. How about it?” + +“Do we look very much worried over anything?” Buck grinned, secretly +angry with the insistent one. + +“You were last night,” said Plum doggedly. + +They turned the conversation and the meal was soon over, but the boys +talked of the unknown prowler more than Ted and Buck cared to have +them talk. There was one good remedy for their fears, however, and that +was tried. Hard work soon made them forget about the previous night. +Squads were told off and the labors of the day were begun. A group +spent a few hours cutting and piling fire wood and others washed the +dishes. One group under Buck went to work in deadly earnest on the +tents. The bedding was all strung on lines to air and the boys were +taught that cleanliness is as important in camping life as in private +life. The beds were all more carefully remade and then ditches were dug +around the tents so that the water from a rain storm would run away +from the tents and not come in over the canvas floors. All these tasks +took up most of the day and late in the afternoon all of them went +swimming. + +The two leaders found that few of the boys could swim well and some +could not swim a stroke, so they organized a swimming class at once +and the next two hours were spent in giving instructions. Some of +the boys were timid and clearly afraid of the cold water, but Buck +and Ted patiently taught them, stressing the value of a thorough +knowledge of swimming. The small boy was very much afraid and shivered +pronouncedly, but he kept his lips tightly closed and made a valiant +effort at it. + +In this way another day wore to its close and while they were eating +supper the darkness folded down over the camp. But by this time they +had become used to the “feel” of camp life and the location became +somewhat familiar to them. Now that the hardest part of pitching the +camp was attended to they began to plan more than one tramp through the +mountains which encircled them. + +When the dishes were piled away they sat around the fire, enchanted +by the red magic which emanates from glowing embers and the darkness +closed in more tightly. There were no stars on this night and there +was even a little oppressiveness in the air, as though it was charged +with something not altogether pleasant. Not wishing the boys to dwell +on subjects which would worry them Ted and Buck kept the conversation +going rapidly and they talked of football and baseball, camping and +canoeing. + +But Plum was the trouble maker. His mind reverted to things which the +leaders wished to avoid. His eyes roved around the dark camp. + +“This camp could easily be haunted,” he remarked, patting an instant +stop to the cheerful conversation. + +“Who believes in ghosts anyway?” snorted Drummer. + +“Nobody with any sense,” retorted Plum. “But just think of this place +in the old days, when the Black Riders were meeting here to plan out +raids on the British. There must be something scary about a place like +this.” + +“Never mind any such talk about foolish things, Plum,” called Ted, +sharply. “This is a fine place and everything around is as it should +be.” + +Hard on the heels of this statement there came a sound which made the +faces of the boys, old and young, blanch with fear. A wild, dismal howl +rose on the air, seemingly overhead, and echoed in a sobbing wail as it +was tossed to the mountains. The silence which succeeded was almost as +bad as the shuddering shriek. + + + + +CHAPTER VIII + +A GRIM FIND EXPLODED + + +The silence lasted for what seemed to be a long moment and then Buck +and Ted sprang to their feet. A dozen tongues were unloosed and an +exciting chorus went up, in which uneasiness prevailed. + +“What in the world could that have been?” Buck asked Ted, as they +peered into the darkness beside the camp, in the direction from which +the sound had seemed to come. + +“You’ve got me,” was the perplexed answer. “I never heard anything like +it before in my life. Let’s get the lanterns and go look around.” + +They went to the tents to get the lanterns and Bob and Charlie got +out the ones in the middle tents and lighted them. The boys were now +standing in a huddle around the fireplace and talking. + +“I knew that this was no place for us,” Plum was telling the other +boys. “I always heard that this camp was haunted. I guess I’m going +home.” + +“Maybe we had all better go home,” suggested another boy. + +“Yes, go home and let the whole town have the laugh on us!” snorted +Drummer. + +The four lanterns were lighted but before they sallied forth another +sound reached their ears. It was that of an object which had apparently +just fallen, for they could hear it strike the rocks and break. This +came from the same direction as the weird call had come and for an +instant they simply stood and looked in the direction, waiting for some +further sign. But the silence was unbroken. + +“Well, let’s go,” said Ted, starting off towards the woods with his +lantern. “We’ll see if we can learn anything.” + +He and Buck took the lead, the two smaller boys bringing up cautiously +in the rear, fearful but curious. The two older boys plunged straight +into the bushes that fringed the camp and mounted the slopes of the +mountain, looking before them as they went, on the alert for something +unusual. There was no further sound and they proceeded to the spot +from which the sound had come, to find it a high and bare rock which +commanded an excellent view of their camp. + +“Somebody stood here and looked down at the camp,” said Buck, with +conviction. + +“You’re right about that,” nodded Ted. “I think they must have dropped +something at the bottom of this big rock. Let’s go and see.” + +“Here come the rest of the boys,” said Bob. + +The others had become tired of standing around the fires and now, as +their courage began to return, they climbed the short slope and joined +the boys with the lanterns. The lightbearers had made their way down to +the base of the rock and there they flashed the light around, resulting +in an instant discovery. On a smaller rock lay some fragments of a sea +shell, now broken into several sections. + +“Just an old sea shell!” cried Drummer. “What good is that?” + +“Do you know what it is?” Ted asked Buck. + +“Can’t say that I do,” he shook his head. + +Ted picked up the fragments, fitting them together until the large +shell was nearly whole. “This is a conch shell,” he said. “It is often +used as a horn, and when it was blown it makes plenty of noise, as we +just found out! This is the horn which was blown to scare us.” + +“That’s a seashore shell, isn’t it?” Plum asked. + +“Yes, a large marine shell, a univalve shell, and it can be blown into +and makes quite a good horn. Somebody from up on top of that rock saw +us down in the camp and just tooted that shell to scare us.” + +“Didn’t they use those shells a lot in the Revolutionary war, to call +people?” a boy asked. + +“Yes, and this may be one as old as that. Some farmer around here must +have owned it.” + +“I’ll bet anything that those Black Riders had shells like that and +maybe all that stuff about the camp being haunted is true,” argued +Plum. “It sort of seems as though a spirit of one of those fellows is +trying to warn us away!” + +“Do you believe in ghosts, Plum?” Ted asked, looking straight into the +eyes of the big boy. + +“Well, no, but——” + +“If this was a ghost he was a pretty careless one wasn’t he? Couldn’t +even hold on to his conch. I guess we don’t have to worry about anyone +as careless as that.” + +Plum muttered but no further attention was paid to him. They hunted all +around the rock and even went a short distance into the surrounding +woods, but not a single clue was to be found. The woods were dark and +silent, breathing an air of mystery. + +Ted ordered them back to the camp and to bed. There was a bit of +protest at this, but Ted put it down at once. + +“There is no need to sit up and talk about it all,” he told them. “It +is already past the hour for retiring anyway, and you need sleep, +because some of you didn’t sleep any too well last night. I guess +everything is over and you’ll have nothing to worry about.” + +“You guess!” grumbled Plum, expressively. + +Ted looked at him sternly. “We’re not going to sit up like a bunch of +frightened old maids looking for something to happen,” he said. “Into +your tents, now!” + +There was much chattering as the boys reluctantly obeyed this order. +Buck and Ted met for a final word. + +“Looks as though somebody didn’t want us around here,” Buck said. + +“I’m afraid that is the whole point,” nodded Ted, speaking in a low +tone. “But we have every right to be here and no one is going to make +us go. The bad part about this whole thing is that we can’t ask any of +these little fellows to stand guard at night. They’d fall asleep and +be scared to death in the bargain. Neither can you and I do all the +watching, so we’ll have to just trust to luck and be on the lookout.” + +But the balance of that night passed quietly away. The two leaders +tried to sleep lightly and some of the boys slept fitfully and +fearfully, but there was nothing to disturb them and when the morning +came the events of the night did not seem so black as they had seemed +at the time. + +After camp chores had been completed the two older boys and a small +squad set out to make a thorough search of the immediate neighborhood, +but nothing was found although their search was an exhausting one. It +was finally given up as a bad job and the afternoon was devoted to +swimming. That evening and night were undisturbed and for the first +time since they had struck camp everyone got a good and satisfactory +sleep. + +On the following day they took a hike, leaving a reserve force back at +the camp under Buck. Between themselves they had agreed that one of +them was to stay in camp if the other was out of it, and Ted felt safer +knowing that the camp was well protected. They made a long trip of it, +climbing the mountains, finding a deep valley and a cave and when it +was growing late in the afternoon they came back, tired but satisfied. +Ted had purposely led them around by the old house where he had first +watched the man with the lantern and as soon as the boys saw the place +they wanted to explore it. + +Nothing suited Ted better and they roamed all over the house, finding +it of great interest. It had evidently been furnished at the time of +its abandonment, for there were beds and bureaus, tables, chairs and a +sofa in the house, all the worse for the wear and tear of the elements +which had found unobstructed entrance through doors and broken windows. +It was not a farm house, for there was no barn near it and it appeared +to be more on the style of a private house. On one corner, just above +the front porch, there was an octagon tower or cupola and they entered +that from the front bedroom, obtaining from its glassless windows a +fairly good view off across the mountains. Whoever had lived in the +place had left it fully furnished and the storms of a few years and one +or two visiting and curious persons, possibly small boys, had made a +wreck out of the glassware and the furniture. + +Ted looked around carefully to see if there was any clue as to why the +man with the lantern should have lowered the thing into the chimney but +he could learn nothing definite. There were several open fireplaces in +the house and he could see no reason why anyone should want to lower +a lantern to them. When they finally left the place he had obtained a +working knowledge of it but was none the wiser as to the intentions of +the mountain prowler. + +The others were preparing the fires for supper when they returned and +everyone helped in the process of getting the evening meal. Buck and +the camp squad planned a hike on the following day while the others +took their turn at guarding the camp. + +Once more the night passed without incident and they were beginning +to feel reassured. If someone did not desire their presence they had +undoubtedly tired of the attempt to oust them and they were now able to +enjoy the camping trip unmolested. + +Buck’s squad went for their hike on the following day and came in +late in the afternoon. They had taken an entirely different direction +and they had but one incident of importance to report. In a sheltered +valley about a mile away they had come upon something that excited +their curiosity. + +“It was a good sized log cabin,” Drummer related. “There was a high +barbed wire fence around it! Can you imagine a log cabin way out in the +woods with a barbed wire fence around it?” + +“Anyone living in it?” Ted asked. + +“Yes, I guess so, at least it looked as though somebody was. A couple +of windows were open and a curtain was flapping out in the breeze. The +gate on the fence was padlocked. Whoever lives way out there doesn’t +want any company.” + +“It surely is a queer looking place,” Buck said, thoughtfully “Right +in the midst of wild country, too. There is a little cabin that looks +like a stable in the back of the place, and a steamer chair was out in +front. We went up and looked in but nobody came out, though if there +was anybody at home they must have heard us talking.” + +“Funny that anyone should want to put up a fence like that out in the +mountains,” Ted thought. “And with curtains and a steamer chair in +evidence, it doesn’t look as though it was some wild mountaineer. I’d +like to know who it is.” + +“Maybe someone around here knows about the place,” suggested Buck. +“When we go for eggs and butter we’ll find out.” + +“Yes, and we will have to go tomorrow,” nodded Ted. “By the way, we +must build a good ice box. I think we can sink one in the mud down near +the creek.” + +They were on their way to the tents that night to turn in, when an odd +sound reached their ears, causing them to look toward the back section +of their camp beyond the tents. The wind had been blowing in gusts for +the last hour and there had been a distinct rustling in the trees and +bushes. But this was something different, a rattle and a click, and it +came from a section which they had never bothered to investigate with +any degree of interest, though it is probable that one or two of them +had been to the spot. They stood outside the tent and listened, and as +a gust of wind sighed through the trees the clicking came again. + +“What can that be?” Buck asked. + +Ted reached into the tent and took down the lantern. “We’ll soon see,” +he said. But one of the younger boys was ahead of him. Bob Gilmore, the +captain of the tent next to Buck’s, took the lantern from his tent and +taking a short cut between the tents, plunged into the undergrowth. +The light winked at them for a moment and then was gone. + +The others followed Buck, Ted, and Charlie Wells in a body as they +hurried on after Bob. Then, right in front of them they heard a +smothered gasp and a crashing. Bob burst through the bushes, lantern in +shaking hand, his face white as a sheet. + +“A skeleton!” he gasped, staring at them with wide eyes. + +“A what?” cried Buck, sharply. + +“A skeleton,” the boy repeated. “Hanging on a tree and the bones are +clicking together. Listen!” + +The wind sighed, and the clicking noise reached them, blanching the +faces of the boys. Ted started forward, and in an open space he came +upon a sight calculated to unnerve anyone not gifted with feelings of +iron. A skeleton hung from an old rope, swaying in the breeze, the +skull lying on the ground upside down. In the dark glade, lighted only +by their lanterns, the sight was indeed a creepy and chilling one. + +The other boys came crowding in, huddling in a group, scared but +fascinated, while Ted picked up the skull and examined it. Then he +moved all around the hanging bones, the lantern flashes stabbing +through the ribs. When he turned to the others they were amazed to find +that he was smiling broadly. + +“What is the joke?” Buck asked, blankly. + +“Why, this poor skeleton must feel pretty much out of place here in the +woods,” was Ted’s reply. “He belongs in, and must recently have come +from a doctor’s office!” + + + + +CHAPTER IX + +TED LAYS DOWN THE LAW + + +“How do you know that?” Buck asked, as they all crowded closer to look +at the dangling skeleton. + +“Because the person who hung it here forgot to notice that there is +a name on the lower left rib,” replied Ted, pointing. “There is some +white chalk over it, but if you look closely you’ll see the name of +Doctor Hemple. I don’t know anything about skeletons, but this one has +evidently been in this state a long time.” + +“I’ll be hanged!” cried Buck. “What do you suppose anyone did that for?” + +“I imagine that it is all part of what has been going on right along,” +Ted answered. “Somebody thought this would scare us. But I guess +they thought we haven’t any eyes or brains! Look at the rope which +is holding it up! It is an old one, and somewhat weather-beaten, but +not as much as it would be if this was the skeleton of a man who had +either hung himself or been hanged in the woods. I wouldn’t be a bit +surprised if whoever hung it here wanted us to believe that it was the +skeleton of some British soldier!” + +“Looks like somebody is trying to impress us with the history of the +place,” smiled Buck. + +“Looks more to me as though someone was trying to impress us with the +fact that we aren’t welcome around here,” grumbled Ted. “But this +act won’t get them anywhere. If that rope was supposed to have hung +there all these years while the skin dropped off and all trace of the +clothing disappeared, all I have to say is that it is a mighty fine +piece of rope, that is all!” + +“It certainly was well thought out otherwise,” remarked Buck, as the +boys fell to talking it over among themselves. “The head lying on the +ground half upside down looks for all the world as though the skull +fell off and has never been touched.” + +“That skull has been touched, though,” said Ted, examining it. “It has +been cut with some surgical tool. Well, that was just a lot of time +wasted on the part of someone.” + +“But it is a real skeleton, isn’t it, Ted?” Drummer asked. + +“Oh, yes, it is real enough, all right, but it belongs in some +doctor’s study and has been there for a long time. I never heard of a +Doctor Hemple, but we’ll try and find out if there is anyone around +here with that name.” + +“What are you going to do with it?” Buck asked. Ted considered, but +shrugged his shoulders. + +“Blessed if I know. We don’t want it, and at the same time we don’t +want it hanging around here to click with the wind. Let’s put it up in +the hollow above and leave it there. We can look at it from time to +time and see if anyone has taken it.” + +The boys shrank from touching the thing so Ted and Buck cut the rope +down, picked up the skull, and carried the skeleton to a small hollow +well above the camp, where they left it and returned to the others. + +“That skeleton was rather a clever fellow,” laughed Ted. “We found that +his joints had all been wired together with a thin wire, which means +that after his skin dropped off he got down off of his rope, wired +himself together, and then got back on his rope, if we’re supposed to +think it is a genuine affair. I think that whoever hung it there must +have hoped that we’d be so scared that we would flee from the camp in +terror, without stopping to investigate thoroughly.” + +“Say, this couldn’t be a trick to draw us out of camp, could it?” Buck +asked, suddenly. + +There was a moment of silence as they thought it over. Ted seized his +lantern. + +“I hope not, but it might be,” he cried, bolting through the bushes. + +But there was nothing to worry about on that score. The camp was +perfectly peaceful and if anyone had visited it in their absence there +was no trace of the fact. The fires were dying and everything was in +order. + +“All right, let’s get to bed, and we’ll talk about it all in the +morning,” Ted called, cheerfully. + +Most of the boys obeyed at once, but four or five boys clustered around +Ralph Plum, who was talking to them earnestly. Their heads were close +together and he seemed to be doing all the talking. Ted walked over to +them and they looked at him somewhat nervously. + +“Well, what is on your minds?” Ted asked. + +The other boys looked at Plum and he cleared his throat defiantly. As +he stood before Ted he was fully as big as the leader, with a bigger +shoulder spread. Obviously he was out of place with the smaller boys +and should have been one of the leaders, a fact that had crossed his +mind more than once as he secretly chaffed under Ted’s and Buck’s +orders. He was well aware that his relative had given a big sum of +money to the organization, and to rank simply as a member of the club +and not even as a captain of a tent had irritated him from the start. +Deep in his heart there was a fear of the camp they were in, and +although he would not go so far as to say that he feared the presence +of anything supernatural near the place, he did feel a bad atmosphere +and it made him perpetually uneasy. + +“We fellows don’t like this place for a camping place,” he began. “We +want to go somewhere else.” + +“Want to run away, eh!” asked Ted, as the other boys, crowding into the +open, watched. + +“We aren’t running away,” returned Plum, doggedly. “But this place +isn’t healthy for anybody. Already we have received several warnings +that we aren’t wanted around here, and I don’t see why we can’t get +wise to ourselves and get out before something happens. Up to the +present time nothing has happened, but how do you know that something +won’t happen that we’ll be pretty sorry for? We don’t have to go home, +but there are places nearer home where we can camp, and I can show you +a couple of good ones, almost as good as this one.” + +“And then, at the end of the month, we go back to the trustees and tell +them that we were afraid to use their own camping site and had to go +somewhere else? Let everybody in the town know that we were scared to +death? Is that what you mean?” asked Ted. + +“No, because if we all agree to keep still we won’t have to let the +story out. We could even go back and make out that we did stay in this +camp all summer, and who would be the wiser?” + +Ted stood with his hands on his hips, a frown of contempt on his face. +He would have thought differently about it if it had been one of the +younger boys who had made the request, but Plum was a big boy and his +counsel was dangerous for the little fellows. Ted longed to take the +big boy and shake him until his teeth rattled, but he did not feel +justified in going that far. To his mind the question just now was one +of discipline in the matter of going to bed, and he felt that he must +make good on that first. + +“We’ll discuss all that in the morning, right after breakfast,” he +said. “Right now I have ordered you to bed, and you are going! I’m the +boss of this camp and you fellows are going to obey me, at least for +the present. As to the idea that I would ever sneak off somewhere else, +and then go back and tell Mr. Calvert that we had spent the month here, +that is so silly that I won’t even discuss it. You’ve heard what I said +about bed. March to your tents!” + +There was one long moment of indecision. Those back of Ted near the +tents watched with breathless interest to see what the outcome would be +and Buck was prepared to back his chum up. The smaller boys with Plum +hesitated and looked at him. That Plum was angry there was no doubt, +but he did not know clearly what to do. He measured Ted up in a glance +and he felt for a moment that he was physically able to handle him, but +he was not so sure when he looked into Ted’s clear, direct eyes. They +didn’t look uncertain, and he lowered his own gaze. + +“You’ll talk it over in the morning?” he asked, somewhat lamely. + +“Yes, I will. But not another word tonight.” + +Plum walked slowly to his tent and the other boys followed to their +own. Ted looked to see if little Tommy Clayton was with them, but the +small boy was over in front of his own tent, looking on. As Ted walked +back to his tent they all scattered and were soon undressing, the +lights going out one by one. + +The night was quiet and uneventful. + +In the morning something radically different claimed their attention. +One of the boys, looking out of the tent, cried in an excited voice +that there was a bear in the camp. Every head was thrust out of the +flaps, and sure enough, there near the dead embers of their fire, was +a small brown bear, sniffing around a spot where some beans had been +dropped. The cries of the boys made him lift his head, and he stared at +them with his small, piggy eyes. + +“Oh, will he attack us?” a boy asked, in Buck’s tent. + +“No, unless he is pretty desperate for food, and I don’t see why he +should be at this time of the year,” answered Buck. “I think I can get +rid of him.” + +Buck reached into his duffle bag. Drummer stared in fascination at the +undecided bear. + +“Gosh, suppose he ate one of us!” he said. + +Charlie Wells grinned at him from another tent. “I think he came down +here just on purpose to get you, Drummer!” he said. “He probably heard +that you eat more than anybody else, and he is here to make a meal of +you. If we had to throw somebody out to him to keep him quiet, we’d +throw Drummer, wouldn’t we, fellows?” + +“Sure!” came in a chorus. + +“I don’t doubt it!” returned the fat boy. + +Buck appeared in the doorway of the tent with something in his hand. He +drew back his arm and launched the tennis ball at the bear. The white +ball went straight and true, hitting the bear on the nose with a whack. + +The little bear gave a grunt of surprise, shook his head in evident +perplexity, and turned and ran at a lumbering trot away from the camp, +pursued by the laughter of the boys. He disappeared at top speed in the +undergrowth and avoided the camp from that day onward. + +Breakfast was eaten cheerfully, the bear incident having put them all +in good spirits, and afterward Ted addressed them as they sat around +the fire. He talked without heat, but earnestly. + +“I want to lay down the law to you fellows, not in any nasty way, but +so that there will be no mistake,” he said. “From the events which have +gone on around here we know that someone doesn’t want us in this camp, +because if anyone will go to the trouble to blow a conch shell and hang +up a skeleton, they aren’t fooling. But we’re not going to run away +like a bunch of babies. I’m responsible for this camp, and if I went +back and said that I couldn’t hold you here, I would be falling down on +a trust which was committed to me. We’ll show this prowler, whoever he +is, that we have more right to be here than he has and that we won’t +pack up and move!” + +He glanced briefly at Plum. “If any of you boys have any complaint to +make, make it to Buck or to me. We are the leaders and we’ll try and do +what is right. We’re not going to run away from this camp just because +someone wants us to, and we’re not going home one single day before +Labor Day! So get that straight, and also the fact that all orders +must be obeyed without argument. If there are several bosses around +any organization things jar, and while I don’t want to appear to be +overbearing, Buck and I must have your full support. We’ll be fair +with you, I promise you that. That will be all for now.” + +The group broke up, scattering to the affairs at hand. Tom Clayton +spoke to the morose Plum. + +“Ted is quite a leader, isn’t he?” + +“He’s too much leader!” was the growled response. + + + + +CHAPTER X + +MOUNTAIN CHASE + + +For a few days after Ted’s talk there was no further trouble of any +kind in the camp. Neither was there any further annoyance upon the part +of the person or persons who had kept them in an unsettled state of +mind for so long. After a time the boys began to feel that the person +had tired of the contest and had gone away, for the time being, at +least. + +After the third day of peace one of the boys discovered that the +skeleton had vanished from the hollow back of the camp. They had +watched it each day to discover if possible the owner of the weird +thing, but apparently during one of the slack periods of watching the +owner had come and taken it. This was a relief in one sense and not in +another. + +“We’ve had somebody hiding in the bushes and watching that thing almost +every day,” Ted said to Buck, as they sat apart one day. “But on the +very first day that we didn’t have somebody, away it went. That looks +as though whoever planted the thing knows our movements pretty well.” + +“He probably knows more about us than we’d like him to,” was Buck’s +comment. + +They had been to a farm house nearby to purchase butter, eggs and milk +and Ted had asked concerning a Doctor Hemple. No one knew the man or +had ever heard of him. + +“Our local doctor’s name is Ord,” said the farmer. “Where’d you hear of +this Hemple?” + +“Oh, we both know him by name and just wondered if he came from up this +way,” Ted passed it off. + +Buck told of the cabin with the barbed wire and the farmer knew +something, though not much about it. The owner was a mystery to +everyone, he said. + +“He built that cabin nigh onto four years ago, and he’s a mighty +unfriendly critter,” related the farmer, as he tied up their packages. +“I come through there once from huntin’ and I had my dog with me. Dog +run up to the cabin—the barbed wire fence wasn’t finished then—and that +feller was settin’ in some kind of a fancy cheer there. No sooner’d +that man see my dog than he popped out o’ his cheer and chased him +out of the yard like he was the plague. ‘Dog won’t hurt you, mister,’ +I says ‘he’s a mighty friendly dog.’ ‘Don’t keer if he is!’ yells back +the man, ‘don’t want dogs or humans on my property. What you think +I’m puttin’ up a barbed wire fence for?’ ‘Well, mister,’ I sez, ‘not +wishin’ you any hard luck or nothin’, I’d like to have a couple of +thousand wild hogs to chase across your front yard!’ That’s the way I +felt, too!” + +“He must be an unsociable party,” grinned Buck. + +“Worse than that!” was the hearty response. + +“What does he look like?” Ted asked. + +“Tall feller with a heavy shock of gray hair,” replied Farmer Crane. +“Got a sort of a long face with deep black eyes. He looks like he was a +drinker or something, because he looks worried all the time, least he +did all the time I saw him.” + +The supplies which the boys brought back with them from this trip +was eagerly welcomed at the camp. Then they set to work to make some +improvements in the camp itself. They cleared away undergrowth which +was too close to the back of the tents. The small truck, which was +marooned up on the dirt road was backed down into the camp by means of +two sturdy ropes, its own brakes, and convenient stones. By snubbing +the ropes around trees they were able to bear the strain of easing the +truck down hill and in its new position it made a convenient storeroom. +There was still the matter of the ice box. + +“How you going to sink it?” Buck asked. + +“Straight down in the cool earth beside the creek,” Ted told him. + +“But the dirt is pretty soft there. How will you keep the sides from +caving in and spoiling everything?” + +“We’ve had some unexpected good luck,” Ted smiled. “Under the seat +of the truck I found six large square pieces of tin, and although I +don’t know what they were intended for, I am going to use them. I +imagine that they were sent along in case we wanted to use them for a +fireplace, but I guess the use won’t matter. I’m going to floor and +wall the ice chest with that.” + +With a camp shovel Ted and some of the boys dug a hole a good four feet +down into the soft earth beside the creek and here they placed one +square of tin as the flooring. On the sides they sheeted with the other +pieces of tin, fastening them down with hand cut pegs which they drove +right through the tin in the same fashion as nails. Except for a cover, +the ice chest was complete. + +The cover was constructed of sections of a packing box which they +sheeted on the under side and finished off on the top with a wooden +handle. When all this was finished they had a cool and serviceable ice +chest which would never get hot or need ice. The perishable articles +were lowered into it, the cover was placed on top at a depth of about +six inches from the surface of the ground and the task was complete. + +“That ought to work all right,” Ted said, casting an appraising eye +over his and his boys’ handiwork. + +“Mighty nice piece of work,” approved Buck. + +That night Ted called them to attention as soon as the evening meal was +over and asked them if they wanted to play a night game. The response +was instant and curiosity was expressed as to the nature of the game. + +“This game is called Mountain Chase,” Ted told them. “We divide up into +two squads and both squads must have lanterns. There are ten small +lanterns in the truck, and that means that if we can divide into two +squads—that is, if you all will play—there will be a lantern to every +two men. Now, here is the point. The mountain squad goes out with +lighted lanterns and gets a good twenty-minute start, time enough in +which to lose themselves. As soon as the twenty minutes are up the camp +squad goes out after them. The object of the camp squad is to capture +the mountain men before they can sneak back into the camp, and the +mountain men will, of course, try like the dickens to sneak back past +the camp outfit and win their way into the camp.” + +“The lanterns must be kept lighted at all times. If there is going to +be any prowling around these mountains without a light, it will be the +last time anyone goes out of the camp at night. We don’t want anybody +to fall in a gully and get hurt. You may hide the lanterns behind a +tree or your body if you think you hear an enemy coming, but no lights +out! That wouldn’t be fair to the searchers, for you could slip past +them in the darkness and reach the camp without any trouble. The game +is just a game of skill with the lamps, and dodging your enemies.” + +“How do we capture the other side?” was asked. + +“Your enemy must be touched before he is officially captured, and in +that the advantage is clearly with the camp party, because we’ll all be +travelling in parties of two. Now, if the camp couple spot a couple of +mountaineers sneaking along, the camp men can split and then run you +down from two angles, though the split isn’t to be big enough to allow +the man without a lantern to get far away from it. When the mountaineer +with the lantern is touched he and his partner are both captured. Is +everything clear?” + +It seemed that it was and there was vast enthusiasm over the prospect +of an evening of fun. The two older boys told off the two squads, +lanterns were brought out and lighted, and the mountain squad prepared +to go off. + +“Remember, no lights out!” Ted warned them, as they started off. + +Buck was with the mountain squad, paired off with Drummer, for whom he +had a warm friendship, and at this final word from Ted they took to +the hills, splitting up so that five points of light went bobbing and +turning up into the darkness of the night, to be eventually blotted out +between the trees. + +The twenty minutes seemed a long time to the boys who were waiting in +the camp. They were all eagerly interested in the game which was before +them, for on other nights they had sat around the campfire talking and +singing until it was time to go to bed. There was the thrill of the +unusual and the challenge of a combat in this, and they were enjoying +it to the utmost, impatient to get into action. + +“Time is up,” announced Ted, putting his watch away and getting up from +the log upon which he was sitting. + +They immediately started off in the direction taken by the other squad, +in pairs, with swinging lanterns which had just been lighted. Ted had +with him the small boy, deeming it wise to see to it that the small boy +was not entrusted to the care of any one who was not likely to be too +careful of him. The little fellow was developing under the camp life +and Ted felt a great deal of fondness for him. + +They soon left the camp back of them and arriving at the foot of +the mountain, began the climb. They spread out in fan shape as they +continued, busily watching their step in front of them and for a sign +of a light between the trees. Sticks and small stones were avoided so +that noise did not betray them. + +The woods were profoundly still, so much so that no one would have +believed that twenty active boys were hunting each other. Ted and Tom +crept steadily forward, keeping the lamp low and peering into the +thickets. + +“Not a sign of them yet,” Ted began, when the small boy touched his arm. + +“Look down that way, to your left!” + +Ted obeyed, and saw at some yards distance the gleam of a light. It was +behind a tall and pointed rock, and he motioned to his companion to +follow as they crept toward it, keeping their own light in back of them +so that scarcely a beam from it showed before them. + +Ted halted and whispered to the small boy. “You slip around in front +of the rock and I’ll drop on them from the rear. If they try to get +away from me you just touch the fellow with the lantern. Don’t make any +noise.” + +As noiselessly as possible Tom slipped away around the lower side of +the rock and Ted went around the higher side, his lantern held far to +one side so that the beams would not show. Cautiously he peered over +the top and the sight pleased him. Bob Gilmore and another boy were +standing there, crouching in the shelter of the big stone, listening +and trying to cover up the lantern beams. + +“I’m sure I heard somebody, even if I didn’t see a light,” Bob was +whispering, as Ted looked down on them. + +“But they must be gone now,” his companion said. “Let’s make a sneak +for the camp.” + +Ted waited to hear no more, but slid over the rock and landed beside +them. They started and turned wide eyes upon him, but had presence of +mind to run. But Tom stepped from the shelter of the rock and touched +Bob on the arm. + +“I got you!” cried the small boy, triumphantly. + +“Yes, you are ours,” smiled Ted, taking the others’ lantern away from +them. + +“I guess we’ll have to surrender,” admitted Bob. + +In close company they marched back down the mountain, to find that +two other couples had been captured and that one pair had managed to +return to camp. Only one couple of each squad was unaccounted for, and +presently Buck and his companion slipped into camp with the pursuers +hard after them. + +“Well, I guess that means that my side has won,” announced Ted. “We +captured three of your teams.” + +“You are right and we admit it,” Buck acknowledged. “I’m afraid we +didn’t spread out enough. Some other night we’ll play it and change +sides.” + +“Sure. Well, I guess we are all here, aren’t we?” Ted asked. + +“All present,” Buck nodded. + +“There must be somebody absent,” piped up a boy. “There goes a light up +the side of the mountain!” + + + + +CHAPTER XI + +THE LONE LIGHT + + +With one accord they turned and looked up the mountain. Just as the boy +had announced, a single light was moving up, like some firefly on a +wall. + +For the moment it was in a cleared space and they could follow it. In +another moment it had passed from sight and only a fleeting glimpse was +to be seen as it flashed from between a tree screen. + +Ted looked in perplexity around him, counting the boys. “Twenty, +counting myself and Buck,” he murmured. “We are all here.” + +“That must be our party, the gentleman who has been annoying us,” Buck +said, as they stared up the slope. + +“Perhaps it is. I wonder if he has any intentions tonight.” + +“Hard to tell. Let’s follow him!” + +“I don’t know as we ought to do that,” mused Ted. “Suppose it shouldn’t +be the right person? If it isn’t the one we think it is, we’ll look +silly chasing him.” + +“Why not have half of the gang stay here in camp while half of us go +out and trail him?” asked Buck, eagerly. “We could see where he is +going, and if he is coming down this way for any foolishness we’ll have +him red-handed.” + +“That’s true. All right, I’m willing, but we can’t all go, because he +would surely hear the noise made by twenty of us. One of us must stay +here in the camp with the boys, and four or five of us can get on his +trail.” + +“Oh,” said Buck, with less enthusiasm than before. + +“I’ll stay here in camp if you want to do the trailing,” spoke up Ted, +quickly, aware of Buck’s disappointment. + +“I’ll stay with the boys and take care of them,” said Ralph Plum, +stepping forward. The chance of authority was a welcome one and he +had no personal desire to climb the mountain after the man with the +lantern. The two leaders looked at him in a moment of doubt, but his +size impressed them, and as both of them wished to do the trailing, +they consented. + +“All right, you can take charge of the boys,” nodded Ted. “Bob and +Charlie, Drummer, Buck and I will do the trailing. See to it that the +lanterns are put back in the truck before you turn in or even as soon +as possible, Ralph.” + +“All right,” said the new camp director. “You kids get busy and put +those lanterns in the wagon.” + +“That’s no wagon, it’s a truck,” retorted one boy. + +“Never mind any back talk. I’m in charge of this camp and I don’t want +any suggestions from anyone,” was the loud answer. + +“You won’t be in charge any longer than I can help it,” thought Ted, as +he lighted his lantern. + +When the five trailers were ready Ted gave Plum some final +instructions. “When we come back to the camp we’ll whistle before we +enter, so you’ll know that we are the ones who are approaching. If +anything goes wrong, blow the automobile horn, which is detached and in +my tent. We’ll surely hear that and come hotfooting it back to you.” + +“Nothing will go wrong while I’m here!” returned Plum, with careless +ease. + +“Glad to hear you so confident,” half-smiled Ted. “Come on along, +fellows.” + +With lighted lanterns the others joined him and they set off once +more for the slopes of the mountain. Nothing more had been seen of the +vagrant light above them and they realized that their chase might be a +vain one. But none of them felt content to go to sleep that night until +they knew that everything was safe so far as the camp was concerned. + +The initial climb was a hard one and they were all panting when they +reached a less abrupt slope of the mountain. Here they halted to +breathe in the air that they felt the need of. + +“We’ll soon be up to the spot where we saw him cross that open glade,” +Ted said to Buck. “That is just where I saw the light on the night I +came up here alone.” + +They pressed on, gaining the open stretch of the mountain and crossed +this space, looking down to where the campfires gleamed like small red +dots. They could make out a few of the boys standing around the fires +and they knew that their progress was being watched. As a signal, they +waved their lanterns. + +They had just entered the higher wooded slope above the cleared spot, +when a sound reached their ears which stopped them in their tracks. + +“What was that?” Bob gasped, looking around. But the others knew at +once. + +“Thunder!” Ted said to Buck, raising his eyebrows significantly. + +Buck looked away across the valley in which Black Riders’ Camp lay. “I +don’t see any sign of lightning,” he said. “Probably it is miles away +from here yet. We can do a little more hunting around and then go back.” + +“I wonder if it is worth while?” asked Ted, looking up the slope. “I +haven’t seen any sign of our friend with his light. Maybe he has gone +home and to bed.” + +“We’ll go a little further, anyway,” urged Buck. “Then we can fetch up +in a wide circle and come in back of the camp. If anything is wrong +down there we ought to arrive in time to be in on it.” + +“Wait until I see what time it is,” Ted answered, and he glanced at his +watch. “Just ten-thirty. We must get back pretty soon. All right, let’s +go on.” + +He wondered if he had been wise in giving in to Buck, for a more +penetrating and rolling peal of thunder reached their ears, bringing +with it a brooding sense of uneasiness that was disconcerting. The +thunder rolled back and forth between the mountains, which seemed to +toss it back and forth after a profound rolling that had a grinding +sound attached to it. The air itself had been comparatively still but +now a faint and disturbing little wind slipped in and out between the +leaves and branches of the trees. Out of the corner of his eye Drummer +caught a glimpse of a lightning flash. + +“I saw that flash of lightning just then,” he proclaimed, confirming an +impression that Ted had in his own mind. Drummer was not comfortable +and longed to return to camp. + +They came to a halt, uncertain, with the majority desiring to return to +camp. Buck alone wanted to chance the thunder storm which there was now +no doubt in the world was coming. But he knew that such a course was +foolish and he gave in. + +“All right,” he sighed. “I do hate to give up the chase, though.” + +“I guess we all do,” agreed Ted. “But we’ll have to get right back. It +will take us a good half hour as it is, even if we do have to go down +instead of up, and we will be lucky if we reach the camp in time.” + +“Oh, you’re right there,” his chum agreed, glancing for the last time +up the mountain in a searching way. “We simply must get back. I was +just—Ah!” + +At the sharp exclamation in his tone the others looked at him, noted +his startled facial expression, and then glanced up the slope to a +ledge some twenty feet above them, and off to one side. The lantern was +coming toward them, but even as they looked it stopped, hesitated, and +began a speedy retreat. Whoever was behind it was represented merely by +a blur. + +They forgot the advancing storm at once and set off in pursuit. At the +moment of seeing the light so near to them they were too startled to +move, and had the man with the light advanced upon them, they would +have been frozen to the spot with apprehension. But now that the man +with the lantern ran from them the thing was put in a different light. +Seeing it run away put courage into them. + +“Stick together and don’t get lost!” cried Buck, as he ran up the slope +to the ledge upon which the man had been walking. + +This ledge could only be climbed by taking a diagonal course and +Charlie Wells complicated matters by slipping when he was almost at +the top and falling all the way down to the level upon which they had +been a minute or two previously. Not wishing to run on without him +they were compelled to wait and when he joined them, adorned with a few +cuts and scratches, they ran on again. When they rounded a knob of the +mountain there was no light to be seen and they guessed the story only +too well. The mountain man had put his lantern out and all trace of him +was lost, to the eye at least. + +They stood in a cluster listening, but no sound except the wind greeted +them. The stillness inspired a new idea. + +“I’ll bet he just put out his light and is hiding around here +somewhere,” said Drummer, voicing the thought. + +“I’m afraid that is true,” agreed Ted. “Well, we don’t care to go +looking all around the bushes for him. I can see now where we made our +mistake in the first place.” + +“Where?” asked Buck. + +“By going around with five lanterns lighted, making ourselves +absolutely conspicuous,” returned Ted. “If we had had only one light +we wouldn’t have advertised ourselves as we did. Perhaps if he hadn’t +thought there were five of us he would have offered to talk or fight +instead of legging it away as fast as he did!” + +“Yes, one light would have been enough,” admitted Buck. + +“Sure it would have! Well, there isn’t anything that we can do about it +now. I——” + +He was interrupted by an ear-splitting crash of thunder and a flaming +tongue of fire flashed across the mountains, causing them to jump +severely. Ted turned back toward the camp. + +“Come on, we’ve simply got to get back there!” he cried. + +They started off on a fast walk, regretting that they had chased the +man with the light as far as they had. In their enthusiasm they had +covered a long distance and they had not descended very far down the +side of the mountain before large rain drops began to spatter through +the trees upon them. + +“I’m afraid we’re not going to make it!” shouted Ted, above the noise +of the rising wind. + + + + +CHAPTER XII + +HEAVEN’S ARTILLERY + + +Ted’s guess was a perfectly correct one. Before they were half down the +mountain side the rain began to come down in sheets. + +Added to the rush of wind and water there was the bewildering addition +of thunder and lightning. The thunder kept up the rolling roar as the +sound bounded from mountain slope to mountain slope, and the flashes +of lightning almost blinded them. The quality of it was deceptive. It +revealed obstacles in the path which were imaginary most of the time, +and by constant flashing made the lanterns of little or no use. Two of +them had already been puffed out by the wind and the rain drops on the +others caused them to sputter and hiss. It was with a sense of feeling +rather than seeing their way that the boys pushed on. + +“Isn’t there any place that we can duck into for shelter?” Buck shouted +in Ted’s ear. + +“I don’t know of any,” he replied. “This is all new country to me.” + +“How about that old house?” + +“We’re nowhere near it,” was the discouraging answer as Ted kept on +going. + +They were frantically seeking a shelter, for there was no thought in +their minds that they could ever make camp with safety. They could see +the fires in the camp below, now rapidly being put out by the storm. +The rain had increased in violence and it gave every appearance of +being a violent summer storm. + +The glass on one of the lanterns cracked and broke and the wind +promptly snatched out the dancing flame. But their chief help in their +flight from the storm was the lightning which flashed with great +brilliance. Although it created illusions it served as a guide and kept +them from running on dangerous ground. + +There was a severe crack of thunder, a dazzling flash of electrical +fire hard on its heels, and a big tree near them seemed outlined for an +instant in quivering fire. The monarch of the forest split in two, and +one portion came down with a rush and a roar that bewildered them. + +“That was close!” yelled Drummer, as they came to an abrupt halt. + +“We have got to get under some kind of a cover,” cried Ted, peering +around him. “If we don’t we may have a tree down on top of us!” + +“Let’s try that rock over there,” Buck pointed out, and they dashed +in the direction of the somewhat vague rock which loomed off to their +left. When they reached it they were grateful to find that it afforded +a slight shelter at least from falling trees, though as a covering for +rain it was a total failure. + +The rock was small at the base and towered above their heads, +mushrooming out as it went up, until the top was a flat surface which +would hold all five of them without crowding, had they been in any mood +to sit on the top of the big rock. But they crouched at the base of the +big stone and there prepared to make the best of it, striving to keep +the two good lanterns going, for in their present predicament even a +little light was welcome. + +“This is better than nothing at all!” declared Bob, pushing his back up +as close to the rock as it would go. + +“We’re safe from falling trees, anyway,” observed Charlie, as he set +his useless lamp to one side and jammed his hands into his pockets. + +“Not the dryest place in the world!” chuckled Ted. + +The rain slanted right into their faces, causing them to avert them, +and the drippings from the top of the rock spattered over them. A thin +trickle oozed down the sleek sides of the big stone and made their +backs more wet than ever. Their plight was not a happy or a comfortable +one. + +“What I wouldn’t do with a good old fire right now!” sighed Drummer, +shivering slightly. + +“Here, hold your hands over the top of the lantern,” directed Ted, and +Drummer followed his instructions and found the warmth welcome. + +“I wonder how the fellows in camp are making it?” Ted worried, as the +lightning flashes grew less frequent. “Of course they have the tents, +but I wonder if they knew enough to loosen up on the tent ropes so as +to take the strain off of the pegs? I won’t be surprised if we get back +and find that half of the pegs have been pulled out of the ground!” + +“How does that work, Ted?” Bob asked, with interest. + +“Why, when a storm is coming up a camper must loosen up on his tent +ropes, because when the canvas gets wet it pulls pretty strongly on +the ropes, and if they haven’t been attended to they pull right out of +the ground. If that business hasn’t been done I’ll have only myself +to blame, for I neglected to tell you all about it. Never gave it a +thought, though I should have at the time we dug the trenches around +the tents.” + +“It is a mighty good thing that we did dig the trenches,” put in Buck, +all crouched in a heap. “Those fellows would be good and wet by this +time if we hadn’t.” + +“I don’t doubt but what they are right now,” said Ted, seriously. “With +a fall of rain like this those trenches couldn’t possibly carry off all +of the water. I think that we’ll all have to do some drying out when we +get the fires started again and get back to normal!” + +“The lightning is letting up, but listen to that thunder!” remarked +Buck. “That’s heaven’s artillery for fair!” + +A full and weary hour dragged by while they remained there in the +shelter of the big rock waiting for the storm to cease. The lightning +had moved on across the mountain and the thunder was about to follow. +The rolls of the pealing concussions now came to them in a more muffled +state and the rain was beginning to thin out though it did not cease to +fall. They had hopes of making a break when the thunder and lightning +had passed away. + +“We won’t stay here just for the sake of the rain,” said Ted. “We +couldn’t possibly get any wetter than we are, so as soon as we are sure +that there will be no more lightning we’ll make a dash for it.” + +“Better be careful of your dashes,” warned Buck. “The ground has become +very slippery and we’ll have to watch our steps.” + +“We’ll keep our eyes wide open,” promised Ted. “I guess we can go now.” + +The five wet and stiff boys stood up straight, stretching their aching +muscles. After the game of the evening, the chase over the mountains, +and the thorough wetting, all of them felt worn out and stiff. It was +with genuine pleasure that they looked forward to the return to the +camp, for the exercise alone. + +“It isn’t going to do us much good to get to camp,” said Drummer. +“There won’t be any wood to start a fire with.” + +“This storm has taught me a big lesson,” said Ted. “Hereafter we’ll +have a shelter for a pile of dry wood, for just such an emergency as +this. But don’t forget, Drummer, there are warm blankets for us to wrap +around us when we do get there.” + +“That is so,” the other realized, brightening. “That will help a lot.” + +They hurried away from the big rock and made their way to the best of +their belief toward their camp. They had not gone very far, however, +before Bob cried out in dismay. + +“My lantern is going out! Guess all the oil is burned up.” + +With a flutter his light went out, leaving them with but one good +lantern among them. For a moment they were at a loss, for the mountains +were very dark and slippery and if the last light went out their case +would not be a happy one. + +“Well, we still have one left and there must be a little oil in the +other lanterns,” said Ted. “We’ll push along with the one light and if +that goes out we’ll refill my lantern with the oil from the others.” + +They continued on their way for some time, moving in the general +direction of the camp. The ground was indeed muddy and treacherous and +they were compelled to watch every footstep. As they rounded a point on +the mountain Buck paused and pointed to a light below them. + +“Hello, we have certainly wandered off of our course, all right! There +is the cabin of that unsociable fellow that the farmer told us about.” + +They looked down into the slight valley to the cabin before them, +noting with some envy the lighted windows, speculating on the warmth +and cheer which was inside. The light in the cabin was a good one and +the square panes of glass released broad floods of yellow illumination. +As they looked the door opened and a tall man came to the door looking +out. + +“Duck the lantern!” whispered Buck, and Ted dropped it behind a bunch +of bushes. + +The man looked up at the sky, apparently wishing to see if the storm +had passed over. He was much as the farmer had described him and he was +dressed in an odd costume for a backwoods cabin, for he had on a soft +white shirt and white flannel trousers. + +“My, my, what a nice looking pioneer he is!” muttered Buck as the man +retired. + +“Buck, do you know what I think?” asked Ted, slowly. + +“What?” + +“I wouldn’t be a bit surprised if that man is the one who has been +annoying us in our camp!” + +There was a moment of silence and the boys all looked at Ted. “What +makes you think so?” Buck asked. + +“You remember what that farmer told us about the very unfriendliness +of the man? I wouldn’t be surprised if he just resented our camping +anywhere near him and he tried to chase us away.” + +“You think he is the man we chased, with the lantern, tonight?” + +“I don’t know. Anyway, he had time to get back to his cabin and change +his clothes. I wouldn’t be a bit surprised to find that he is the one. +But come on, we won’t get anywhere by just standing around here.” + +They continued on their way to camp, talking over Ted’s theory, and the +more that they talked of it the more plausible it seemed. They felt +that they had made an important discovery. + +“Maybe he has tired of his effort to scare us away,” said Buck. + +“I hope so. We’re not going, anyway.” + +“Hurrah, there is the camp!” cried Charlie, as they reached the bottom +of the slope and started across the basin towards the tents. + +Ted was in the lead and he quickened his steps, looking ahead into the +darkness. There was a sound of scrambling and jumping which he could +not understand and the spot looked curiously empty. + +“Why, the tents are all down!” he exclaimed, running forward. + + + + +CHAPTER XIII + +BUCK MAKES A DISCOVERY + + +The one lantern carried by Ted threw but a poor light over the scene of +the camp but it was enough for the arriving boys to see that all of the +tents were down, apparently blown over from the storm. The first two +were down altogether, canvas and poles, while the last two consisted of +flapping canvas on the poles. While they looked they were joined by the +other boys, who came jumping and running from the truck, where they had +taken a poor refuge during the storm. + +“Oh, boy, I’m glad you are back!” exclaimed Plum, fervently, catching +Ted by the sleeve. + +“What happened here?” Ted asked. + +“Why, the storm blew the tents down. We were all under the canvas and +keeping pretty dry, except for some water which leaked in from the +trenches, when all of a sudden there was a blow of wind and the tents +were down. It even carried over the poles on two of the tents, or +else we knocked them down getting out, I don’t know which. But we were +soaked and tried to get in the truck and pull a piece of canvas over +our heads, but it didn’t do us much good.” + +Apparently, it had not. All of them were as wet as the five who had +been trailing. With the tents down and all of them dripping they +presented a sorry sight which even the flicker of the one lamp could +not make up for. Looking backward, the evening did not seem to have +been a success. + +“Well, only one thing to do,” directed Buck, briskly. “Let’s locate our +axes and hunt dry wood for a fire.” + +“There isn’t any dry wood,” a boy objected. + +“We can get dry wood by taking a fairly large log and chopping off the +wet outside,” explained Buck. “In that way we’ll get down to the heart +of it and find something that we can burn. You know where that dead log +is back of the springs, and you can surely cut something dry out of +that big fellow. Come on, I’ll show you.” + +Buck went to the mass of canvas which had been his own tent and lifting +the soggy material, felt inside for his axe, which he had no trouble +in locating. The other boys procured theirs and then they went off in a +body to hunt up dry wood, a seemingly impossible process. But Buck had +had to deal with wet wood before in his camping experiences. + +“Now, here is this log,” he told them. “The outside looks pretty wet, +and it is wet. Start cutting it away in slices, this way.” With his axe +he split the wood along the upper side, tearing off the wet strips and +tossing them to one side. “Now, here is some that looks fairly dry,” he +went on, as they cut deeper. “This stuff will do very nicely for our +fire.” + +The younger boys were surprised to find that there was indeed a goodly +supply of dry wood in the old log and they gathered a large heap of it +and took it back to the camp. Buck knew that they were going to need +lots of it, for it was impossible to think of going to bed that night. +The wet canvas could not be put up and the entire camp would have to be +dried out. They would need wood for the entire night. + +“They are all excited and won’t mind staying awake all night,” he +reflected, as he carried an armful of wood back to the fireplaces. + +Here he found Ted down on his knees cleaning out the wet mass of ashes +which had been the evening’s fire and when these had been raked out +and scattered to one side, some paper, which came from under the seat +of the truck was stuffed into the stone fireplaces and the wood was +piled so as to catch fire. A match was applied and the tiny spurt of +flame which immediately jumped up was a very welcome one. The one +faithful lamp was still going and had done its duty well. + +Carefully they fed the flame with splinters of wood, and the building +of the fire took care, for the log wood was not thoroughly dry, but had +in it enough moisture to make it a problem. It smoked and drove them +away from the fire more than once, but they were pleased to see that +it did burn. Some good fuel was added in the form of a canned goods +box which had been under the truck and so was not very wet. Around the +blaze created by this wood they dried their clothing as much as they +could. + +“We can’t go to bed tonight, can we?” Tom Clayton asked. + +“No, we couldn’t get the tents up tonight, because we’ll have to dry +them,” replied Ted. “But the night won’t last so very long now. When +we do get everything fixed up we’ll put in the daytime sleeping, if we +feel that way.” + +“I certainly would like to go to sleep right now!” yawned Drummer, +stretching himself. + +“I guess most of us would,” nodded Buck. “But everything is against us. +How would you like to snuggle down under that canvas right now?” + +“Ugh, not while it is as wet as it is!” cried Drummer. “I’d rather +stand up around the fire all night!” + +“Is everything soaked, blankets, sweaters and everything?” Ted asked. + +“Yes,” replied Buck. “As soon as the canvas fell on the stuff it all +got soaked, at least in the tents where the poles went down. I don’t +know about the other two.” + +Some of the boys rummaged under the canvas and found that blankets were +damp and not too wet to put on, and immediately they returned with +blankets over their shoulders. Others had not been so lucky and they +crowded close to the fire. As morning came on another group went out +and hunted for wood, bringing back a large supply. The fire had been +effective but not perfect, and the smoke had chased them from side to +side of the fireplace. + +It was the first really disagreeable camp experience that these boys +from the club had ever had and some were plainly discouraged by it +while others enjoyed the novelty and adventure of it. The conversation +by the fire became more cheerful and soon jokes and laughter took the +place of brooding silence. The five who had trailed the man with the +lantern told their experiences and those who had remained in camp told +theirs. + +“We were just standing around watching your lights when the storm was +first heard,” related Plum. “We hoped you’d come down right away, but +you didn’t and then the old storm hit and we dug for the tents. We +sat in there pretty dry except for some water that came in around the +bottom of the tent and then all of a sudden there was a little blow and +the tent I was in came down! Seemed like the canvas on one side just +collapsed, the back pole seemed to come down in a hurry and I guess we +knocked the rest down when we tried to get out from under. The rest was +the same as we was, scrambling out of tents and looking for somewhere +to go, when we thought of the truck and climbed in there.” + +“I knew that it blew pretty hard when we were up there under the rock,” +remarked Ted. “But I didn’t know that it blew hard enough to blow down +the tents.” + +“The wind must have been stronger down here than it was up there,” +suggested Bob. + +“That is hardly possible, because the wind always blows harder on a +higher level than in a basin, such as this spot is. I can see how a +wind would blow down one tent but it seems funny that it should blow +down four of them. However, I guess it must have just swooped down in a +sudden gust and done the job.” + +“Which way did our tent buckle in?” Buck asked Plum. + +“From the left side,” was the answer. + +“Couldn’t have,” said a boy, promptly. “Ours went in on the right!” + +“One of you must be wrong,” said Buck. “The wind must have come from +one direction to have force enough to flatten out the tents, and it +would have hit either on the right or the left side and not on both. +How about you fellows in the first two tents?” + +“Ours went in on the left,” said a boy from the second tent. + +“But ours collapsed on the right,” said Tom Clayton. + +Buck snatched up the lantern. “I thought there was something funny +about that tent business all along,” he said. “Wait until I come back.” +He strode off with the lantern, leaving them wondering. + +Buck went to the tents and placed the lantern on the ground. The canvas +had fallen in a confused mass and he was compelled to fish under it for +the ropes. He located the ropes which had been pegged into the ground +and examined them carefully. Without saying anything he examined the +others, passing from tent to tent. + +“Find anything?” Ted hailed him, from the fire. + +“Yes, sir!” was the vigorous answer. “These tent ropes were cut!” + +“What!” cried Ted, leaping to his feet. + +“That is just what happened. Come here.” + +The entire group clustered around Buck as he held up ropes from two of +the tents. “Look here. One fellow says his tent collapsed from the left +and another fellow says his let go from the right. Good reason why. +Somebody stood between two tents and cut the ropes under cover of the +storm. Of course the tents went down on opposite sides, and I suppose +the man shoved the back poles and skipped to the next two tents and +cut the ropes there. He didn’t have time to knock over the uprights +there, because the boys were swarming out, so he left that to them and +probably took to the woods. Look at these ropes.” + +There was not the slightest doubt in the world that the ropes to the +tents had been cut, and cut with a sharp knife which had required no +second cuts. They stared at the ends of the ropes in amazement. + +“We didn’t hear anybody,” said Plum. “Probably you wouldn’t, with the +noise of the storm. If we want any additional proof that the ropes were +cut and not pulled, look at the tent pegs. They are all in the ground +as they were when we left and the other pieces of the rope are still +attached. There is no doubt that you boys had a visitor while we were +chasing!” + +“It might have done us more good to have stayed at home and minded our +business,” smiled Ted. + +“Maybe. Say, how near the end of the storm did this thing happen?” + +“Almost at the end,” said Plum. “Just when the thunder was going away.” + +“Then that kills our theory about the man in the log cabin,” Buck said +to Ted. + +“Yes, it does,” replied his chum. “He couldn’t possibly be the one, +because if he had been in on this he couldn’t possibly have returned to +his house and changed his clothes.” + +“No, he is out of it,” agreed Buck. “But who in the world can be doing +all this business? I tell you, I’m getting sick and tired of it and I’m +going to break loose before long and hunt somebody down.” + +“The trouble with your breaking loose is that we don’t know who to hunt +down!” smiled Ted. + +“No, that is the trouble. But someone is responsible. I don’t believe +it is any supernatural element, either, or if it is, that ghost carries +a fine sharp knife! When it gets light enough we’ll have to look around +for footprints.” + +“It won’t be long before it is light now,” said Charlie, glancing at +the sky. + +The last of the darkness was beginning to break in the east, a broad +bar of yellow-white light was appearing. Far over in the west the last +of the stars began to fade and as the minutes ticked off the band of +light spread and broadened and the aspect of the woods changed. The +darkness withdrew and the flush of a new and beautiful day appeared. + +“Golly, I never was so glad to see the daytime come!” sighed Drummer, +as they stood around the fires watching the advance of the day. + +“I guess none of us ever was,” agreed Buck. “And could I eat!” + +“Then let’s get at it right now,” said Ted. “We’ll have an early +breakfast and then get to work. We are going to have a busy day.” + + + + +CHAPTER XIV + +THE STORY OF THE BLACK RIDERS + + +The sun seemed to burst forth from the sky, flooding over the camp +as it did so, and never before had the great ball of fire seemed so +comforting and cheerful. The fires were going briskly and the coffee +was sending out its tempting aroma. Drummer, warming up throughout, was +inspired to joke. + +“Hey, you fellows!” he cried. “Who is going to take their morning dip +in Bear Creek?” + +A medley of groans greeted him and he grinned. “We ought to toss you in +for even suggesting such a thing!” grinned Buck, as he fried the bacon. + +The touch of the sun turned the camp into a new place. Their spirits +rose visibly and all the uncertainty of the night passed away. No one +felt the loss of sleep, and while the breakfast squad was busy another +detachment took the wet canvas and spread it out to dry. The blankets +and all personal effects were next in line and were hung on convenient +limbs to partake of the beneficial sun. + +Fortunately for them it was a warm day and things began to dry at once. +As the heat increased they began to shed outer garments so as to give +them a chance to dry also. The chill was out of their bodies and they +felt perfectly normal. + +“I feel better than I did before I got all wet!” declared one boy. + +“You’ll probably have a reaction later on,” advised Ted. “I mean that +you’ll probably get tired and want to sleep. We’ll all try a little +sleep after we get the tents up again.” + +The call for breakfast was now issued and disregarded by no one. With +whoops of delight they trooped around, tin plates thrust forward, +and for several minutes the cooks were busy young men. Never before +had breakfast tasted so good, and there was a general satisfaction +expressed. + +“The cooks are putting their best into it this morning,” said Drummer. + +“No differently than other mornings,” smiled Ted. “But you are +hungrier.” + +After breakfast the camp was cleaned up, the canvas reversed and the +blankets treated in the same manner. There was also another problem +before them and this had to do with the icebox. It had filled up with +water and they had to take everything out of it, pull out some of the +tin sheeting, and allow the water to seep into the ground. + +“We didn’t make it water-tight,” said Buck. + +“No, and the rain last night was so hard that it just settled above +the cover and leaked through. I see now where we have made a mistake. +Instead of sinking the ice chest so deep we ought to build it up a bit +and have the cover above ground, with sloping sides, so that the water +would run away from it. In that way a few drops might leak in, but not +a couple of quarts as it did last night.” + +Later in the day they made the improvement and did not have any further +trouble with wet weather in regard to their provisions. Then they +turned their attention to the tents, after having looked around back of +them for footprints, but there were none, so they gave it up. + +“We might find some way back in the bushes,” said Ted. “But we’ll look +’em up some other time. Let’s see what we can do with the tents.” + +They presented quite a problem, for the cut rope had to be tied +together. There was no extra rope to be had and while they were tieing +pieces together Ted had an idea. + +“Look here, I’ve got an idea which will keep us from using pegs or +having to tie all these ropes to the smaller pieces.” + +“What is it? I don’t see how—” + +“The tent ropes on one side of each tent are still tied to the pegs, +aren’t they?” + +“Sure.” + +“Well, the ropes have been cut on the sides of the tents facing each +other. Instead of bothering to tie new ropes and peg them down, lets +tie the ropes from each tent together and simply lay a heavy log across +the ropes. That will be heavy enough to hold down the canvas and when +it rains again we won’t have to loosen ropes because as the canvas +tightens it will simply raise the weighing logs a little bit.” + +“Say, that’s fine! We’ll do that!” approved Buck. + +On the sides of the tents where the cut ropes faced each other the +boys tied them together and then came the problem of logs. They did +not want to use old half-rotted logs and they did not care to cut down +good trees. Buck suggested that they seek out some trees that were dead +but still standing, and this they did, finding more than enough of +such trees. As soon as the best ones had been picked out they cut them +down to the desired length, brought them back to camp, and then laid +them across the ropes which stretched from tent to tent. Immediately +they weighed the canvas down by their pressure on the ropes much as +pegs would have drawn them tightly, and altogether proved themselves +satisfactory. + +“By George, any camp where they had more than one tent, could do that, +and it would be an improvement on pegs!” approved Buck. + +“Well, not exactly an improvement,” Ted shook his head. “Pegs give a +more direct and downward pull. But the logs make a good substitute. It +surely makes the camp look funny.” + +The sight of the three logs hanging on the ropes between tents might +have puzzled anyone who did not understand them, but the boys were +content with their work. The camp was now in good condition and the +reaction set in soon after the noon meal. The excitement and work had +kept them all wide awake, but now yawns began to be heard from them. + +“All of you fellows who want to can turn in for a good sleep,” said +Ted. “Just roll up in your blankets and snooze away! Everyone who +doesn’t feel like sleeping will please be quiet and give the others a +chance.” + +“I’d like to know who won’t be sleeping,” Bob smiled, rubbing his eyes. + +“I’m not going to sleep right away,” replied Ted. “Buck and I are going +over to the farmhouse where we buy the fresh supplies and get some +stuff. When we get back we’ll turn in.” + +The other boys straggled off at once to their tents, and wrapping +themselves in their blankets, fell asleep without any trouble. +Fortunately, the sun had passed far enough behind the trees so that the +rays did not beat down on the tents and they had no great difficulty in +getting to sleep. Ted and Buck put empty knapsacks on their backs and +started off for the farmhouse where they bought their provisions. + +“I certainly won’t mind a little sleep myself,” yawned Buck, as they +left the camp. + +“I won’t either,” his companion remarked. “But we’ll get back in time +to snatch a few hours when we do get back.” + +“Think we’ll learn anything from Farmer Crane?” + +“I don’t know, but I hope so. This thing is getting serious. So far the +boys haven’t been bad about it, although some of them are pretty scared +at times, but I don’t know how long it will last. The uncertainty of it +wears us down. We don’t know when somebody is going drop in and play a +trick on us. I want to find out what it is all about.” + +“If we find the person who is doing it,” said Buck, slowly, “we’ll +surely tell him a thing or two!” + +“If we ever catch him around the camp we’ll turn him over to the +police in short order,” was Ted’s grim promise. + +The farmer was glad to see them and he listened with interest to their +story of the cutting of the tent ropes during the storm. It was felt +that there was no need to tell him anything else, for fear that it +would get abroad too much. The farmer was interested and excited. + +“Somebody must have a grudge agin you fellers!” he cried. “Nobody’d be +doing that for fun.” + +“It must be somebody up this way, then,” said Ted. “Somebody doesn’t +want us around. We thought it was that fellow you spoke to us about, +the man who lives over in the log cabin, but he couldn’t have been the +one, because we saw him a few minutes before all this happened.” + +“Can’t think of no one else, ’less it could of been old Jerry Jackson, +who lives over in Hogs’ Hollow,” mused the farmer. + +“Where is Hogs’ Hollow?” + +“’Bout a mile beyond where your camp is. It is a swampy sort of a place +not fit for nothin’ but hogs to live in, and old Jerry has a shack +there. But he never bothers no one and I don’t know why he’d ever want +to chase you out of there.” + +“I guess he couldn’t have anything to do with it,” agreed Ted. “By +the way, what is that house way up on the mountain, the one where the +furniture is still in the place? Looks like it was furnished and never +used.” + +“Oh, that’s the Bainbridge place,” was the reply. “Rich feller by the +name of Bainbridge built that house for his wife and it sure was a +handsome dwellin’! I saw it when it was first finished, and I want to +tell you it had more gilt and brass and blue and everything than any +place I ever saw. Well, Bainbridge was lookin’ forward to bringin’ his +wife up there—she’d never seen it—when she decided she wasn’t goin’ to +live up in no mountains, and she finally up and run off with somebody +else. Bainbridge spent a lot of time mopin’ around the place and acted +like he was half-crazy, and then finally he disappeared. Nobody knows +where he is today.” + +“That fellow over in the cabin isn’t Bainbridge, is he?” Buck asked, +quickly. + +“Oh, no! I know both of ’em by sight, and that ain’t him. No, unless +Bainbridge’s ghost is hangin’ around that old house. I don’t know where +he is.” + +They paid for their provisions and then tramped back to camp, +discussing the affair between them. Nothing definite appeared to have +been learned from the farmer and they decided to keep a stricter +lookout in the camp. + +“If we ever hear anybody around in the bushes we’ll have to make a dash +for them,” said Buck. + +Arriving at the camp they found it apparently deserted and perfectly +quiet, but a glance into the tents showed that all of the boys were +asleep. Very quietly they packed the provisions in the improved ice +chest, and then as quietly crawled into their blankets for a nap. For +the next three hours the camp was so still that anyone looking down +upon it would have decided that it was deserted, and then, as the +coolness of the evening came on, first one and then another began to +stir, until the whole camp was awake. + +Supper was eaten and then they sat around, content to remain in the +camp. Just before they turned in there was a dispute about the Black +Riders and Ted was called upon. + +“It was started by a man named Simon Reed,” he said. + +“I don’t think many of us know the story,” Alfred Paulson said, +thoughtfully. “Won’t you tell it to us, Ted?” + +“You want me to tell you the story of the Black Riders?” Ted asked. + +There was a general nod of assent. He looked at his watch, shaking his +head. + +“It is getting too late now,” he said. “But I’ll tell it to you after +supper tomorrow night.” + +Back of them a stick broke sharply and a few of them turned their heads +to look in the direction of the tents. But in the talk that followed no +one paid any further attention to it. + +On the following evening, after the supper, Ted faced an expectant +group of boys. They were ranged in a bow formation, with the ends drawn +in toward the middle, and Ted stood near the fire. They were very quiet +and he began at once. + +“Most of you fellows know something about the history of the +Revolutionary War at the time that Washington and his men were in +Valley Forge, about forty miles from here, and the British were having +a gay old time in Philadelphia. The British and the Hessians were all +around here, a fine, fully equipped army of men, while the ragged, +cold, heroic Americans were freezing over in Valley Forge. That was +in the winter of 1777 and 1778, if my memory serves me correctly, and +things in this particular part of the country were in pretty bad shape.” + +“There was a man down in Germantown by the name of Simon Reed, and he +was a patriot who had never run away even in the face of the British. +He knew that up in these mountains there were some wild, hard-fighting +farmers, and he used to slip out this way nights to get them organized. +Right in this hollow they used to meet, all dressed in black, all of +them riding black horses, and here they’d make up their plans to annoy +the British. They used to go stealing out of here and lay in wait +for stray British baggage trains, and then they’d swoop down on them +and capture them. All through the winter they did such good work for +Washington that they came to be recognized as the Black Riders. You +know, during the Revolution, there were a number of cracker-jack bands +of fighting men who just hung onto the British flanks and worried them +to death, Marion’s men in the South, and Morgan’s Riflemen, Light-Horse +Harry Lee’s men, and others. These Black Riders were a smaller bunch, +but they helped a lot.” + +“After awhile things got so hot for them around here that Washington +had them taken into the regular army as part of Light-Horse Harry Lee’s +division and they ceased to be known as the Black Riders from then on. +But people around here always remembered them from the days before they +joined Lee and this spot had always been known as their camp.” + +“Gosh, that’s a great story!” exclaimed Drummer. + +“It must have been great to have met here and planned their raids,” +said another boy, looking around him. + +“Wish I could see what one looked like,” said Bob Gilmore. + +The words were scarcely out of his mouth when something happened which +left the boys speechless with wonder. There was a soft flare of light +near them and they all turned their heads toward the end of the camp +nearest the foot of the mountains, to where a flat, moss-covered rock +jutted out. There on the rock, lighted by the soft, noiseless glow, was +a black horse and seated upon it, a rider dressed entirely in black, +with a wide black hat pulled over his face. The glow burned only for a +brief second, but in that second horse and rider stared straight ahead, +and then the flare went out, and the Black Rider and his black horse +disappeared from view. + + + + +CHAPTER XV + +MUTINY + + +The silence that succeeded the vision of the Black Rider on the rock +was a vast and throbbing one, and the senses of the boys reeled +slightly under the shock. Ted still stood in his position staring +toward the rock on which the fascinating thing had showed, his heart +beating like a trip-hammer and his mouth curiously dry. In the very +atmosphere there was a sense of unreality. + +The figure had been real, yet ghostly. All of them were sure that they +had seen an actual man seated on a very real horse exposed for an +instant on the rock, and yet the very immoveableness of it inspired a +feeling of awe. There was no second flush of light and nothing broke +the silence. + +Then the tongues of the boys were unloosed like a flood and they all +talked at once. They scrambled to their feet, confused and uncertain. +The fire had burned so low that the darkness pressed in tightly upon +them, and a few, with more presence of mind than the rest, threw some +fresh wood on the fire, where it blazed up and dimly showed the rock +upon which the Black Rider had appeared. But there was no sign of him +now. + +“What in the world do you suppose that was?” Buck demanded, bounding to +Ted’s side. + +“You certainly have me,” was the fervent reply. “I never saw anything +like it in my life. Bob had just said that he would like to see a Black +Rider and one just glowed out. It is beyond me.” + +“If anybody believes in ghosts, that was surely a ghost of a former +Black Rider,” said Buck. “But there is a trick in it somewhere. Look +how he just glowed and then went out. Come on, let’s investigate that +rock.” + +Without argument Ted took the lantern and he had taken two strides +before Buck could catch up with him. Ted was trying to get the incident +straight in his mind and he was eager to see that rock. A few of the +boys straggled after them, but the bigger group remained near the +campfires. + +Arriving at the rock the two older boys quickly bent forward and looked +at the flat top of the big stone. There was a slight film of moss on +it and the moss was marked by the feet of a horse, very faintly, but +marked, nevertheless. + +“Well, it was a sure enough horse, anyway,” commented Ted, as he kept +flashing the light around the rock. “Look here!” + +He pointed out a thin white line with purple edges which ran across the +rock. Buck studied it, but for the moment its meaning escaped him. + +“What is it?” he asked. + +“Evidently it was a line of powder, something like flashlight powder, +only calculated to burn longer,” explained Ted. “Whoever led the horse +out here set a powder train and then got on the horse and waited. He +must have been able to hear all that we said around the campfire, and +Bob’s words gave him just the cue he wanted. Somehow or other, maybe by +a small pocket battery wire, he set off the powder and played spirit, +if that is what he was meant to be.” + +“I guess that is so,” nodded Buck. “Say, you remember that snapping +sound we heard last night?” + +“Yes, and I guess I see what you mean. This fellow must have heard us +planning and then he planned a little plan of his own. I’ll bet that +fellow is in and around our camp more than we know about!” + +“Believe me, we must lay our hands on that fellow,” said Buck, grimly. +“We had better begin to lay some traps for him when we get back.” + +“Yes, we’ve simply got to get him. Come on and see if we can follow the +tracks of the horse’s hoofs.” + +They were able to find the spot where the horse had stepped onto the +rock and a few hoof prints nearby, but the man who had arranged the +thing had done his work well. For yards around the ground was half rock +and no print showed. + +“No use hunting around any more tonight,” said Ted, after they had +spent a half hour in fruitless effort. “In daylight we might be able to +see something worth while, but never with the light of the lantern. I +think those hoofs must have been muffled.” + +“Oh, there is no doubt of that,” replied Buck. “There was no sound when +the horse was led out on the rock and no sound when he retreated. This +man knows what he is doing.” + +“Yes, and do you know, we’re dealing with an educated man and no Jerry +Jackson from Hogs’ Hollow. This man knows more than one thing and when +we find a man who is a historian we’ll have our man. He knew just how +a Black Rider should be dressed and he did the thing to perfection. +Maybe he is doing it for a big joke, I don’t know.” + +“But cutting our tent ropes is no joke, I don’t care how well educated +a man is!” reminded Buck, as they made their way back toward the camp. + +“Oh, I agree with you there and I must confess that I can’t begin to +see his idea. If he just wants to get rid of us, he is going to a +lot of trouble, because we aren’t going. On the other hand, is there +something around there that he doesn’t want us to see or know it is +going on?” + +“That is something we’ll have to find out,” Buck answered. “I hope we +find out soon, too, because this stuff is getting my goat. Well, I see +that the boys are still around the fires. They must have received a +pretty rough shock this time.” + +As the two chums approached the group they noted that there were two +distinct sections of it, one centering around Drummer and the other +around Ralph Plum. They were strangely silent as the two leaders came +in and no one asked a single question. + +“Well, somebody likes to play jokes on us, and that Black Rider one was +a good one,” smiled Ted. + +“That wasn’t a joke, Thorn,” said Ralph Plum, quietly. + +“Well, I suppose it was a joke,” countered Ted. “We found that somebody +had put some light powder on the rock and then lighted it so as to show +himself off as a Black Rider. If they didn’t do it for a joke, I don’t +know what they did it for.” + +“Well, some of us are through with this camping trip,” said Plum. +“We’re going home!” + +Ted counted the boys who were grouped around Plum. “Seven of you,” he +said, coolly. “All of you going home?” + +“Yes, they are going home and I’m going to take them home,” sneered +Plum, his self-control breaking down. Each day had added to his +irritation at the small part he played in the camp and he was aroused +at the chance which had come his way. “These boys aren’t safe in this +camp and I’m going to take them home and let their parents know that I +brought them safely home, too!” + +Ted smiled slightly. “Yes, I’m pretty sure that you’ll do that, Plum!” + +Ralph Plum stepped closer and tapped Ted on the chest. “You know just a +little too much, Thorn! I don’t like the way you have been running this +camp, anyway. I’m one of the older fellows here and I wasn’t even made +a tent captain. My family gave money to this club and I don’t even get +any recognition out of it. I told you several days ago that this camp +wasn’t safe and you wouldn’t listen and go somewhere else. Now, I’m +going to take these boys home with me, and you won’t stop me!” + +Ted’s temper trembled dangerously, but he turned to the other boys. “Do +you boys want to go home?” he asked them. They looked at each other and +then one or two nodded. + +“I don’t think they really want to go,” cried out Drummer, angrily. +“Plum has been telling them that they ought to go home and making up +big yarns about something happening to them if they don’t get out of +here! All he wants is to get them home and get a lot of credit for it!” + +“Say, you just keep your——” began Plum, lunging toward Drummer, who +immediately struck an attitude of defense. + +“Wait a minute!” Ted cut in, stopping Plum’s rush. “Is it true that you +have been working up fear in the minds of the boys?” + +“No!” shouted Plum. “But some of us decided that we have had enough of +this camp and that we are going home. You can’t stop us, Thorn.” + +“I don’t want to stop you,” replied Ted, quietly. “If you want to go, +you can go ahead. I can’t keep you here by force and I wouldn’t try to. +Only, you are doing the very thing that the unknown person wishes you +to do. Somebody is trying to scare us out of this camp and they haven’t +succeeded in doing it yet. Now you decide that you will go home and +admit defeat to this man who wishes you to clear out. Not very brave, +is it?” + +“Never mind about brave!” growled Plum. “There is only one reason why +you don’t want to give up the encampment and that is because you are +afraid the trustees will say that you gave it up and they won’t ask you +to be big boss another year!” + +“I hadn’t thought of it that way,” smiled Ted. “Are you thinking of +starting for home tonight?” + +“No, but we will the first thing in the morning,” promised Plum. + +“All right,” nodded Ted. “When the daylight comes if there are any of +you who still think that you want to go home, why, just march right +ahead. The rest of us will finish out our vacation here in Black +Riders’ Camp.” + +“You bet we will,” said Bob Gilmore. + +“You are welcome to do it,” retorted Plum. “It is as plain as can be +that somebody doesn’t want us around here, so why should we hang +around?” + +“Who has a right to chase us out of this camp?” demanded Buck. + +“I don’t know, but I do know that I won’t stay here any longer,” said +Plum flatly, and he walked off with his own friends, one of whom Ted +was surprised to note was the small Clayton boy. He excused the little +fellow in his mind. + +“Oh, well, he’s pretty young and he’s probably scared,” he thought. + +The rebels hung around the tents talking and the loyal party stood at +somewhat of a loss near the fire. Buck was inclined to be more vigorous +about it than Ted was. + +“That Plum needs a good punch on the nose!” he declared, with emphasis. + +“I guess he’d go home, punch or no punch,” grinned Ted. + +“Yes, but he’d really draw those youngsters with him just on his own +arguments. You ought to talk to them and try and keep them here with +us.” + +“I’m going to wait until morning before I say anything,” said Ted. “By +that time some of the boys will have experienced a change of heart. +Tonight they are scared and that will take time to work off. Did he try +to win over all of you fellows?” + +“Yes,” replied Charlie. “When you had gone to examine the rock he told +us that the place was unsafe and that he was sure that some dangerous +spirit was controlling the camp. Drummer asked him if he believed in +ghosts and he said no, but he wasn’t going to stay in the camp any +longer. He worked on the smaller fellows by saying that you would never +give up until something serious happened to somebody, because the club +was going to pay you and Buck something and if you didn’t make the camp +a success you wouldn’t be paid.” + +“Well, that is news to us,” Ted smiled to his chum. + +“The same old argument every agitator uses when he wants to start +trouble,” said Buck. + +“Well, let’s turn in and forget it until morning,” advised Ted. + +They passed the silent group near the tents and entered the shelters, +proceeding at once to get undressed. It looked for a moment as though +the ones outside were going to remain up, but they straggled in at +last and went to bed. As Ted was crawling in the small boy came in and +started to undress. + +“I’m not going, Ted,” he said. “I’m going to stay with you.” + +“Good boy!” was Ted’s only comment. + +The night was peaceful and in the morning the two bands again formed +in groups, the ones who were going to leave sticking close to Plum and +the others working at the meal as though nothing had happened. The +rebels did their share but said nothing and they ate in an unbroken +silence. + +Besides Tom Clayton there had been another desertion from the ranks of +those who were leaving. Alfred Paulson refused to go with Plum and his +party. The new section leader tried to argue him into it. + +“No, Ted is the leader of this camp,” said Alfred, firmly. + +“He was the leader of it, you mean!” Plum said loudly. “Pretty soon +he’ll be leading himself home all alone! Something else will happen +around here and then the rest of the fellows will come running home, so +you might just as well come now.” + +“I’m going to stay right here with Ted!” said Alfred, stubbornly. + +The breakfast was over and the rebels who were on committees helped to +put the camp in order. When it was over with Plum spoke to his four +young companions and they went straight to their tents and began to get +their duffle together. The others stood and watched them in silence for +a time. + +“Confound it, this breaking up of the camp will give us somewhat of a +black eye!” grumbled Buck. + +“No it won’t.” Ted shook his head. “But it won’t do this camp site any +good.” The ones who were about to depart were now ready and they stood +around waiting for something. Ted sauntered over to Plum. + +“Going to walk all the way home?” he asked, as his own friends gathered +around. + +“Sure! I guess we can do it, can’t we?” + +“You can, of course. It is between thirty and forty miles, and the +fellows you are taking with you aren’t used to any such hikes as that. +You have planned to camp somewhere by the road, of course? You are +going to buy food somewhere, too, aren’t you?” + +“I’ll attend to that,” was the confident reply. “I have money and we +can camp anywhere in a field. Don’t you worry, Thorn, I will manage. I +don’t do things like you do.” + +“No, you don’t,” agreed Ted, softly, his hands sunk in his pockets. + +Plum turned to Ted’s tent, a frown on his face. “Come on, hurry up!” +he cried, angrily, and to Ted’s surprise Tom Clayton appeared with his +pack on. The little fellow did not look happy. + +“What is the matter, Tom?” Ted asked. “Did you have a change of heart?” + +“No, but Plum says I better come home,” replied the boy. “He says if I +don’t he’ll tell my mother and she’ll come up here and take me home. I +don’t like to leave you, but I don’t want my mother to worry.” + +The careless look vanished at once from Ted’s face and his hands came +out of his pockets. He squared his shoulders as he looked Plum in the +face. + +“He won’t go home and tell your mother, Tom,” the camp leader said, +quietly. His tone changed and hardened as he pointed his finger at the +trouble-maker. “You, Plum, take off your pack, because I’m going to +give you a good thrashing!” + + + + +CHAPTER XVI + +THINGS ARE SETTLED MAN-FASHION + + +For a moment after Ted made his announcement there was a complete +silence as the boys looked from one to the other of them. Plum just +stared at Ted, who looked him levelly in the eyes. + +“You’re going to what?” demanded Plum, slowly. + +“I’m going to give you a sound thrashing for being a trouble maker +in this camp and for trying to force Tom to go home with you,” Ted +repeated. + +His last wish was to stage a fight in front of the small boys, for he +did not wish to set an example of fighting if he could help it. There +was no physical reason why he should not engage Plum in combat, because +the boy, though younger, was broader of shoulder and heavier than he +was, but Ted was determined that he had something definite coming +to him for his actions. He rather hoped that Plum would back down, +so that the smaller boys would not be treated to an exhibition of a +fight between two older boys, but he felt warmly that Plum deserved a +trouncing. + +But as it so happened, Plum was in no mood to back down. Eagerly he +welcomed the prospect of a fight and on the previous night he had +purposely pushed Ted rather roughly on the chest with the sole object +of angering him and starting a fight. He knew now that he would have +to prove himself in the eyes of his friends and show his leadership. +Long ago and more than once he had looked Ted over with a calculating +eye and the conclusion that he could “lick” him at any time had been in +his mind for several days. It was with visible joy that he accepted the +invitation for battle. + +“You’re going to thrash me, eh?” he sneered, thrusting forward his +chin. “So that’s what you think you are going to do, is it? Why, if I +couldn’t tie you up in a knot I’d go back home and join a kindergarten!” + +“Join whatever you please, but take your pack off,” nodded Ted. + +The pack was slipped off in a rush and the coat followed. Ted stood +ready and waiting while Plum rolled up his sleeves. The other boys +crowded around, some of the smaller ones looking a bit scared. Tom +Clayton put in a last word. + +“You mustn’t fight on account of me,” he said, looking distressed. + +Before Ted could reply Plum struck in with: “Don’t worry, we aren’t +going to fight over you, kid. This Thorn has had a trimming coming to +him for a long time and I’m going to give it to him! He’s been the big +boss around here for some time and he has put it on thick. Telling us +when to go to bed and when to get up and when to eat and when to do +everything, like he was the king of the country or something! When we +fellows who are going home do get home we’ll go off on a camping trip +of our own and we’ll do things to suit ourselves. Get on guard, Thorn!” + +“Wait a minute!” cried Buck, who was burning to take Ted’s place, but +who kept quiet with some difficulty. “This affair has to be run right. +Two minute rounds, and I’m the boss! You start and finish when I say +so!” + +Plum dropped his hands to his side. “Say, this is a fight, not a boxing +match! I want to lick him in a hurry and I don’t want to have to stop +right when I’m going strong.” + +“If you want to do it in a hurry, two minutes ought to be plenty of +time,” retorted Buck. He took out his watch. “Here, all the rest of you +get back and form a big circle. When I say time you start and when I +say time again, you stop. Got that clear, Plum?” + +“Sure. Let’s get going and stop all the hot air!” + +Buck looked at his watch, and then, “Time!” he called. + +Ted and Plum faced each other grimly, squared off for the battle. + +In his crouching attitude Plum looked bulky and menacing, while Ted +looked cool and alert. Plum began to advance, his steps cautious and +his fists poised in the attitude of a boxer. He had taken lessons in +the art and was no novice at it, while Ted had confined his activities +to neighborhood scraps which had been informal affairs and in which he +had been as often beaten as victorious. But he had no fear of Plum, who +was to be counted on for more in the line of bluster and noise than for +anything else. + +They were close now and Ted tried a light shot which was quickly +blocked by the other boy. Plum then jabbed quickly at the camp leader +with his right, stopped the blow halfway and landed with his left on +the shoulder. That tap, light as it was, started the fight off in +earnest, for Ted bored in, disregarding a few shots at close range and +the fight was actually on. + +Plum knew how to box well and most of the close-in blows which Ted +directed toward him were deftly and completely blocked. In return he +shook Ted up, planting his blows almost at will, though Ted kept his +chin covered up. When Buck called time for the first round they had +just warmed up. + +Ted retired to one side of the ring to recover his breath and Plum +walked across to the other. “How many rounds is this thing going to +be?” Ralph demanded. + +“It will go on until one of you admits that he is licked,” replied +Buck. He glanced again at his watch. “Time is up. Go to it.” + +This time Plum was out to win. He rushed in with his head down and +his heavy fists swung like battering rams. Ted was forced to put all +the strength he had into his footwork, for Plum was on the march and +would not be denied. He had the weight to keep on coming and Ted was +unable to stop him. There was no cautious poking this time, but serious +rushing and stepping aside. To keep his feet at all Ted was forced to +move fast. + +During this round, busy as he was, Ted saw that he was making a mistake +by allowing Plum to get the start. With a rushing start and the power +of a heavier body the big boy had everything his own way and it was +impossible for Ted to do more than keep him off. From his football +playing Ted was fast and nimble, but he hadn’t gone into the argument +just to run around the ring. Plum must be punished or he would draw +most of the boys away from the camp and spoil a perfectly good Summer. + +When the round was over he thought seriously of the affair in which +he was engaged. It was no good natured argument that didn’t matter +very much whether he won or not. He realized that he must win, or the +breaking up of the camp would be a blow from which he would not recover +in a long time. Most of the boys would desert him and return home with +Plum, he was sure, and the failure would make the trustees of the +club regret their choice of him as the leader. Boys naturally follow +the one who can lead, even if that leadership is attained by the use +of ready fists, and Plum, swaggering in the triumph of the physical +victory, could split the camp so as to spoil its effectiveness. It was +imperative that he win the fight before him, not only for the good of +the camp, but for the effect it would have on the minds of the boys. + +He looked across at Plum and saw that he was breathing heavily. Plum +was not an outdoor boy in the strictest sense of the word and he did +not play on any athletic team. He was just naturally strong and he +did enjoy boxing, a subject he knew something about, as a dozen sore +spots, combined with a split lip, led Ted to believe. But his wind was +not good and his chest rose and fell in a way that looked painful. + +“My best bet is to make him run around after me this round and then +finish him in the next,” thought Ted, as Buck called time again. + +Plum again charged and Ted side-stepped, leading him a chase around the +ring. The boys had been rather silent the first two rounds but now, +gripped with excitement, they called the names of their favorites, and +Plum’s name was as prominent as Ted’s. Just as Plum had calculated his +readiness to fight and his swagger had won the smaller boys to him and +they were loudly shouting for his success. + +Ted found difficulty in keeping out of Plum’s way and his movements +annoyed the other. “Come on, fight, and don’t run away!” roared Plum. +“If you are scared, just quit! I’ve got you licked, anyway!” + +The speech was an unfortunate one, for in giving it the trouble-maker +had raised his head and carelessly lowered his arms a bit. Most of the +blows so far had been body blows, both boys keeping their faces well +sheltered, but as Plum spoke Ted jabbed a blow at him which Plum was +unable to guard against. It landed with a resounding smack against his +cheek bone and his head jarred. As he hesitated in surprise Ted hooked +one into his ribs. + +By this time Plum was on guard again and stung to fury he waded in +while Ted retreated. Around the ring they went, Plum making a furious +attack which was beginning to break down Ted’s guard. Just then Buck +called time and Ted stepped back. + +Plum turned to Buck, his eyes furious and his face red. “I don’t care +a hang about time!” he shouted. “I didn’t want to make this a boxing +match, anyway, and I won’t make it one! I’m going to show Thorn that he +can’t boss me and tell me he’ll thrash me and that’s what I’m going to +do. Come on, you, put up your hands!” + +“Nothing doing!” snapped Buck, leaping into the circle and thrusting +himself in between them. “You’re going to run this according to rules!” + +“Like fun I am! You get out of the way or I’ll take you on!” + +“With the greatest of pleasure!” promptly cried Buck, squaring off. + +“I’d just as soon give it to you as to him!” yelled Plum. This was a +well calculated piece of acting, and the boys who stood for Plum felt +him rise heroically in their eyes. + +Ted pushed Buck to one side. “This is my fight, Buck, old man. Put +your watch away, because this is a fight to the finish!” + +Buck reluctantly allowed himself to be pushed out of the ring, at the +same time pushing his watch back in his pocket. Then Ted advanced +determinedly on Plum and the latter began a crouching advance on him. +There was now no more boxing and no more dodging around. Plum was tired +and his breath came heavily, while Ted was filled with quiet, steady +purpose. He felt that there was but one thing to do, and that was to +wade in and finish up the other boy as rapidly as possible. When they +came together with a shock there was no more boxing and feinting, but +they stormed in close and exchanged punches with determination. + +Here Ted found that he was equal at least of the other and they traded +some jarring punches at close range. The breath of the heavier boy was +growing shorter, while Ted was in no way distressed. With a mighty +lunge Plum shot a stiff punch at Ted’s face, and the latter, drawing +his head to one side, countered with a sharp one to Plum’s ribs. Plum +grunted, turned, and Ted found his jaw unguarded for an instant. He +found it a moment later with his left fist, and as Plum staggered Ted +bored in for the finish. + +And it was the finish. Fighting blindly, Plum gave ground and lost his +grip on his guard. In bewilderment he raised and lowered his hands and +Ted, keenly alive to what was going on, punished him at will. A left to +the jaw and another right to the cheek sent Plum down in a heap, while +Ted stood panting, waiting for him to get up. + +But Plum was through and he knew it. Moaning feebly, he felt of his jaw +and his face, which was beginning to swell. Unsteadily he got to his +feet. + +“Ready for more?” Ted asked, quietly. + +“No, I’ve had enough,” Plum gasped, wiping a cut lip. “I’m—I’m going +home.” + +Ted turned to the others around him. “Plum is going home. Are any of +you fellows going with him?” + +There was no reply. They looked from Plum to Ted but no one spoke. +Slowly Plum rolled down his sleeves, put on his coat and slung his pack +on his shoulders. + +“Anybody going with me?” he asked, keeping his eyes away from Ted and +Buck. + +No one spoke up and the boys who were ready to go looked foolishly at +the ground. Ted spoke to them sharply. + +“This is the last call,” he said. “If any of you are going with Plum, +go now! But if you don’t go with him, remember that you are to stay +here, subject to the orders of Buck and myself, and we’re not leaving +this spot until Labor Day unless something happens that we couldn’t +stay to face. So if you want to leave, leave now.” + +Still no one moved and Plum put on his hat, his air one of sullen +defiance. He looked around him sneeringly. + +“All right, you kids just stay here and hang around Thorn, if you want +to!” he said. “But I’ll fix this camp! I’m going home and tell all over +town what is happening, and I’ll bet your fathers and mothers will come +running for you.” + +“You just go ahead and do that, Plum!” advised Buck. “When the parents +come out here we’ll show them that we are still in camp and that you +were the only one who got scared and ran home! You, the biggest boy in +the camp, went home, because you were afraid to stay!” + +At once Plum saw his case. He could not possibly remain in camp after +his thrashing from Ted and if he went back to town and told any stories +the result would be as Buck had pictured it. He had lost all around and +the knowledge was a bitter one. + +He turned and walked out of the camp without a word or a backward +glance. + +They stood and watched him go in silence, the ring still unbroken. +Then first one boy and then another of the ones who had packed to go +with him, shed his knapsack and blanket, tossing them in the tents. The +atmosphere seemed to have cleared magically. + +“Well, sir!” enthused Buck, slapping Ted on the back. “That was a +bang-up fight! Now that he is gone things will be a little sweeter +around here. He was the big disturbing element.” + +“Except the fellow who has been annoying us all this time,” reminded +Ted. + +“Yes, that is so. If we could only get rid of him as you did of Plum.” + +“Maybe we can,” said Ted. “I have thought out a plan to trap that +party.” + + + + +CHAPTER XVII + +BUCK’S SQUAD TAKES THE FIELD + + +Ted refused at the time to reveal the details of his plan for trapping +the person who was annoying them in their camp, but he promised that he +would later on. Feeling that a good part of the morning had been wasted +in the details of his fight with Plum, he preferred that they get +things done around the camp. This was attended to and then he and Buck +had two important matters to attend to. + +The first was that of seeking the tracks of the horse who had posed on +the rock on the previous evening, with a view to tracing the animal in +the hope of obtaining some clue as to its owner. They went to the rock +and searched carefully around, moving away from it with eyes alert to +pick up the mark of a hoof, but the ground around was too rocky to help +them any. Some fifty feet away from it they found one print but that +was all, and they finally gave it up as a bad job. + +“When that fellow brought the horse down to the rock he made a good job +of it,” Ted admitted, mopping his forehead. “He didn’t mean that we +were to find any hoof prints.” + +“But a horse is pretty heavy, and I should think he would be bound to +leave marks,” murmured Buck. + +“Well, there is a way to do everything,” said Ted, with a grin. “I +remember a trick I used to work on my father. I used to go swimming +over in Tier’s Pond that summer you were away and the only way to get +there without hoofing it was to take the horse and carriage, because I +was small then and didn’t have the old car. But I knew if my dad saw +the wheel prints and the hoof prints in the gravel, he’d know I had +taken the carriage and the horse, which he didn’t want me to take, so +I put a couple of blankets down and walked the horse across them, then +went back and picked up the first one and put it down ahead of the +horse’s hoofs, and in that way we got out of the drive without leaving +a mark. When I came back at night I used to spread them out again and +get in without so much as a trace showing. Maybe that is what our +friend of last night did.” + +“I wouldn’t doubt it. He had everything carefully planned, and we’ll +have to hustle some to catch up with him.” + +After lunch the two leaders went to the farmhouse and there Ted used +the telephone to call Lawyer Calvert. When the president of the club +got on the wire Ted told him the events of the past few days and +narrated his reason for thrashing Plum. The lawyer listened without +comment until he was finished. + +“You did just what was right, Thorn,” he told Ted. “That boy had it +coming to him for a long time. When he gets in town I’ll see to it +that he doesn’t spread any stories around among the parents. But are +you sure that everything is all right? You don’t need any special +protection?” + +“I don’t think so, Mr. Calvert,” replied Ted. “So far we have managed +to stand it and I think that we’ll be able to face it to the end. I +have some plans for setting a trap for the man, whoever he is, and +I think we’ll fix him so that he’ll stay away. If things should get +serious I would let you know, and if necessary abandon the camp, but +I’m pretty sure that it won’t come to that.” + +“All right, just as you say. You are in complete charge and I rely on +you. If you need any more money with which to buy provisions, call me +and I’ll see to it that you get it.” + +Ted promised to do so and with that the conversation came to an end. +The farmer and his wife had listened openly to the conversation on +Ted’s part, and they quite frankly let him see it in their subsequent +words. + +“Sho, you boys havin’ a little trouble down to your camp, ain’t you?” +the farmer said, as Ted joined Buck in the kitchen of the house. + +“Yes, but we’ll get at the bottom of it pretty soon,” affirmed Ted. “By +the way, if you should hear from any one around that they know anything +about it, you might let me know.” + +“I’ll sure do that,” promised the farmer. “Anybody ought to be ashamed +to go botherin’ you while you ain’t doing nothing but enjoyin’ yourself +campin’.” + +“I’d be scared to death to stay down there at night,” the farmer’s wife +shook her head. + +The next move on Ted’s part was strange even to Buck. They went to +Montvery and there Ted bought ten cheap flashlights. + +“What is the idea?” Buck demanded. “We have lanterns in the camp and we +don’t really need flashlights. A few of us have them already and there +is plenty of oil for the lamps.” + +“I know, but I want every boy to have a flashlight. It is part of the +plan which I will unfold when we get back to camp.” + +When they arrived at the camp they found the boys in swimming, with +their clothing piled in plain sight on the bank of Bear Creek. “We +didn’t trust this place,” Drummer confided. “We were afraid if we left +the clothes in the tent somebody would walk off with ’em or make them +vanish or something!” + +When they were all out and dressed Ted called them in a knot around +him. They stood away from the tents and the tress, out in the open +space. + +“I want to tell you what I have in mind out here where no one could +possibly be listening,” he began. “So many funny things happen around +here that I’m afraid to talk for fear that my words will be overheard. +What I wanted to tell you is this: Up until now this pest has been +scaring us and running away, laughing up his sleeve—if he has a sleeve! +We don’t know enough about him to know how he does dress, unless he’s +a fake Black Rider all the time. Every time he has bothered us we sit +here looking dazed and let him get away from us. Now, my idea is this: +to create two distinct squads, a camp squad and a chasing squad. We’ll +settle after awhile who is to be who, but for the time being we’ll see +what each one is to do.” + +“This afternoon I bought flashlights for those who haven’t any and from +now on, as soon as it gets dark, we’ll wear ’em on our belts. Don’t +leave them in your tents for a single minute! We have lanterns in the +tents, but by the time we get the lanterns lighted and started off, +the would-be terror could get a good start and we’d never nail him. +Because the chasing squad is to form and run after the man the minute +there is a suspicious sound around the camp!” + +There was a stir of expectancy and the boys looked a bit startled but +more pleased than anything else. Ted went on: “Buck will be the head of +the chasing squad and I’ll take care of the camp squad. The reason I +don’t want every one to go running out and chasing up the mountain is +because I don’t think the camp should ever be left alone. The chasing +squad will be composed of the fastest runners, and also the biggest +fellows, just in case you have to use any force on anyone, though it +isn’t likely that a bunch of boys such as we are could ever handle a +grown man, but if we can get a line on the direction he runs in we’ll +begin to learn something.” + +“You get the point, don’t you? As soon as there is any unusual noise, +Buck’s squad forms and runs in that direction. The rest of us stay in +camp and guard it against surprise. I’ve got another thought in regard +to trapping a visitor, but this one will do for now. From this time on +we’ll be doing something besides sitting still and just listening and +looking scared. Now, lets pick squads.” + +The biggest and oldest boys, seven in number, were immediately picked +for Buck’s squad and the rest were reserved for the camp watch. Some of +the boys were disappointed because they couldn’t run with the active +group, but Ted was determined to make his two sections effective. There +was a lot of chattering on the subject and the leader was compelled to +warn them to keep things quiet. + +“Think they will be eager for action when the time comes?” Buck asked. + +“I guess they will. They know that a bunch of them will be in action +and that makes a difference. I think it will work out.” + +The flashlights were passed out and from that time on the boys carried +them on their belts and longed for action. But two nights sped by +without anything unusual happening and they began to think that +everything was over, when the third evening brought action suddenly. + +They were sitting around the campfire when there was a sliding sound +back of them and a tiny avalanche of dirt and stones rolled down behind +the tents. There was a crashing noise as though someone had landed +in the bushes, and then, as they peered in a startled manner toward +the rear of the camp they saw a figure bolt into the shrubs near the +springs. + +“There he goes! Go after him!” shouted Ted, and Buck frantically pulled +at his flashlight. The other boys followed his lead as he darted off, +and in an instant the peaceful camp was demoralized. The eight boys on +the chasing squad were running across the camp toward the springs and +the others who were to remain in camp were urging them on at the top of +their lungs. + +Drummer joined Buck and they came to the bottom of the rise, pushing +their way up it with their lights turned on. They could hear the sound +of the running man in front of them, and it was evident that he had +thrown all caution to the wind in an endeavor to get away from them. On +flat ground Drummer would not have been able to keep up with his chief, +but his sturdy legs were good for climbing and he was able to remain +pretty close to Buck’s side. Back of them the other boys ran along, +forgetting nervousness in the excitement of the chase. + +The camp lay far behind them now and they noted that the man was taking +a course off in the direction which Farmer Crane had told them was the +way to Hogs’ Hollow. If this was the man from that region he would +speedily lose them, for it was evident that he knew the country and at +the first opportunity he would conceal himself and let them hunt for +him at will. But just now he seemed to be putting all of his strength +and skill into his running. He had no light and must have been very +familiar with the surrounding country. + +He was drawing ahead of them now and the noise of his running footsteps +was growing dimmer. The country became wilder and rocks protruded +jagged heads above the mountain soil. The woods had given way to open +country thickly sprinkled with bushes and before they had run many +yards further they came across a narrow road that was little more than +a wagon track. Drummer and Buck were becoming winded and the other boys +had dropped out of the swift running, though they were still advancing. + +A stone wall, long and low, loomed up before them and beyond a set of +stones which seemed more orderly than the ones they had encountered +thus far in their run, attracted their attention. The flashlights +revealed the fact that they were grave stones and they had arrived at a +little country graveyard. They stopped to get breath. + +“Ow, that was a tough run!” gasped Drummer, leaning on the wall. + +“You bet it was!” agreed Buck, as two other boys came up. “I think he +went across this graveyard.” + +“I don’t hear him,” said Bob, listening intently. + +All sounds of the pursued had ceased and the night was silent except +for the murmur of the voices of the other boys, who now came up and +joined them. Buck and Drummer had made enough noise in their running to +serve as a permanent guide for the others. + +“Maybe he ran right across it and is still going,” said Charlie, +nodding toward the quiet graveyard. + +“I don’t know, but I’m going in and see if he is hiding behind a +stone,” announced Buck. + +His followers looked startled and uneasy and he noted the look. “You +fellows stay here and I’ll just take a quick look,” he said, stepping +over the wall. “Put your lights out.” + +“I’ll go with you,” declared Drummer, lifting one foot over the wall. + +“No, you stay here with the boys. There aren’t many stones in the +yard and it will only take me a moment. I’ll be right back, so keep +absolutely quiet.” + +With that Buck began his search, looking behind the stones by the light +from his flash. The graveyard was a little longer than he had been able +to make out from the rays of his light, and he kept moving away from +the boys in the road. Back of every stone he flashed the light, but +found nothing. + +He was now at the far end of the country cemetery and one large +monumental stone alone remained. He stepped toward it, pressing the +button on the flashlight, for he allowed it to go out after each flash. +As he did so he stepped around the big stone and instantly sensed the +presence of someone in the darker shadow behind the shaft. + +But before he could step back or press on his light a strong arm was +thrown around him and a rough, horny hand was clapped over his mouth. + + + + +CHAPTER XVIII + +AN UNEASY CAMP + + +The boys who had remained in the camp stood watching and listening as +the field squad rushed off on the trail of the man who had slipped +down into their camp. Small as the boys were, every one of them wished +earnestly that he had been included in the party delegated to do the +active work, and it was with some envy that they saw their more favored +comrades run out of the circle of light and enter the black belt of the +woods. + +But Ted had no intention of allowing them to stand around and watch. +There were things to do and he knew that action would relieve them of +some of their stored up feelings. + +“All right, fellows,” he called to them. “Let’s get on the job and +build big fires. We don’t know what time the other boys will get back, +and when they do we want to have the fires going briskly. Get your axes +and we’ll snap to it.” + +“There is a pile of wood near the fire now,” pointed out one boy. + +“Yes, but that wood is going on right now,” replied Ted, piling the +pieces of cut wood on the red fires. “We will have to hustle and cut up +a big supply so that Buck and the boys will have a guide when they come +back. Light the lanterns and we’ll get busy.” + +The lanterns were lighted and they plunged into the fringe of the +woods. The sound of several axes rang out as their owners began to +chop the wood for the fire supply. The lanterns were placed on the +ground and made a neat ring near them and in the circle of this ring +they chopped off dead limbs and split logs. As soon as the wood was +collected they carried it back and piled it beside the fires. + +Both fires were now going at their best and the light cast from them +lighted up the camp from all angles. Some of the boys would have +stopped with their first load, but Ted knew that they might have to +wait a long time before their companions returned, so he kept them at +the task. The pile grew and grew until it towered above their heads, +and in this way fully an hour went by. At last Ted felt that they had +enough. + +“All right, that will be enough,” he called. + +The work was not yet all over, for the wood which had been dragged in +required to be split into convenient lengths, although some of the big +logs were piled on entire. While the work went on they kept looking up +toward the mountain, but no sound reached them and they speculated on +the fact. + +“They must have had to run a long way,” said Alfred, as he split wood. + +“I guess they went clear over the mountain,” nodded Ted. “It may be +that they are trailing the man.” + +“You don’t suppose that anyone has hurt them, do you?” another boy +asked, anxiously. + +“I hardly think so,” smiled Ted. “One man, no matter how strong he is, +would have a big job in front of him if he tried to run off with that +bunch of fellows. I guess they’ll be back pretty soon.” + +But the time dragged on and the boys became silent, glancing restlessly +up the mountain side. Ted, looking at his watch, saw that it was eleven +o’clock. + +“A good two hours since they went away,” he thought, somewhat +anxiously. “Oh, well, I suppose time seems longer when you are waiting +for something than it does if you aren’t. If we only knew what was +going on we’d feel better.” + +He tried to keep the conversation brisk but the boys would not react. +They were visibly oppressed, and they showed in their dogged silence +that they were uneasy. Although none of them believed for a moment in +anything ghostly, they found the vague stories of the camp a distinct +hindrance to their peace of mind and the feeling of depression was +heavy upon all of them. Ted wondered if there was not something that +they might do to ward off the feelings which gripped them off, and he +was thinking busily along this line when a sound reached their ears. + +It was a low-pitched moaning and it seemed to come from a point above +their camp, in the pine thicket which covered the knoll there. + +They looked in the direction of the sound, their blood chilling under +its influence. It was weird and mournful, and the icy shivers ran up +and down the spine of more than one of the young boys. Ted was not in a +comfortable state of mind himself, but he knew that something had to be +done about it. He leaped to his feet. + +“Come on, we’ve got to see if anyone is hurt up there!” he called, +reaching for his lantern. The other boys followed him closely and he +passed around the tents and ran rapidly up the incline toward the pine +clump. The groaning had ceased as soon as they had started for the +place from which the disturbing sounds had come. + +They arrived in the grove in a group, the lanterns flashing generous +beams around them, but there was no one to be seen. Thinking that +someone might be concealed in the bushes they thrust their lights in +there and looked closely, but there was no sign of a living person, and +as only a living being could produce the sound which had startled them +so profoundly, they half expected to see someone who had been injured +in some manner. But although they searched the grove they could not +find a trace of anyone. + +“That’s funny,” commented Ted, now more annoyed than frightened. “The +groans came from here, didn’t they?” + +“Sure they did,” was the ready response. + +“Well, the groaner has moved somewhere else,” said Ted, half angry and +half jokingly. “We won’t even be able to find any footprints, because +there is such a carpet of pine needles that a print wouldn’t show. +Confound this whole business, I——” + +From across the camp, and on the other side of Bear Creek, came the +groaning sound again. The boys stirred and looked anxiously at Ted. + +The hot blood surged into his face and he would have liked nothing +better than to have come to instant physical encounter with the +groaner. While he waited to control his hot anger the groans came +in long drawn out wails that, under the circumstances, chilled their +blood. Besides being angry Ted was also puzzled. + +“Buck and his squad chased that fellow up the mountain,” he said aloud. +“I wonder if he could have slipped around them and come back? Maybe he +just wanted to lead them off on a chase.” Abruptly he turned to the +boys. “Come on back to the camp.” + +They followed him in silence back to the camp and as soon as they +entered the circle of light cast by the fires the groaning ceased. A +weighty silence succeeded. + +“Fellows,” Ted addressed them, in a low tone. “There isn’t any use of +us running all around trying to find out who this practical joker is. +He’ll just run us ragged, so let’s retire into the center tent and stay +there until Buck and his squad gets back. We can watch everything that +goes on from the flap of the tent and by keeping under cover we’ll make +the chap who is so fond of tricks either show himself or shut up!” + +They all crowded under the canvas of the second tent, glad for the +shelter, frail as it was. From their position some of the boys could +look out and watch the other tents and all of them could watch the +fire. Ted did not go into the tent at once, but took a lantern and +made sure that his flashlight was at his side. + +“You fellows stay here and keep a sharp lookout,” he directed. “I’m +going down to see if there is any way for anyone to cross the creek.” + +“Going all by yourself?” a boy asked, his eyes staring in awe. + +“Yes, but I’ll be right back,” nodded Ted. “See you later.” + +He walked off, leaving them to chatter in a hushed way among +themselves, and going at once to the creek, took his course along it +and away from the camp. He knew that there was a shaky old wood bridge +down the creek at some yards from the camp, and while he had told the +boys that he was going only that far, Ted secretly determined to cross +and have a look at the rather marshy ground on the other side of the +curving stream. He was almost certain that he would find nothing, but +he wanted to look nevertheless. + +“But I mustn’t allow anything to happen to me,” he thought, anxiously. +“These boys would be leaderless at least until Buck got back, and +there is no telling what might happen to them. I mustn’t be gone long, +either.” + +He came to the bridge, which he had found one day in his wanderings, +and he crossed it, his footsteps sounding hollow and damp as his shoes +pressed the rotted boards. On the other side he stepped ashore into a +slippery species of soil that gently oozed water as his foot struck and +sank slightly into it. The bushes here were thick and he was compelled +to force his way through them. Before going beyond the bridge he +lowered his lantern and looked at the soft earth and at once perceived +something which excited his closest attention. + +There was the imprint in the dirt of a large shoe. + +The shoe was evidently a good one and showed no sign of wear, while the +heel of it was quite new and left impressions which proclaimed it to be +a rubber one with regulation holes and a trade mark which was too faint +to be of more than passing value to him. But the sight of the print +alone caused him to rejoice that at last there was a clear record. + +“Now, I’ll just see where this print leads to,” he thought and started +off. A moment later he halted as another thought came to him. + +“The prints don’t return. Suppose the man is hiding in the bushes, just +waiting for me!” + +The reflection made his skin creep and for a moment he fought a growing +desire to turn and go back. But after an instant of indecision he +fought it off. “I’ll have to chance it and go on. I won’t go far from +camp, and if I do see anyone, I can fight it out or run like a streak. +I won’t cross the bridge, either, I’ll cut right across the ground and +jump into the creek and swim it. Don’t know if I’m foolish or not, but +here goes!” + +With every sense on the alert he walked forward, eyes straining, ears +pitched for a sound, ready to retreat at a moment’s notice. It was no +easy task to follow the footprints and look around him at the same +time, but he managed to do it as he advanced. At a point opposite the +camp he came to a complete halt and marked the spot where the man had +evidently stood when he delivered the groans, for there the soft ground +was foot-printed lavishly. From that spot the man had gone off down the +stream away from the camp until he had come to the creek at a point +where rocks protruded so far above the stream that he had found it easy +to walk across and take to the woods alongside of the camp. Ted noted +that the ford was out of sight of the tents and while they were going +into the tents the man had evidently crossed the low part of the stream +and had entered the woods at a point not far from where Buck and his +squad had entered it. + +“After he finished his groaning he must have decided that he had scared +us enough,” mused Ted, as he stood there peering around. “Confound +him, if I ever get my hands on him, I’ll knock his head off, provided +I’m big enough! What anyone should take all the trouble to try and +scare a bunch of fellows out of camp for is more than I can figure out!” + +He crossed the stream at the point where the mysterious man had crossed +and made his way back toward the camp, coming up alongside of the +fires, in plain sight of the anxiously waiting boys. They were greatly +astonished to see him come from the opposite direction from that in +which he had started. + +He opened his mouth to call out a cheery greeting to them and then his +mouth remained open, no sound issuing from it for the moment. In the +pine grove above them he detected a spurt of fire, and the next instant +a dry bush burst into crackling flame. He awoke from his temporary +muteness. + +“Come on boys, on the jump!” he shouted. “Grab all the pails you can +get hold of! The woods are on fire!” + + + + +CHAPTER XIX + +DRUMMER SAVES HIS CHIEF + + +It was with a sinking heart and a quick flash of chilling fear that +Buck felt himself in the grasp of the unknown man back of the cemetery +monument. The attack had come so quickly that, added to the mystery and +uncanniness of the place and hour, his mind whirled for the moment. The +hand over his mouth was rough and horny, calloused apparently by hard +labor, and the arm which encircled his body and pinned his own arms to +his sides was a strong and sinewy one, the thin but whip-like cords of +which he could feel even through his clothing. + +His fingers still rested on the button of his flashlight and the +thought occurred to him to light it. But as though reading his thought +the strange individual swung down a long, lean hand and swept it from +his grasp. Buck might have used his light for a weapon had he thought +about it, but just now his thoughts and impressions were too confused +to allow for anything constructive. + +Still keeping his hand over Buck’s mouth and his thin arm around his +body with a grip of steel, the man peered out around the tall stone to +see if anyone was following the leader. He could see the group of boys +merely as shadows a little darker than the sky, for at the point where +they were standing there was no woods background and as the cemetery +was high on a ridge of the mountain the boys were outlined like uneasy +shadows against a black sky. Seeming to derive comfort from the fact +that Buck was all alone, the man started to drag him off. + +But in this period of time Buck had recovered his presence of mind. The +man who had him was very little taller than he was, his body was thin +and he seemed to be nearer middle age than young. All in all, Buck was +huskier, but for all that, the man who held him had muscles of steel. +There was no doubt that he was a native mountain character and he was +ready for any emergency. Buck wished fervently that he could get his +mouth free and also gain the use of his arms. He felt that with the use +of his arms he could match himself up favorably with the man who held +him. + +Just as the man began to drag him off, Buck began a frantic attempt to +break away. He jerked his head back in an effort to free his mouth, but +the man immediately dug his long fingers into Buck’s cheeks. The pain +infuriated the boy and he increased his struggles. He fought to free +his arms, exerting all of his strength to do so. + +The attempt was futile. Like a winding whip the thin arm tightened even +more closely until the wind was almost forced from his body. Then Buck +began a foot attack. + +This nearly succeeded, for the man was not prepared for it. Buck gave +his nearest foot a kick that made the man grunt with pain, and for a +moment it looked as though he was going to go over. But he recovered +his ground and once more began his dragging process. Fighting stoutly +but vainly, Buck was dragged along. + +They moved away from the big stone toward the far wall, the captor +finding his progress a hard one, due to the energetic squirming of +Buck. The boy expected a fierce warning any minute from the man and +perhaps a blow to silence him, but the mountaineer was depending on his +strength alone to carry Buck off and not so much as a single word came +from him. Half dragging and half carrying Buck, he made his way to the +wall furtherest away from the boys. The grass in the cemetery was soft +and wet and Buck’s fighting progress made no sound. + +They arrived at last at the wall and the man heaved Buck up and over +like a sack of wheat and jumped with him over the low barrier. They +were in the open field, with a few apple trees around and the deep +woods a few scant yards away. Toward this dense wall of the thicker +trees the determined man began to drag Buck, who by this time had +succeeded in prying open his fingers so as to breathe between them. + +Something unexpected happened. There was a swish near them which +puzzled them both. The captor stopped in some bewilderment and then +something hard struck him on the side of the temple, causing him to +grunt and hesitate in his progress. + +Back at the wall the boys had watched Buck’s progress as he went from +stone to stone with his flashlight and they had remained quiet while he +had worked his way deeper and deeper into the quiet graveyard. Drummer +felt somewhat grieved that his leader had not taken him along but he +kept the fact to himself. Buck’s light was seen once far down in the +cemetery, close to a towering monument, and it was seen no more. Time +dragged on heavily. + +Impatiently, the boys waited at the wall, standing close together in +the darkness. The quietness of the lonely country, the association +of the graveyard and the uncertainty of the whole enterprise made +them want to give up the affair and return to the camp. They thought +somewhat wistfully of the warm campfires and their friends below, and +they were anxious to get back. Before long they became restless and +nervous. + +“Confound it, wish he’d come back!” grumbled a boy. + +“He’ll be right back,” reassured Drummer, secretly uneasy. + +For the past few seconds Drummer had been smelling something that +appealed to him. There must be an apple orchard nearby he decided, +and where there was an orchard there must surely be apples. That +particular brand of fruit was a great favorite with the stout boy, and +after peering around for a moment or two he decided that the orchard +must be at the end of the graveyard wall. He began to edge off in that +direction. + +“Where you going?” Bob whispered. + +“To see if I can pick up an apple,” was the answer, as Drummer moved +off. + +Under the circumstances no one else was interested in apples and +Drummer went alone. At the end of the wall he instinctively reached for +his flashlight which he had hung on his belt, and then he realized that +he could not use it. + +“Better not,” he decided. “I might give our position away, and Buck +would be mad. I’ll hunt around in the dark and I guess I can find some +on the ground.” + +The apple trees were now before him and he stopped under the first +tree, looking up. There were apples on the tree he was able to make +out, but all of them were beyond his reach. He had no intention of +climbing the tree at that time, though he made up his mind to visit the +old orchard at some later time and help himself to the apples on the +tree. + +He reached down, wishing for the added help of his light but deeming +it prudent not to employ it. There were apples on the ground and his +groping fingers found four of them without any trouble. There were +others nearby, but he straightened up with a big one in his hand and +carefully felt along the surface of it. + +“Got to be careful about eating them in the dark,” he reflected. “Don’t +want to go eating any worms! This one feels all right.” + +He raised his head, and against the break between the woods and the +sky, saw something that for the moment chilled his blood. + +A man who looked for the moment like a goblin or some horrible creature +from another world, was apparently half-carrying and half-dragging a +big sack of meal after him as he crept toward the woods. But the sack +struggled and moved and in that instant Drummer’s eyes were opened +fully. + +He remembered the last flash of Buck’s flashlight and the long silence +from the graveyard. It was plain at once that the man they had been +chasing was carrying off his chief and for a brief second the stout boy +was on the verge of yelling at the top of his lungs. One hand dropped +toward his flashlight and then he remembered the apple in his hand. It +was hard and Drummer was a fairly good shot. + +Trembling with excitement, he threw it toward the two figures before +him. It went wide of the mark, it seemed to the boy and he stooped down +and hastily gathered up the apples at his feet. Calming down somewhat, +he began to throw them with more care, and a grunt told him that his +second apple had struck someone. He hoped it had not hit Buck, but he +kept on hurling apples. + +There was a fierce struggle before him and just as his fingers closed +over his flashlight, his last apple having been exhausted, he heard +Buck’s voice. + +“He got away!” + +Drummer snapped on his flashlight and in the beams of it he saw the man +running across the orchard toward the woods. Buck was three or four +yards behind him, but the man was increasing his speed at every stride +and it looked hopeless. Drummer joined in the chase. + +When the apple had struck the man on the head he had hesitated, +bewildered, and in that instant Buck renewed his passionate attempt to +break loose. This time he succeeded in freeing his mouth and one arm, +which he attempted to wind around the man who had for so long held him +a captive. Two more apples swished past them at top speed and the man +now changed his tactics. He no longer desired to hold Buck, but seemed +more than anxious to get away. He loosed his hold on Buck and wrestled +with him in a short, fierce match, finally breaking Buck’s hold and +turning to flee. The last apple hurled by Drummer struck the man in the +back and he made off like a flash toward the woods. It was then that +Buck shouted and took up the chase, somewhat winded from his recent +battle. + +The man gained the woods well ahead of him and wound his way in and +out among the trees, too anxious to get away to slow up for a lack of +light. Buck had no light and Drummer’s flashlight was too far back of +him to be of any use. He could hear the boys chattering as they took +up the chase, but on the edge of the woods Buck halted, realizing the +futility of it. + +He was winded and dissatisfied and the man who had plunged into the +woods knew them so well that to follow him would be a pure waste +of time. Drummer caught up with him, puffing with the exertion and +excitement. + +“Go-going to chase him?” panted the hero of the apple bombardment. + +“No use,” declared Buck, as the others came up, lights all turned on. +“We’d never get him in these woods. He knows them too well. You can’t +even hear him, now.” + +They stood there listening, but nothing but unbroken silence came +from the depths of the forest. The rest of the boys did not desire to +press the matter if Buck did not, and they stood there for some time, +listening with awe to Buck’s story of his adventure. Many were the +exclamations that followed it. + +“Boy, you certainly did me a service when you began to peg those +apples!” Buck told Drummer, laughing. “That artillery fire halted his +advance and gave me my turn at the game. You certainly used your head!” + +“Well, that’s just once when my appetite came in handy,” grinned the +fat boy. + +“It surely did! Next time anyone comes around bothering the camp we’ll +just send you out with a basket of apples and we can sleep in peace +all night! Well, come on back to the graveyard, I want to get my +flashlight.” + +They all climbed over the low wall and went back to the spot where +Buck had been captured by the man behind the monument and there on the +ground they found his flashlight. Beside it, resting against the base +of the stone, they found a battered lantern. + +“I wondered what had become of his lantern,” said Buck, picking up the +battered object. “Just an ordinary old farm lantern, which doesn’t tell +us much, but we’ll take it back to camp with us.” + +“I won’t be sorry to get back to camp,” said Charlie. + +“Pretty soft for the fellows in camp!” remarked Drummer. “Just sitting +around the fires waiting for us!” + +“Let’s get back to the camp,” suggested Buck. “They’ll be waiting up +for us and worrying.” + +In a body they set out for the camp, feeling better now that everything +had turned out well, although they were sorry that the man had gotten +away. “If we had gotten him we would have solved the problem of our +camp,” said Buck. “But we’ll keep after him until we do get him.” + +“Think he’ll come around the camp any more?” Drummer asked. + +“Not for a while, anyway. I can’t say whether he’ll come around again +or not because I don’t know what his object can be. But if he doesn’t, +we’ll go out and hunt him up, because it is high time that he was +brought down.” + +They had run further away from the camp than they had thought and it +took them a long time to reach the top of the mountain where they could +look down on the camp. The two fires were burning brightly but no one +was in sight. This puzzled them and they halted, studying the situation. + +“Funny, I wonder where they are?” muttered Buck. + +“Look, somebody crossing the brook with a lantern!” cried Bob, pointing. + +They saw a lone figure crossing the stones of the brook below the spot +where the creek was deep enough to swim and Buck was sure that the +figure was Ted. They were so high up and far away that they were unable +to tell accurately, but it looked to be the figure of the camp leader. +He entered the circle of light near the fire, the lantern swinging by +his side. + +Then something else claimed the attention of the boys on top of the +mountain. A flicker of light came to them from the top of the ridge +back of the springs and then a bush flamed. They saw the camp boys come +running out of their tents and look toward the fire, then scurry off +toward the truck at the edge of the camp. + +Buck wasted no more time. “Come on, fellows!” he called, as he started +off. “The woods are burning! We’ve got to help the camp squad!” + + + + +CHAPTER XX + +A VISIT TO HOGS’ HOLLOW + + +The words which Ted shouted to the boys in the tent struck them dumb +for a moment, but to their ears was borne the sound of the snapping and +crackling. They rushed out of the tent into the open space of the camp, +to see the dry pine grove above them glowing with fire. + +Ted was running toward the truck for pails and the boys, awakening +to the seriousness of the situation, followed him. Some of them made +a hurried trip to the cooking supplies which were piled near the +fireplaces, snatching up the pots and pans. Ted pulled out all of +the pails which were in the truck and handed them around as fast as +possible. + +“Get water from the spring and go to it!” he cried, passing out the +last pail. Then, seizing one which he had reserved for himself, Ted ran +up the slope, stopped at the spring to dip out a supply of water, and +then went on to the thicket where the fire blazed. + +The pine grove had been a dry place with an accumulation of dry leaves +and dead bushes and the whole thicket was now a raging furnace. The +month had been dry and except for the big storm which had so thoroughly +soaked them the boys had not experienced any adverse weather. The +woods, as a consequence, was in a receptive mood for a fire, and Ted’s +heart misgave him as he saw the blaze before him. + +“If this gets going full blast in the woods, people will say that we +started it, and there will be the dickens to pay!” he groaned inwardly, +as he threw the water from his pail onto the fire. “Oh, I do wish that +Buck and his squad was here to help us!” + +Boys who had not been able to supply themselves with pails had seized +anything handy with which to beat at the edges of the fire and they +fought stoutly to beat it to submission. The smoke was choking and the +heat thrown off was blistering. Ted, having emptied his pail, raced +down to the spring, to find another problem confronting them. + +The two springs had been drained down to mere trickles. A half dozen +pails of water from each had effectively emptied them and Ted did not +dare wait for the basins to fill up. There was but one thing to do. + +“Fill your pails at the creek!” he cried, and dashed off down the slope +to Bear Creek. Here he dipped his bucket into the black water and ran +back up the hill with it, splashing it on the fire. + +“Good glory, we’ll never beat it at this rate, and we simply have to!” +was his despairing thought. + +He remembered the large extra piece of canvas in the truck, and +abandoning his pail he ran down the hill and procured the material. +Just as he was about to charge back up the slope there was heard the +sound of running footsteps and Buck’s squad, nearly played out from +their hurried descent, arrived in the camp. + +“Buck!” shouted Ted, joyously. “You just got here in time!” + +“I guess so!” was the panted reply. “Here, let me have an end of that +canvas and we’ll try and smother some of the fire.” + +The boys who had just arrived in camp procured flat pans, shovels and +anything else that came to hand and joined the almost exhausted boys +at the pine grove. Ted and Buck carried the canvas up and each of them +took an end. This large section of material, when raised and lowered by +the two boys, snuffed out long, ragged edges of flame, and by working +busily they soon had the fire under control. But their work was by no +means ended as yet. There were dozens of individual spurts of fire +still to be put out and to these they gave their attention. Two dead +trees were beginning to blaze and the two camp leaders quickly put them +out, so that the fire would not be noted by anyone living nearby. At +the present time they desired no publicity. + +The last glimmer of fire had been put out and the smoked and blackened +boys stood silent for a moment, panting heavily. The night had been +indeed a strenuous one, and the chasing squad in particular was worn +out completely. Their long dash after the mountain man, their speedy +return, and the exertions around the pine grove, had been as much as +they could bear. Some of the smaller boys were shaking decidedly, now +that danger was over, but the trembling was the result of excitement +and exhaustion. + +“Me for the spring!” exclaimed Drummer, and a rush was immediately made +for the cool, fresh water. The basins had not yet filled but there was +enough for everybody and they drank and drank and drank. + +“How’d that patch of pine get on fire?” Buck asked Ted, waiting for all +of the smaller boys to quench their thirst before caring for his own +parched throat. + +“I haven’t the slightest idea,” Ted shook his head. “But it was +deliberately fired!” + +“By whom?” + +“I don’t know,” was Ted’s reply. “But we have been annoyed by some one +groaning around all the time you were gone!” + +“I can’t figure that,” said Buck. “We chased our man, and he captured +me for about five minutes. If you say that you were bothered, then +there is more than one prowler.” + +“Let’s get our drinks and then swap stories down at the fire,” +suggested Ted, dipping a tin cup into the cool spring water as Buck did +the same. + +Gathering around the fire with fire-fighting implements still in their +hands they looked like a band of Black Riders themselves, for their +clothing had become burned and their hands and faces were black. Buck +related his adventures and then Ted told of the groans and his search +across the brook. + +“Well, all I can see is that there are two of these fellows,” declared +Buck, when Ted had finished his story. “I’m beginning to wonder if that +one fellow didn’t purposely lead us a merry chase just so that his +companion could fire the woods. You know, if the woods had burned, the +authorities around here would be hot against us for having done it.” + +“I know that well enough,” nodded Ted. “That’s why I just knew that we +had to get that fire out. I guess that things have become so serious +that we’ll have to get in touch with Mr. Calvert and have some real +action taken. Next thing we know somebody will be getting hurt or +kidnapped or something. Yes, it looks as though there are two of these +fellows.” + +“I think that one of them is that Jerry Jackson, from Hogs’ Hollow,” +said Buck. + +“What makes you think that?” + +“The fellow that we chased ran in that direction and I’m sure that he +is the one. I suppose he has a companion and they work together. Tell +you what let’s do, let’s go over to Hogs’ Hollow tomorrow and call on +Mr. Jackson.” + +“All right, we’ll do it,” agreed Ted. “For some reason he doesn’t want +us to camp here, and if we find him at home we’ll try and learn why he +doesn’t want us.” + +The boys were shaky with fatigue and Ted ordered them to bed at once, +while he and Buck took lanterns and looked once more over the ground +which had been burned, hoping to find some kind of a clue. But they +were unable to learn anything from the burned, down-trodden soil. + +“Nothing to be learned here,” decided Ted, as they went back to camp. +“We’ll see what we can find out at Hogs’ Hollow tomorrow.” + +That night the boys slept like logs, and had anyone been minded to run +away with the tents, trucks or fires themselves, no one would have +known anything about it until daybreak at least, and most of them not +until much later in the day. It was almost noontime before the whole +camp was awake and crowding around for something to eat. + +“If anyone had run away with the whole camp last night, I wouldn’t have +known it,” smiled Ted. + +“Shows what a bum general he is,” said Buck. “He should have known +that we would all be half-dead and that he could have worked anything +he wanted to while we slept so soundly. But we’re glad he is a bum +general!” + +As soon as camp was cleaned up they began to make plans for a visit +to Hogs’ Hollow. It was finally decided that only Ted and Buck would +go, and that all of the boys would remain behind to protect the camp. +With Charlie, Bob and Drummer to counsel and lead the younger boys they +felt reasonably safe, and after talking it over with those who were to +remain in the camp the two older boys started off. + +“I’m pretty sure that nothing will happen in broad daylight,” was Ted’s +final word to them. + +“I guess not,” Bob had smiled. “We’ve got Drummer with us, and even if +we haven’t any apples for him, to peg, maybe he can use potatoes just +as well!” + +Walking swiftly and heading in the general direction which Farmer Crane +had told them to take toward Hogs’ Hollow, they quickly covered the +ground followed last night by Buck’s squad and arrived at the cemetery. +Passing around the walls of the country graveyard they entered the +woods at a point close to where the man had escaped on the previous +night and at once found themselves in a tangle of forest much denser +and wilder than that which surrounded their own camp. The graveyard +itself was on the top of the mountain and as soon as they entered the +dark and cool woods they began to go down into a valley. + +“Notice how the soil gets soft as soon as we begin to go down?” asked +Buck. + +“Yes, and I suppose the bottom of the valley is quite marshy. I guess +that is why they call it Hogs’ Hollow.” + +Ted’s guess was a correct one. At the bottom of the valley they struck +a low, marshy expanse of ground that kept them busy avoiding muck +holes. Tall bunches of weeds and marsh grass grew in profusion and +there was a decidedly damp smell in the air. + +“Cheerful place!” grunted Buck. + +“Yes, not! This must be Hogs’ Hollow. Only the animal for whom it is +named would enjoy this place. Now, all we have to do is to find the +shack that this man Jackson lives in.” + +This was not an easy thing to do, for the hollow was blanketed and +screened by so many bushes and clumps of small trees that they could +not see far before them. They had spent a good three-quarters of an +hour wandering around when Ted sighted the object of their search +before him on a higher strip of ground. + +“There it is! There’s the shack we’re looking for!” + +A rude hut, constructed of picked-up boards and roofed with sections of +tree bark, loomed up before them on a tongue of land which was slightly +drier than the surrounding territory. The hut was a large and rambling +affair, with a window on each side and a door which sagged on leather +hinges. A rusted stove pipe thrust its way up through the bark roof, +but no smoke came from it. There was no sign of life around the place +and they debated the wisdom of walking boldly up to it. + +“We might as well,” decided Ted. “We’re here to have a talk with +this Jerry Jackson and we might as well plunge right into it. No use +sneaking around, because we have to make the break sometime or other.” + +So they approached the hut openly, eyes and ears alert for anything +unexpected, but there was no sign or movement of any kind. Ted peered +into a window and found that the place was empty. + +“He isn’t at home,” he said. “Let’s see if we can’t get in.” + +The sagging front door was unlocked and with some degree of caution +the two boys entered the place, but it was indeed empty of life and +they looked around them with interest. The furnishings of the hut +were as rude as the outside and they consisted of a discolored table, +a rickety-looking rocking chair and a firmer-looking straight one, a +rusted stove, a disordered bunk, and various odds and ends. But the +object on the table caught and held their eyes and they examined it +closely. + +It was a long white cloth garment which the dweller in Hogs’ Hollow +was working upon, for a needle still stuck into the cloth and a spool +of white thread stood beside it. There was a hood to the thing and a +cloth mask for the face, a mask which was punctured with eye holes and +a slit where the mouth should be. The two boys looked at it silently +and then exchanged glances. + +“A ghost suit, as sure as you are a foot high!” Buck voiced the +thought. + + + + +CHAPTER XXI + +THE WATCHING POST + + +Ted nodded as he looked the suit over. It was a coarse white sheet and +the dweller in the hut was taking some pains on the construction of it. +But there was no doubt as to its proposed use. + +“Yes, sir, it’s a ghost uniform, if there is such a thing!” smiled Ted. +“And I guess I have an idea where he intends to wear it!” + +“He isn’t going to a masquerade, I’ll bet on that!” grinned Buck. +“If I’m not mistaken he’ll turn up pretty soon at our camp with this +nightgown on!” + +“When he does, we’ll take it off!” promised Ted, grimly. + +“Shall we wait for him to come home and then nab him?” Buck asked. + +“No the sight of this ghost costume has made me change my mind, and if +you agree to my plan, we’ll work this thing out another way. Let’s get +out of here before he returns and wait around camp until he does show +up in this sheet affair. Then, when we grab him, we’ll have him just +where we want him. If we accuse him of anything now he can easily back +out by saying that he doesn’t know anything about it, but if we catch +him around the camp in this suit we will have him just where he’ll find +it impossible to escape.” + +“That is all right as far as it goes, but how are we going to know just +what night he does visit the camp? We don’t want a chase such as we had +the other night.” + +“No, but I have a plan for a trap. However, let’s get out of here first +and we’ll discuss it on the way back. Now I’m particularly anxious that +he doesn’t catch us in here or know that we have been here.” + +“All right. We haven’t disturbed anything, have we?” + +Ted looked around thoughtfully and then shook his head. “I guess not. +We didn’t touch anything and I’m glad we didn’t even touch the suit. +By the way, while we are here, let’s see if there is any sign of that +skeleton that was in the bushes back of the camp.” + +They hunted hastily around for the skeleton, looking in every corner +and into a small closet space off of the main room, but there was no +sign of the object which had so startled them. Satisfied that they +could not find anything, which would add to their store of knowledge +concerning the man, and anxious to get out of Hogs’ Hollow as soon as +possible, they left the hut, arranging the door as they had found it, +and struck at once off into the swampland toward the higher ground. No +words were exchanged between them until they had quitted the hollow +and had arrived at higher ground, where they started off side by side +toward the camp. + +“What is your idea about trapping the fellow when he comes ghosting?” +asked Buck, as they skirted the cemetery and started along the rough +road. + +“Now that we have a fairly good idea that he’ll visit us, we’ll prepare +for him,” explained Ted. “I guess that after the surprise attack on him +the other night he won’t come any too near the camp in his white sheet, +though he must be going to show himself, or why bother with a sheet at +all? He may plan to reveal himself on a rock as he did with the black +horse that time, but whichever way he plans it, I guess we can be sure +that he is coming sooner or later. Now, if we’re going to be in the +camp we won’t have much chance to cope with him, but we won’t be in +camp!” + +“Won’t be in the camp!” Buck echoed. “Where will we be?” + +“We’ll be outside of camp and hidden in a clump of bushes, watching +the camp to see what happens. You know our tents back up against the +hill where the springs are and that will be an advantage. My idea is +for us to lift the backs of the tents, creep out and along the slope +until we reach that bunch of maples on the east side of the camp. Those +trees are pretty close together and there is a fine screen of bushes, +where we can lie in wait and watch the camp.” + +“Oh, I see! Then if he gets to fooling around back of the camp we can +see him better than we could if we were down in the camp.” + +“Yes, and not only that, but I think the sight of an empty camp will +lure him on. If he has no evil intentions toward the camp I think that +sheer curiosity will draw him into it. Then, from our watching post on +the hill we can figure out a plan to swoop down on him and surround +him. How does that sound to you?” + +“All right,” approved Buck, enthusiastically. “But we’ll have to be +regular Indians to crawl from the tents to the maples!” + +“That is all right, we’ll be able to do it. Of course, if he ever sees +us at it, everything is over, but we’ll just have to be so careful that +he won’t see us. If anyone is to do the seeing, we’re the ones to do +it. I’d like to catch him red-handed prowling around the camp and then +we’ll have a clear case against him.” + +“Yes. But don’t forget that he must have a helper. Things have happened +in such a way that he can’t possibly be doing them all by himself.” + +“I realize that, and I don’t know whether they’ll work in pairs or not, +but I think if we can get him we’ll have no trouble in getting his +friend, whoever he is. We’ll concentrate on getting him and that will +probably clear up the atmosphere quite a bit.” + +They arrived at the camp, to find the other boys anxiously awaiting +them, though they had not been idle. Preparations had been made for +supper and everything was ready to put on the fire when they got back. +The boys were at first disappointed because they had not brought a +prisoner back with them, but Ted soon explained his plan to them and +they fell in with it whole-heartedly. + +“That will mean we’ll be sleeping out in the open for a few nights at +least,” Ted told them. “You see, when we crawl out there we’re not +going to just sit there for a few hours and then go back into the +tents. It is pretty likely that this fellow will try his next piece +of funny work in the middle of the night, and when he does we’ll want +to be out of the camp and a whole lot nearer to him than he thinks +for. If he tries anything more like setting the woods afire we’ll be +right on top of him before he can get very far, and in order to do so +we’ll want to camp out and away from the tents. So tonight when it gets +dark we’ll let the fires die down a bit and then we’ll go to our tents +as though we intended to turn in early. From in the tents we’ll slip +out the back one by one, each with his own blanket, and we’ll make an +outdoor camp in the maple grove.” + +“Won’t it be cold outdoors?” a boy asked. + +“No, it won’t be. It is warm nights, as you know, and it won’t hurt us +a bit to sleep outside. Of course, if a storm comes up we’ll crawl back +and wait until a better night comes along.” + +After supper that night they allowed the fires to die away to a mass +of red embers and then one by one drifted into their tents. As soon as +they entered the shelters they rolled up their blankets, strapped them +on their shoulders and one by one raised the back wall of the tents and +slipped out into the darkness back of the tents. + +Here the blackness was intense and they found that crawling was not +necessary. Keeping well to the darkness and out of the feeble light +from the fires they stole one by one to the grove of maples and there +assembled, until all of them were in the place. This grove was of +ample size to hold them all and after some low-pitched conversation, +which Ted and Buck took care to keep down and discourage, they spread +out their blankets and made their first attempt at outdoor sleeping. + +Some of them went to sleep at once, while others, finding sleeping +under the stars a distinct novelty, lay awake for some little time. But +all of them were getting used to the camp life by this time and it was +not long before all of them slept soundly. + +Morning came without anything having happened and they awoke in some +disappointment. Ted saw that he had omitted some important part of his +scheme. + +“We should have had them sneak back in camp and come out of their +tents, just as though they had slept there all night,” he told Buck. +“If anyone is watching the camp and sees us come out of here, they’ll +catch on to the plan at once. I never thought of that part.” + +“Tomorrow morning we’ll have to wake up just before dawn and sneak +back, to finish our sleep in the tents,” nodded Buck. “I’ll tell you +what we do know. Suppose we go off into the woods a short distance and +then enter the camp from a direction back of the springs? Then, if +anyone should be watching and sees us come in, they’ll think we took +an overnight hike and are just getting in.” + +“Providing they didn’t see us going into the tent for the apparent +purpose of going to sleep there,” reminded Ted. “But we’ll do it that +way and trust to luck.” + +They moved off into the woods and approached the camp from a different +direction from the maple clump. + +The day passed pleasantly enough, the boys enjoying the camp life and +the swimming. That evening, as they finished their suppers, a beautiful +full moon made its appearance in the sky. + +“Going to have a fine old moon to sleep under tonight,” remarked +Drummer. + +The act of retiring to the tents and stealing off to the maple grove +was again performed and once in the grove they sat on their blankets +and talked in low tones. The night was so fine that no one actually +wanted to go to sleep, though it was now the usual time. + +“Well, we might as well turn in,” yawned Ted, beginning to unbutton his +shirt. The others reluctantly followed his example and soon most of +them had slipped in under the blankets. Ted took a final look down at +the camp. + +The fires were low, almost out, in fact. The brilliant moon lighted +up the camp like a silvery lantern and the entire landscape, done +in silver and black, was hauntingly beautiful. Ted felt a flash of +annoyance at the train of circumstances which was compelling them to +spend the night away from their tents. + +“Too bad we have to fool around with those fellows,” he grumbled, +inwardly. “This would be a beautiful night to lie in the tents and look +out at things. I wish—” + +He broke off in his thoughts and bent forward, his eyes narrowed. Then +he snapped his fingers softly and hissed. The boys sat up in their +blankets. + +“What’s up?” Buck whispered, quickly. + +“Get up, but don’t make any noise, on your lives!” was the thrilling +reply, in a carefully guarded tone. “There is a figure all in white in +the trees close to the creek!” + + + + +CHAPTER XXII + +GHOST MEETS GHOST + + +There was only the faintest stir as the boys followed Buck’s lead in +tossing their blankets aside and joined Ted at the bushes. Following +the direction which he had indicated, they found that what he had said +was the truth. Close beside a tall tree, on the bank of the creek, +stood a figure shrouded entirely in white. + +The figure was motionless at the time, intently regarding the silent +camp before him. From the direction in which his coming lay the boys +guessed that he had come up on the far side of Bear Creek and had +crossed over the stones at the spot where Ted had previously crossed +them. The sight of the almost dead fires and the strange silence of the +camp was giving the would-be ghost food for thought, though he must +have expected that the boys would be asleep at the time of his coming. +For two or three minutes, a space of time which to the boys seemed +an age, he stood looking across the cleared space before the tents +and then he began to work his way nearer to the empty camp shelters, +keeping always close to the trees which skirted them. + +What his intentions were they could not guess. He carried nothing in +his hands and from all appearances he was about to confine his efforts +at simply scaring them. + +“Look there!” suddenly gasped Drummer. + +They saw that he was looking off in the opposite direction and back of +the tents, but for the moment could not make out what he had seen. + +“What is it?” Ted whispered. + +“Another ghost!” was the answer. “Look, back there in the bushes near +the pine grove where the fire was. By golly, there are two ghosts!” + +Now they saw what had struck the fat boy’s eyes. It was another figure +dressed much in the manner of the one near the front of the tents, and +it was crouching in the thicket back of the tents. As they watched it +too moved forward. + +“That is all right,” Buck said. “We’ve known all along that there have +been two of them working together. While we chased one of them, the +other set the woods on fire. They are both up to the same trick, and +now we’ll have to make up our minds how we’ll capture them.” + +“I guess we had better divide into the same squads that we had +before,” said Ted. “Buck, suppose your squad tries to catch the one +coming from the back of the tent and my squad will try and run down the +fellow sneaking along the trees in front. But let’s see what they are +up to first.” + +“I suppose they think they’re going to appear at the door of a tent and +holler ‘Boo!’ to scare us!” grumbled Buck. + +Those of the boys who had slipped off their shoes now hastily put them +on again, happy and a bit nervous at the prospect of the coming action. +All of them still watched the two creeping figures below as they drew +nearer the tents. + +“I guess they are going to meet in front of the tents and exchange +signals,” commented Buck, noting that the two men were drawing together. + +And at that moment they did meet, but the boys were surprised by the +result. + +The ghost from the back of the tents stepped out into the full glow of +the moon and they saw that his costume was slightly different than the +one which the ghost in the front of the camp wore. There was no hood on +the top of the second spirit’s costume, but he had a cloth wound around +his head. At the same time the other ghost stepped from the shelter of +the last tree and came face to face with the brother apparition. + +But there was no exchange of signals, no friendly whispering of +details. For a moment the two ghosts stood staring at each other, +seeming to shrink within their shrouds and then the ghost from the +creek tossed his arms wildly to the sky, and uttering a wild yelp, fled +at top speed toward the creek from which it had come. The second ghost +stood perfectly still for a moment and then shot forward, hot on the +trail of the other one. + +While the astonished boys watched with bulging eyes and open mouths +the first ghost reached the creek and jumped wildly for the stones +upon which he had crossed. He missed the first one and plunged forward +on his knees into a half foot of water, to the accompaniment of a +tremendous thrashing and splashing. The second ghost reached the edge +of the creek just as the first ghost regained his feet and made a +sweeping clutch at his shroud. There was a ripping sound and the ghost +uniform split from top to bottom, but the ghost himself did not stop +going. Without a backward glance he ran across the rocks and took to +the woods. His pursuer, disdaining the rocks, waded stormily in the +brook and took up the chase on the other side. + +And now the boys in the maple grove gave way to peals of laughter +which were surely heard by the two running ghosts. For a moment they +had been paralyzed by the strange spectacle below them, and then the +humor had struck them as the first ghost streaked his way across the +camp pursued by the irate second sheeted figure. The fall into the +creek and the subsequent splashing chase caused them to laugh so hard +that they were weak. In their ghostly readings and thoughts they had +regarded spirits, ghosts and goblins as dignified creatures, and the +sight of two of them running a frantic race appealed to their senses of +humor. + +Both ghosts had disappeared from sight as they hurried down into the +camp and went as far as the creek, chatting and laughing over the +unexpected turn of events. The rate of speed employed by both night +prowlers made them forget any thought that they may have had in regard +to chasing after them and they simply hastened to the brook to see +if they could hear or see anything more of the two ghosts who had +generously provided them with an evening’s entertainment, but all was +profoundly quiet. + +“Oh, boy, that was the best thing I’ve seen in a long time!” laughed +Ted, brushing the tears out of his eyes. “The way that first ghost lit +out for the woods was a sight I wouldn’t have wanted to miss!” + +“And the other fellow snatching his night shirt off of him was another +high spot!” chuckled Buck. “But that little drama knocks our theory +into a cocked hat.” + +“You mean about these fellows working together?” questioned Ted. + +“Sure. We thought that they were partners, but each one of them must +have something in mind and they have been working alternately on us. +Certainly if they knew each other they wouldn’t have acted like that +when their ghosts met each other!” + +“They certainly did shrink up at the first sight of each other!” +grinned Drummer. + +“I guess you are right about the fact that they don’t know each other,” +Ted agreed. “But if that second fellow ever gets his hands on the first +ghost they’ll know each other!” + +“That was a case of professional jealousy!” said Buck. “I have a +feeling that we’ll never be bothered with them again.” + +“That is hard to tell,” was Ted’s opinion. “We’ll have to await events +and see.” + +They watched the woods for a long time, hoping to see some trace of the +figures in white, but they were unrewarded. Long after their usual hour +they remained around the replenished fires, talking and laughing over +the ghost chase. + +“Well, we’re still a long way from knowing what they are hanging +around here for,” Buck said as they finally turned in. + +On the following day Buck and Ted again left the camp in charge of the +older boys and went for a hike over the mountains. They wanted to see +if there was any trace of the flight and also to pay a visit to the hut +in Hogs’ Hollow and question Jerry Jackson point blank. + +“For all the fun we had out of them, they still have got to take the +responsibility for firing the woods,” Ted said. + +“Yes, but now we don’t know which one of ’em did it! The first thing we +have to do is to find out who did what.” + +“The quickest way to do that is to locate this Jerry Jackson and see +what he knows about it all,” said Ted. + +“Sure. I’m pretty sure that the ghost who crossed the creek was Jerry +Jackson.” + +“So am I, because he fled in the direction of the hollow. We’ll soon +find out.” + +But in this Ted was mistaken. When they reached the crude hut of the +swamp dweller one glance inside the place showed them that he had +abandoned his home, probably for good. Everything except the bare +furniture was out of the shack and it looked bleak and forlorn. + +“Skipped out!” cried Buck, looking around. + +“Yes, gone completely, and I guess we’ll never find him again. I’ll +bet he is making for new country right now. Well, that means that we +are rid of one ghost and all we have to do is to keep a sharp watch out +for the other.” + +There was nothing more to be learned at the shack in Hogs’ Hollow, so +the two boys left the place and returned to the top of the mountain. +Here they wandered along looking for any signs which might be clues to +the doings of the past few weeks, and they passed above and beyond the +camp. They kept up their exploration until the sun began to set and +dusk crept in from the east. + +“We might as well go back,” suggested Ted. “We’ve seen a lot of +mountain country but we haven’t learned anything.” + +“All right. By the way, there is the cabin of that unsociable gentleman +down there.” + +Buck pointed to the cabin with the barbed wire fence and as they +glanced down at it the front door of the cabin was opened and the tall +man who resided there came out. To their astonishment he took a board +which was lying beside the door, and placing it across the door, drove +several nails into it. For the first time they noticed that the boards +were on the windows and that the cabin was being closed up. + +“Hello, he is leaving us!” muttered Ted. + +“Seems so. He has on a long coat and a cap. Guess he doesn’t intend to +come back this season.” + +The man went to the small shed in the rear of the yard and opened the +doors, leading out a black horse. He then pulled from the other side of +the shed a small two-seater carriage and proceeded to harness the horse +to it. When this was done he nailed a board across the door of the shed +and then carelessly threw the hammer over the fence into the woods. + +“Pretty free with his hardware!” said Buck. + +The man climbed into the seat of the carriage, spoke sharply to the +horse and then rolled out of the yard as the horse started off. He +turned the horse’s head toward the cities and they gathered speed as +they went. Ted grasped Buck’s arm. + +“Take particular notice of that horse!” he cried. “It’s a black one!” + + + + +CHAPTER XXIII + +A GAME OF NICKY NIGHT + + +Buck nodded at once. “It was just beginning to dawn upon me,” he said. +“Something about the horse was attracting my attention and for a while +I wasn’t able to gather what it was. Now I see what it is. There goes +our Black Rider!” + +“Or else his horse. It looks remarkably like the horse on the rock. +Well, if that is the ghost who chased the Hogs’ Hollow ghost away from +our camp, what can be his game? Both of them must have distinct ideas, +because I don’t think there can be any connection between Jerry Jackson +and that man!” + +“When you ask me questions, ask me something that I’ll have half a +chance to answer!” grumbled Buck. “But look at that man go! He doesn’t +look as though he is just going away for a short time. Looks as though +there was a good reason for leaving, as though some one is hard on his +trail.” + +“He probably has his own ideas and we’ll never find out what the answer +is,” said Ted. “But I’m pretty sure that the fooling around our camp +is over with.” + +“I agree with you there,” nodded Buck, as they started back toward +the camp. “This man seems to be leaving us for good and I’m pretty +sure that Jerry Jackson will be too scared to come around again. But I +certainly would like to know what they were after.” + +“So would I, and if we ever run across Jackson we’ll try and make him +tell us. But as for the other one, he’s gone and we’ll never learn +anything from him.” + +When they arrived in the camp they were joyously received and their +recital of events was eagerly listened to. At the statement that events +of an unusual nature were over with there was a mingled feeling of +relief and dissatisfaction. + +“Hurrah, now we can enjoy ourselves and sleep in peace at night!” +whooped Bob, tossing his hat high. + +“Yes, but think of not knowing what those fellows were running around +for!” growled Drummer. “That spoils everything.” + +“Why?” demanded Bob. “Do we have to know why they were playing ghost?” + +“Of course we should,” retorted Drummer. “When we get home we’ll want +to tell people about it and there won’t be any fun in ending up by +saying that we don’t know what it was all about. More than likely +folks will think we dreamed it.” + +“We all had the same dream, then,” returned Bob. “But it would be a lot +more satisfactory to know the rest of it.” + +“When we go for fresh supplies of food we’ll try and find out if +anything is known of the whereabouts of Jerry Jackson,” promised Ted. + +“If you don’t find anything out can we go scouting around the country +and try to find him?” a boy asked, eagerly. + +Ted smiled. “No, I guess we won’t go as far as that. If he ever comes +near the camp again we will make every effort to capture him, but I +think that if we go roaming around the mountains just with the purpose +of finding him, we will only be wasting our time and perhaps stirring +up trouble. From the looks of his hut over there in the hollow I’d say +that he had decided to leave this part of the country for good.” + +That night there was a fine bright campfire meeting and the time +between supper and bed time was enjoyed without fear of unexpected +happenings. They talked and sang and told ghost stories, none of which +satisfied them as had the ending of the one which they had witnessed +from the maple grove. + +“No ghost story will ever mean anything to me again unless one ghost +chases the other across the camp and pulls his nightie off!” laughed +Buck. + +At the recollection there was a hearty laugh and Ted saw that the +unexpected ending of the series of mysterious events which had taken +place around the camp had cheered and brightened them. He noted that +there was a great deal of difference in the boys. At the start of their +trip some of them had been frightened, uneasy, panicky, but now they +had changed. All of them had broadened and looked brighter and manlier +than when they had started out. Little Tom Clayton had developed into a +sturdy, self-reliant boy and his too-doting mother was about to receive +a surprise when her formerly pale, angelic-looking boy returned from +the camp. Ted knew that Mr. Clayton would be more than pleased. + +“It has certainly done them a world of good,” he thought, as they +turned in that night. “The whole trip has been a success, and I hope +the trustees of the club will be satisfied. Too bad we can’t make a +full report on the meddling ghosts, but we’ll have to let that go, I +suppose.” + +On the following day he and Buck took a trip to the farmer’s house and +there they related to the farmer and his wife the recent adventures +which they had had. The good couple were astonished. + +“I could have sworn it was Jerry Jackson, after I got thinkin’ it +over,” declared Farmer Crane. “So he has cut loose and run away, eh? I +guess you’ll see no more o’ him. But you can’t guess what he would be +pesterin’ you for, eh?” + +“No, we can’t see why he should try scaring us out,” Buck answered, as +Ted shook his head. “Mr. Crane, I wish you could have seen him leg it +for the other ghost, when the second party got after him!” + +The farmer roared heartily. “After you fellers go, so you won’t be +annoyed by curious folks, I’m goin’ to tell that one around,” he +declared. “Too many people ’round here thinks this Black Riders’ camp +is a haunted spot, but maybe after I tell ’em that one ghost up and run +the other out of your camp and pulled his shirt off’n him, they’ll get +a little sense into their heads. What you think about that, Ma?” + +His wife shook her head. “Some of ’em you could tell anything to, and +they’d still believe that the place was alive with spooks!” she said, +wisely. + +“If you ever hear anything from Jerry Jackson, let us know,” Ted +requested, as they were leaving. + +“I surer than the dickens will!” was the reply. “If he ever comes +around here I’ll make him speak up.” + +They left the farmer and returned to camp with a fresh supply of food, +talking over camp plans for the balance of the summer. They had now but +a week and a half until it would be time to return home. + +“In all this excitement the time has slipped by like magic,” remarked +Ted. + +“Yes, Labor Day is almost here. Time hasn’t lingered any, I’ll say +that. But now that things have settled down we ought to enjoy every +minute of the remaining time. Not that I haven’t enjoyed it up to the +present time, but we won’t have to go running over the mountains every +once in awhile and sleeping out in the woods. Have you enjoyed the job +of managing a big camp?” + +“Of helping to manage it, you mean,” corrected Ted. “I know that you’ve +stood back and allowed me to run most things, but don’t forget that you +are a partner in this. Yes, I’ve enjoyed it and I’ve learned a lot from +it.” + +The rest of the week passed away without incident, the boys enjoying +it keenly. Now that there was no eternal watch to be kept they felt a +lifting of a weight and from that time on they were able to give their +whole attention to their sports and instruction. The two leaders taught +them many useful things about camp life, especially in the matter of +conscientious neatness, and by this time every boy could swim more or +less efficiently. At night the campfire talks were enjoyed and long, +health-giving sleeps rounded off their activities. + +More than once the boys spoke of their enjoyment of the mountain chase +game, so much so that Ted spoke to Buck about it. + +“What do you think of starting a game of Nicky Night after supper?” + +“Fine! I haven’t played it in years! Let’s do it.” + +Few of the boys had ever played Nicky Night, a game that was going out +of date when Ted and Buck were smaller. To the eager listening group +Ted explained it. + +“Just as in the mountain chase, you go out in groups of two,” he told +them. “Only, in this game there is no use of lanterns. In groups of +twos we’ll follow you. Now, here is the idea: the fellows who go out +first split up in twos and drift off up the mountains, and when they +have found what they think is good ground for hiding, they start +yelling as loud as possible, “Nicky Night!” “Nicky Night!” Those in +the camp immediately set out after them and as the pursuing squad gets +nearer the “Nicky Night” yellers sink their voices, disguise them in +every way, and try to throw them off the track. The two who are after +the “Nicky Nights” must touch them before they are prisoners, even +if you have to climb a tree or hang over a cliff to do it! The Nicky +Nights will stay out until the pursuers have to give up, and then they +come in. If more Nicky Nights get in than are captured, they win the +game. You can run away or climb trees or do anything you want to, but +the skill in the game is to throw the others off of the track by the +use of a disguised voice.” + +The boys were keen to try the new game and the sides were made up as +at the time of the mountain chase game. Now that Plum had left the +camp there was one short, and to make things even one boy volunteered +to remain in camp and take care of the fires. It had been agreed that +Ted’s group would take to the mountains this time, and they soon left +the camp in a group, to split up and spread out as they progressed. + +Fifteen minutes after they had left the camp the first blood-stirring +cry floated down from the mountains. “Nicky Night!” came in a disguised +voice, and “Nicky Night!” was repeated by another voice at some +distance from it. + +Buck’s squad took the field at once, and he went off with Drummer in +the direction of one of the voices. The other groups started off on the +trails of other Nicky Nights. As Buck and Drummer progressed up the +side of the mountains they heard the voice before them, high-pitched +and weird. + +“That sounds like Ted,” decided Buck, as they made their way forward. +“We’ll run him down, in spite of his disguised voice. Good thing there +is a generous slice of moon tonight, or we’d have a tough time finding +our way.” + +The Nicky Nights before them heard them coming and immediately began +a retreat, for the voice was next heard further off. On both sides of +them they could hear other cries of “Nicky Night” and a few seconds +later a cry of triumph, “We’ve got you!” One set of Nickys had been +captured. The pair before Buck and Drummer still retreated. + +“They’ll probably take to a tree pretty soon and allow us to go under +them,” said Buck. “That’s the thing we have to look out for. There, +what did I tell you! That ‘Nicky Night’ came from the air!” + +The last “Nicky Night” had indeed come from the air, a weak and +treacherous cry, and they pushed on until they came to an open space. +Here they found the house which some of the boys had been in and where +Ted had seen the man with the lantern roaming around. + +“Hello, here is that old house with all the furnishings,” exclaimed +Buck. + +“Yes, and the Nicky Nights are hiding up there in the cupola on the +porch roof!” cried Drummer excitedly. “I just saw something move up +there. Come on and get them!” + +“I don’t know how to get into that tower room from the house,” said +Buck. + +“We won’t get in through the house. Let’s climb the front porch,” +replied Drummer. + +“All right. But there must be a door from the main part of the house +into that cupola, and they may escape.” + +“Never mind, we’ll chase them through the house,” said the sturdy fat +boy. + +Buck stepped onto the low porch, quickly “shinned” his way up the +supporting roof support, and reached the low front porch roof. Drummer +followed him with remarkable agility and they swiftly crossed the roof +and looked into the little octagon cupola. + +The moonlight sent a half light into the place and for a single instant +they thought that the place was empty. Then, as they became accustomed +to the place, they saw a lone figure crouching along the wall, trying +to conceal itself in the darker shadows of the little tower. The boys +drew in sharp breaths and their skins prickled as the man rose from his +place of concealment. He knew that he had been observed and his hand +fumbled for the knob of the door which opened into the main house. + +Buck had a flash of inspiration. He jumped over the low sill into the +cupola. + +“No you don’t, Jerry Jackson!” he cried. + + + + +CHAPTER XXIV + +MYSTERIES ARE CLEARED UP + + +The man who stood before them, seeking to open the door leading into +the house was indeed the lone dweller from Hogs’ Hollow. He had heard +the two approaching boys and had hidden himself in the cupola of the +abandoned house, not dreaming for a moment that they would enter the +place. He had heard the scratching made by them as they climbed the +porch and their appearance at the open front of the little tower took +him by surprise. For a single moment his little eyes gleamed with an +impulse of violence, but Buck looked fairly husky and Drummer, though +short, was stocky. The man spoke up in a high voice. + +“What you fellers want? I ain’t done nothing to you!” + +“You are Jerry Jackson, aren’t you?” Buck asked, striking a match and +looking closely at the tall, stooped old man. Jackson was past middle +age and his hair was a tangled gray mass which hung far below the line +which would have been marked by a collar had he possessed one. His +clothing was ragged beyond description. + +“Yes, I’m Jerry Jackson, but you got nothing against me,” was the +whining reply. The old man held something behind him all the time with +his left hand and Buck had an uneasy feeling that it might be something +in the nature of a weapon. He kept his eyes narrowly on the man as he +continued to question him. + +“You say we haven’t anything on you, eh? How about scaring us, cutting +down our tents, posing on a rock with a horse, and setting fire to the +woods!” + +The man stirred indignantly. “I never did set on no horse or set the +woods on fire!” he cried, vehemently. “I’ll tell you all I ever done to +your camp. I walked through it with a lantern the first night you got +there, and I blew that conch shell to scare you. I was the one who cut +the ropes on your tents, because you had to go and chase me all over +the mountain, durn yore hides! While you fellers was gettin’ a soakin’ +I slipped down and cut the ropes. Then you chased me another night when +I was hangin’ around yore camp, the night I tried to tote off one ’o +you, and somebody pegged apples at me! But I never used no horse or set +fire to anything.” + +“You paid another visit to the camp, the time the ghost chased you,” +reminded Buck. + +“Yes, and if anybody set yore camp on fire, that feller must have done +it, ’cause I didn’t.” + +“Did you hang a skeleton in the woods?” Buck asked. + +“Don’t know nothin’ about no skeleton,” was the dogged reply. + +“All right, I guess I can see your part in it all,” replied Buck. “Now, +Jerry Jackson, why did you do it? What was the idea of trying to scare +us out of a camp that was our own?” + +The man looked uneasy and cast about him with restless eyes. He shifted +his foot and looked down. + +“I dunno, I must have been crazy,” was the answer. + +“That won’t do, my friend!” Buck cried, sharply. “You are going to +speak up and tell the truth or we will hand you right over to the +authorities! Out with it now!” + +“Well, I didn’t want you boys around here because I was lookin’ for +some money that was supposed to be hid in this house,” replied the man, +fearing to keep the truth back. “A crazy feller named Bainbridge lived +here and he died a short time ago. I heard that there was some money +in the house and I been lookin’ for it. Just when I was goin’ good you +boys had to come snoopin’ around. ‘I’ll get rid of ’em,’ I sez, ‘I’ll +play ghost and scare ’em back to town.’ So I tried it, but you fellows +wouldn’t go.” + +“No, you are right there. Was that why you lowered a lantern down a +chimney on a rope one night?” + +“Yes. How’d you know——” + +“My friend saw you. Is that where you found the money at the bottom of +the chimney?” + +“Yes, there it was—Here! Hold on! I didn’t find any money!” + +Buck smiled grimly at the tone of alarm. He had observed in the +semi-gloom the end of a tin box back of the man. + +“Yes you did, Jackson. You are holding a tin box back of you and there +is money in it. But you needn’t worry, we won’t touch it. All I want +you to do is to go back to camp with us and tell your story to our camp +leader.” + +“If I do, you won’t take my money or have me arrested?” eagerly asked +the old man. + +Buck made the promise and the three of them left the house by the +stairway and took up the journey to the camp. Both boys were on the +alert lest the man give them the slip and remained close to his side, +but he made no attempt to get away and they reached the camp after a +silent trip. All of the other boys were in and anxiously awaiting +them. Ted hurried forward. + +“We were just beginning to worry about you two,” he said. “Your side +won this time, Buck, and you two are the only squad that didn’t get +your men. Who is this with you?” + +“Jerry Jackson, the ghost—or one of the ghosts—of Black Riders’ Camp!” +was the triumphant response. + +His words produced a decided stir and the boys crowded around the +unhappy mountaineer. At Buck’s command the man related all to Ted. + +“Don’t take my money away from me, boys,” he whined, in conclusion. +“I ain’t never had none, and I had to work pretty hard to find this. +Bainbridge is dead and there ain’t much in the box.” + +“We don’t want your money, Jerry,” replied Ted, feeling sorry for the +grasping, miserable old wretch. “I just wanted to know why you kept us +on the jump. If you were the one who set the woods on fire I wouldn’t +be disposed to be nice about it, but the worst thing you did was to cut +the tent ropes, and we had that coming, after a fashion, for chasing +you all over the mountains. Just remember this: if you ever bother us +again when we come here, we’ll turn you over to the police speedily, I +promise you.” + +Jackson promised never to come near the camp again, and then he melted +away in the darkness, hugging the tin box to him. Late into the night +the boys talked it over. + +“That explains half of it,” remarked Ted. “But it doesn’t explain the +skeleton, the Black Rider, the groans or the fire. Looks like we’ll +never get the story of that.” + +But the explanations came from an unexpected source. On the Sunday +before Labor Day Mr. Calvert appeared in the camp, where he was +joyfully welcomed by the boys. He had dinner with them and then +unfolded some information that had them listening eagerly. + +“You fellows are quite famous,” he smiled at them. “Did you know that +you chased a notorious forger and counterfeiter out of this region?” + +“No! How was that?” Ted asked. + +“Did you ever hear of a Dr. Hemple?” + +There was a swift exchange of looks. “The name on the skeleton!” was +the general cry. + +“Yes,” nodded the lawyer. “This Dr. Hemple is a very clever bank note +engraver and some time ago he began to counterfeit money and he forged +his name to checks in the bargain. While the police of several cities +were looking for him he used to retreat up here to a log cabin he has +somewhere around and only a few days ago he was captured. Among his +confessions was a statement that he had hoped to make this region his +headquarters, but that a camp of boys had refused to be scared out and +he couldn’t have men coming and going with a boys’ camp near here. So +he left the place and was later caught.” + +“I remembered the troubles you had had at the camp and I went to see +this Dr. Hemple. He told me of the skeleton and about groaning in +the bushes and of setting the woods on fire. Oh, I know that you are +wondering about the Black Rider part of it, too! He heard that Ted was +going to tell the story and that gave him an idea. He muffled the feet +of his horse and led him out on a rock—that one over there?—and then +put some illuminating powder on the top of the rock, which he touched +off. He hoped you’d think he was a dread spirit of the place, but you +refused to be scared away. But what is his story of another ghost? He +says he masked one night to try and scare you away as a ghost, but he +claims that there was another ghost around.” The lawyer looked puzzled +as the boys broke into peals of hearty laughter, and Ted told him the +story. + +The lawyer enjoyed it thoroughly. “Well, you certainly have had a +wonderful summer of fun and adventure,” he remarked, and later he +spoke privately to Ted and Buck. “You boys have done a fine piece of +work here. All of these boys look in the pink of good health, and as +for that little Clayton lad, his mother and father won’t know him. +He has developed physically and he bears himself like a little man, +in contrast to his former timid way. I am proud of the way you have +handled these boys and the other trustees are going to be, too.” + +“Thank you,” acknowledged Ted and Buck, pleased with Mr. Calvert’s +praise. + +On Labor Day they enjoyed their last few hours of camp life and as soon +as the big truck arrived they pulled the supply truck up to the road +and the boys took their places in the big vehicle. This time Drummer +was in charge of the boys and Buck rode in the front seat with Ted. +With a final cheer for the camp of the Black Riders the trucks started +down the road and back toward the city. + +“Well, I’m mighty sorry to leave the camp,” remarked Buck, as they +rolled slowly along. “I’ve seldom had a better or more exciting time in +my life.” + +“Nor I,” agreed his chum, with enthusiasm. “Black Riders’ Camp will +always have a soft place in my heart.” + +The boys in the truck seemed to feel the same way. The country road +rang with their cheer for the recent camping trip. + + +THE END + + + + + Transcriber’s Notes + + pg 26 Changed: high up in the mountans + to: high up in the mountains + + pg 28 Changed: stood on camparatively level ground + to: stood on comparatively level ground + + pg 40 Changed: migh be very bad for Ted + to: might be very bad for Ted + + pg 79 Changed: Some farmer around her must have owned it + to: Some farmer around here must have owned it + + pg 84 Changed: something that excited their curiousity + to: something that excited their curiosity + + pg 86 Changed: blanching the faces of he boys + to: blanching the faces of the boys + + pg 116 Changed: At the sharp exlamation in his tone + to: At the sharp exclamation in his tone + + pg 116 Changed: Then lantern was coming toward them + to: The lantern was coming toward them + + pg 136 Changed: on the right or the lef side + to: on the right or the left side + + pg 158 Changed: who immmediately struck an attitude of defense + to: who immediately struck an attitude of defense + + pg 165 Changed: For a moment after Ted made his announce- + to: For a moment after Ted made his announcement + + pg 166 Changed: But as it so happend + to: But as it so happened + + pg 185 Changed: You bet is was + to: You bet it was + + pg 191 Changed: a distinct hinderance to their peace + to: a distinct hindrance to their peace + + pg 197 Changed: come from the opposit direction + to: come from the opposite direction + + pg 217 Changed: maybe he can use po-toes + to: maybe he can use potatoes + + pg 226 Changed: I’ll tell you what we’ll do know + to: I’ll tell you what we do know + + + +*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK 75217 *** diff --git a/75217-h/75217-h.htm b/75217-h/75217-h.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c0f1c9a --- /dev/null +++ b/75217-h/75217-h.htm @@ -0,0 +1,8497 @@ +<!DOCTYPE html> +<html lang="en"> +<head> + <meta charset="UTF-8"> + <title> + In the Camp of the Black Rider | Project Gutenberg + </title> + <link rel="icon" href="images/cover.jpg" type="image/x-cover"> + <style> + +body { + margin-left: 10%; + margin-right: 10%; +} + + h1,h2 { + text-align: center; /* all headings centered */ + clear: both; +} + +p { + margin-top: .51em; + text-align: justify; + margin-bottom: .49em; + text-indent: 1em; + font-weight: normal; +} + +hr { + width: 33%; + margin-top: 2em; + margin-bottom: 2em; + margin-left: 33.5%; + margin-right: 33.5%; + clear: both; +} + +hr.chap {width: 65%; margin-left: 17.5%; margin-right: 17.5%;} +hr.full {width: 95%; margin-left: 2.5%; margin-right: 2.5%;} +hr.full-heavy {width: 95%; margin-left: 2.5%; margin-right: 2.5%; border-top: .5em solid;} + +hr.r5 {width: 5%; margin-top: 1em; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-left: 47.5%; margin-right: 47.5%;} + +div.chapter {page-break-before: always;} +h2.nobreak {page-break-before: avoid;} + +table { + margin-left: auto; + margin-right: auto; +} +table.autotable { border-collapse: collapse; } + +.tdl {text-align: left; padding-left: 1em;} +.tdr {text-align: right;} + +.pagenum { /* uncomment the next line for invisible page numbers */ + /* visibility: hidden; */ + position: absolute; + left: 92%; + font-size: small; + text-align: right; + font-style: normal; + font-weight: normal; + font-variant: normal; + text-indent: 0; + color: #A9A9A9; +} /* page numbers */ + +.center {text-align: center;} + +.smcap {font-variant: small-caps;} + +.caption {font-weight: bold;} + +/* Images */ + +img { + max-width: 100%; + height: auto; +} +img.w100 {width: 100%;} + + +.figcenter { + margin: auto; + text-align: center; + page-break-inside: avoid; + max-width: 100%; +} + +/* Transcriber's notes */ +.transnote {background-color: #E6E6FA; + color: black; + font-size:small; + padding:0.5em; + margin-bottom:5em; + font-family:sans-serif, serif; +} + +.fs70 {font-size: 70%} +.fs80 {font-size: 80%} +.fs120 {font-size: 120%} +.fs150 {font-size: 150%} + +.no-indent {text-indent: 0em;} +.bold {font-weight: bold;} +.wsp {word-spacing: 0.3em;} + +.illowp25 {width: 25%;} +.illowp85 {width: 85%;} + +.pageborder {width: 400px; border: 3px solid; padding: 10px; margin: auto;} +.pageborder2 {width: 500px; border: 3px solid; padding: 10px; margin: auto;} + +h2 {font-size: 130%; font-weight: normal; line-height: 1.6em; word-spacing: .3em;} + + </style> +</head> +<body> +<div style='text-align:center'>*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK 75217 ***</div> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 85%"> +<img src="images/cover.jpg" alt="Cover"> +</div> + + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> + +<div class="chapter"> +<figure class="figcenter illowp85" id="frontispiece" style="max-width: 39.5625em;"> + <img class="w100" src="images/frontispiece.jpg" alt=""> + <figcaption class="caption"><p>“I have a feeling that we’ll never be bothered with +them again,” said Buck.</p> +<div> + <p class="fs80" style="float: left;">(<em>Page <a href="#Page_234">234</a></em>)</p> + <p class="fs80" style="float: right;">(<em>In the Camp of the Black Rider</em>)</p> +</div> +<div style="clear:both;"></div> +</figcaption> +</figure> +</div> + + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> + +<div class="chapter pageborder"> + +<h1> +IN THE CAMP<br> +<span class="fs70">OF THE</span><br> +BLACK RIDER</h1> + +<hr class="full-heavy"> +<p class="center no-indent fs120 wsp"> +By CAPWELL WYCKOFF</p> + +<hr class="full"> + +<p class="center no-indent wsp"><span class="smcap">Author</span> <em>of</em><br> +“The Mercer Boys Series,” “The Secret of<br> +the Armor Room,” etc.</p> +<br> + +<figure class="figcenter illowp25" id="title" style="max-width: 25em;"> + <img class="w100" src="images/title.jpg" alt="Decoration"> +</figure> +<br> + +<hr class="full-heavy"> + +<p class="center no-indent wsp"> +<span class="fs120">A. L. BURT COMPANY</span><br> + +<em>PUBLISHERS</em><br> + +New York <span style="padding-left: 10em"> Chicago</span><br> + +<span class="fs70">Printed in U. S. A.</span><br> +</p> +</div> + + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> + +<div class="chapter pageborder2"> +<p class="center no-indent fs150 bold wsp">ADVENTURE AND MYSTERY SERIES<br> +FOR BOYS</p> + +<p class="center no-indent fs120 wsp">12 TO 16 YEARS OF AGE</p> + +<hr class="r5"> + +<p class="no-indent"> +<b>Tom Blake’s Mysterious Adventure.</b> By Milton Richards.<br> +<b>Barry Dare and the Mysterious Box.</b> By Gardner Hunting.<br> +<b>The Black Skimmer.</b> By Philip Hart.<br> +<b>The Wreck of the Dauntless.</b> By Philip Hart.<br> +<b>The Valdmere Mystery.</b> By Milton Richards.<br> +<b>The Flight of the Mystic Owls.</b> By Philip Hart.<br> +<b>The Secret of the Armor Boom.</b> By Capwell Wyckoff.<br> +<b>Adventures of a Patriot.</b> By Philip Hart.<br> +<b>Donald Price’s Victory.</b> By L. P. Wyman.<br> +<b>The Mystery of Eagle Lake.</b> By L. P. Wyman.<br> +<b>In the Camp of the Black Rider.</b> By Capwell Wyckoff.<br> +<b>The Mystery at lake Retreat.</b> By Capwell Wyckoff.<br> +</p> + +<hr class="full-heavy"> + +<p class="center no-indent fs80 wsp"> +Copyright, 1931<br> +By A. L. BURT COMPANY</p> + +<hr class="r5"> + +<p class="center no-indent fs80 wsp">IN THE CAMP OF THE BLACK RIDER<br> +</p> +</div> + + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> + +<div class="chapter"> +<h2 class="nobreak" id="CONTENTS">CONTENTS</h2> +</div> + +<hr class="r5"> + +<table class="autotable"> +<tr> +<td class="tdr fs80">CHAPTER</td> +<td class="tdl"></td> +<td class="tdr fs80">PAGE</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tdr">I.</td> +<td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">Ted Takes a Post</span></td> +<td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_5">5</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tdr">II.</td> +<td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">In the Camp of the Black Riders</span></td> +<td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_16">16</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tdr">III.</td> +<td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">Following the Light</span></td> +<td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_26">26</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tdr">IV.</td> +<td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">A Startling Sight</span></td> +<td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_33">33</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tdr">V.</td> +<td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">Setting Up Camp</span></td> +<td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_44">44</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tdr">VI.</td> +<td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">A Prowler in the Night</span></td> +<td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_56">56</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tdr">VII.</td> +<td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">Weird Sounds</span></td> +<td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_66">66</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tdr">VIII.</td> +<td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">A Grim Find Exploded</span></td> +<td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_76">76</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tdr">IX.</td> +<td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">Ted Lays Down the Law</span></td> +<td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_88">88</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tdr">X.</td> +<td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">Mountain Chase</span></td> +<td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_99">99</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tdr">XI.</td> +<td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">The Lone Light</span></td> +<td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_110">110</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tdr">XII.</td> +<td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">Heaven’s Artillery</span></td> +<td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_119">119</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tdr">XIII.</td> +<td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">Buck Makes a Discovery</span></td> +<td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_129">129</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tdr">XIV.</td> +<td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">The Story of the Black Riders</span></td> +<td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_140">140</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tdr">XV.</td> +<td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">Mutiny</span></td> +<td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_152">152</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tdr">XVI.</td> +<td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">Things Are Settled Man-Fashion</span></td> +<td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_165">165</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tdr">XVII.</td> +<td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">Buck’s Squad Takes the Field</span></td> +<td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_177">177</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tdr">XVIII.</td> +<td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">An Uneasy Camp</span></td> +<td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_188">188</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tdr">XIX.</td> +<td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">Drummer Saves His Chief</span></td> +<td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_198">198</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tdr">XX.</td> +<td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">A Visit to Hogs’ Hollow</span></td> +<td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_210">210</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tdr">XXI.</td> +<td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">The Watching Post</span></td> +<td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_220">220</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tdr">XXII.</td> +<td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">Ghost Meets Ghost</span></td> +<td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_229">229</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tdr">XXIII.</td> +<td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">A Game of Nicky Night</span></td> +<td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_238">238</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tdr">XXIV.</td> +<td class="tdl"><span class="smcap">Mysteries Are Cleared Up</span></td> +<td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_249">249</a></td> +</tr> +</table> + + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> + +<div class="chapter"> +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_5">[Pg 5]</span></p> + +<p class="center no-indent bold fs150 wsp">IN THE CAMP OF THE<br> +BLACK RIDER</p> + +<hr class="r5"> + +<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_I">CHAPTER I<br> +<span class="fs70">TED TAKES A POST</span></h2> +</div> + +<p>The noon whistles blew in the little inland +town of Ridgefield and the sound, flung from +many a hoarse factory siren, reached the ears +of the few men who worked at piling lumber +in Thorn’s Lumber and Millwork Company +yard. The work of the men was instantly suspended +and most of them walked off to look +into well-filled lunch pails. A few, fortunate +enough to live close by, started off for their +homes.</p> + +<p>At the first sound of the whistles two clean-cut +young fellows at the far end of the yard +had just lifted a long plank, preparatory to +tossing it on a towering pile beside them. They +looked smilingly at each other as the whistles,<span class="pagenum" id="Page_6">[Pg 6]</span> +joined by others, increased in volume of sound.</p> + +<p>“That’s what we have been listening for!” +smiled Ted Thorn, son of the owner of the lumber +yard.</p> + +<p>“Be careful!” warned Buck Dalton, his constant +companion and devoted chum. “You will +come under the heading of a whistle-listener! +That’s the next worse thing to being a clockwatcher!”</p> + +<p>“Can’t help it,” grinned Ted. “My stomach +has been listening for that sound for some time +past.”</p> + +<p>“Mine has, too,” confessed Buck. “Let’s +heave this last board up.”</p> + +<p>With a concerted heave they sent the long +board flying upward to the top of the pile and +then, after washing at the nearby faucet, they +set off for home and the noon meal. It was a +noontime in late July and as they walked along +they talked of summer plans.</p> + +<p>“I hope we can get in some camping before +long,” Ted said, as they turned down the shady +street upon which they both lived. “We’ve +made a little extra money this summer so far +and we’re in fine shape for the football season +this year. I think that it is time we knocked<span class="pagenum" id="Page_7">[Pg 7]</span> +off our work and figured on a little camping +trip.”</p> + +<p>“I agree with you on that,” nodded Buck. +“I’m just about ready for a good outdoor trip +and a few weeks under canvas. There is nothing +I like as well as the woods and a tent.”</p> + +<p>“That, and a fire which glows a dull red,” +cried Ted, his eyes shining.</p> + +<p>“You bet! Well, here’s your gate, so the +best of friends must part. See you after dinner.”</p> + +<p>Ted Thorn went into the plain old house while +Buckley Dalton continued on his way to a house +a little way further along the street. These two +boys had been loyal comrades since they had +been old enough to play together. Ted was the +son of the owner of the local lumber yard, a +man of quiet personality and moderate means, +who was wrapped up in the lives of his two +children and his wife. Ted’s sister Dorothy +was one year his junior and his companion of +more than one good time in the events of the +local school. The household was a happy one +and in such an atmosphere Ted had grown up +to be a clean-cut, manly fellow, now eighteen, +and about to enter upon the last year at the +local academy.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_8">[Pg 8]</span></p> + +<p>Buck was Ted’s age and was a worthy companion, +a fun-loving fellow who was honest and +generous to the core. In physical proportions +he passed Ted, weighing a few pounds more and +being gifted with a wider span of shoulders. +Both of the boys had been working throughout +the summer at Ted’s father’s lumber yard, to +store up a little money to their accounts at the +bank and to keep themselves in trim for the +coming football season. On the Ridgefield +Academy team Buck played fullback and Ted +had been for the past two years the quarterback +of the team. It was the intention of the boys +to work at least a month or more and then to +spend some time during the summer on a camping +trip, to round off their summer training in +that way. Now, with August near at hand, they +were beginning to think more seriously of the +trip into the woods.</p> + +<p>Ted entered the house quickly and washed +up, after which he reported to the dining room +table. His father and mother were there, +though his sister was visiting at another house. +With all the evidence of a healthy appetite Ted +attacked the food which his mother placed +before him.</p> + +<p>“The foreman tells me that you and Buck<span class="pagenum" id="Page_9">[Pg 9]</span> +are becoming first class men,” his father, a +middle-aged man with heavy gray hair, told +him.</p> + +<p>“Glad to hear that,” Ted smiled. “When we +first started to work at the yard it seemed that +all we could do was to collect sore hands and +blisters! I guess that after we finish at the +academy you may be able to hire us for good, +Dad!”</p> + +<p>“I shouldn’t wonder if you might be able to +do something else beside pile lumber, after you +graduate from the academy,” returned his +father.</p> + +<p>“Hope so,” his son said. “Pretty soon we’ll +have to pick out a preparatory school or college +for me, won’t we Dad?”</p> + +<p>“In another six months,” his father nodded, +deriving pleasure from the thought. The fact +that Ted was going to college outweighed the +thought of personal expense with Mr. Thorn.</p> + +<p>“Ted, there was a telephone call for you today,” +his mother, a fine looking, sweet-faced +woman, put in. “Mr. Calvert called up and left +a message for you.”</p> + +<p>“Mr. Calvert?” frowned Ted. “Let’s see, +he’s the president of the Boys’ Club of the town, +isn’t he?”</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_10">[Pg 10]</span></p> + +<p>“Yes, and also a prominent lawyer,” replied +his father. “I wonder what he wants you for?”</p> + +<p>“Can’t guess,” Ted shook his head. “What +message did he leave, Mother?”</p> + +<p>“He asked to tell you to get in touch with +him as soon as possible,” she replied.</p> + +<p>“All right, I will. I suppose I had better +go to his house this evening.”</p> + +<p>“Go to his office this afternoon,” his father +said. “It may be something important and +there is no use keeping Mr. Calvert waiting. I +guess the lumber yard can spare you for a little +while.”</p> + +<p>“I guess you won’t lose any money while I’m +gone,” grinned Ted. “All right, I’ll call him +and make an appointment with him for this +afternoon.”</p> + +<p>After the noon meal Ted called up the lawyer +and made an appointment with him for an early +hour. He then went out to the gate and waited +for Buck to come by. In a few moments his +chum came swinging along the street.</p> + +<p>“Come on, back to the field of battle,” he +called, gaily.</p> + +<p>“You go ahead,” Ted advised him. “I won’t +be over there right away. I’ve got an appointment +with Lawyer Calvert.”</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_11">[Pg 11]</span></p> + +<p>They discussed the item for a few moments +before they parted. “He must want you for +something pretty important,” Buck thought. +“Maybe he wants you to work for him during +the rest of the summer.”</p> + +<p>“If that is what he wants, he won’t get it,” +Ted shook his head. “I’m going camping with +you, Buck old boy.”</p> + +<p>“Well, don’t be foolish about that,” Buck +advised. “We can go camping some other +time, you know, and Mr. Calvert doesn’t offer +jobs every day.”</p> + +<p>“We’re getting a bit ahead of the game,” +Ted smiled. “We don’t know yet what he does +want. I’ll see you later in the day and tell +you all about it.”</p> + +<p>Buck went on the way returning to his work +in the lumber yard, while Ted waited until it +was time to go downtown to see the lawyer. +Promptly at the appointed hour he reported at +the office of Mr. Calvert and after his name had +been sent in, he was admitted to the presence of +the man.</p> + +<p>Ted had seen Mr. Calvert before but he was +not personally acquainted with him. The lawyer +was a fine, upstanding man, a power in the +little community, and a great lover of boys and<span class="pagenum" id="Page_12">[Pg 12]</span> +their activities. Ted was a little surprised when +the handsome, middle-aged lawyer got up from +his deep leather chair and smilingly shook +hands with him.</p> + +<p>“How do you do, Thorn!” he asked, giving +Ted a hearty pressure of the hand. “I’m glad +you found the opportunity to drop in and visit +me. I suppose you have no idea why I sent for +you!”</p> + +<p>“None at all, sir,” Ted confessed.</p> + +<p>“Take a seat,” the lawyer directed, and when +Ted had seated himself opposite him the man +went straight to the point.</p> + +<p>“Thorn, you know that I am president of +the Boys’ Club of this town, an organization of +young fellows numbering about twenty young +fellows, all pretty wide-awake boys who are +banding their activities together and learning +some pretty useful things in life. These boys +are younger than you are and that is the reason +that you and some of your particular friends +have never been asked to join. Well, the time +has come when these boys are asking for a +regular summer camping trip, and the officers +of the club have agreed that the boys shall have +a month of camping life this year, under the +direction of the club. We want some one trustworthy<span class="pagenum" id="Page_13">[Pg 13]</span> +to take these boys off on a camping trip +and take care of them, and we feel that we +couldn’t get a better leader than you.”</p> + +<p>Ted’s face flushed with pleasure but he hesitated, +questions surging in his mind. “That’s +a very kind thought, Mr. Calvert,” he said. +“But don’t you think I am a little young?”</p> + +<p>“No, I don’t, and besides, you’d have help. +We know that you travel constantly in the company +of Buckley Dalton and if you accept the +post, we want your comrade to go with you. +Between the two of you, you’d have no trouble +in handling the boys. You speak of being young. +Well, we wouldn’t consider anyone as young as +you are unless he was the power among younger +fellows that you are. For the past two years +you have been quarterback on the academy +team, and the boys in the club have looked at +you with eyes of worship! Your clean playing, +your clear head work on the field, has captured +their imagination so that they will hop with +joy when they are told that you will lead the +camping trip. We propose to pay you and +Buck a small salary for your work. How about +it, Thorn?”</p> + +<p>“On one condition,” said Ted, instantly.</p> + +<p>“What is that?” Calvert asked.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_14">[Pg 14]</span></p> + +<p>“That you withdraw what you said about the +salary. Buck and I were planning to go for a +camping trip very soon and this plan which you +propose would simply be a bigger trip than we +had planned. If you pay all expenses for food, +as I suppose you will, that will be enough.”</p> + +<p>“Nonsense, Thorn! If we hired a professional +man, we’d have to pay him,” the lawyer +said.</p> + +<p>“Yes, but we’re not professionals. Buck and +I have camped before, and this trip will be a +new experience for us. Now, if our food and +equipment is to be furnished, Buck and I will +be saving, and that will be plenty as it is. +How do you know that we’ll make a success of +it?”</p> + +<p>“The men in this town notice a thing or two, +Thorn,” was the quiet answer.</p> + +<p>“This is something new,” Ted said. “But +we’ll try it—with no salary! I think we’ll both +feel more like doing the job right if we do it +for the benefit of the club and the boys, than +if we do it because we are paid for it. The +Boys’ Club is a fine institution, and Buck and +I will be glad to help it along.”</p> + +<p>“I appreciate your good spirit,” smiled the +lawyer. “I am glad that we are able to get<span class="pagenum" id="Page_15">[Pg 15]</span> +leaders like you two. And now I want to speak +to you about the camping site.”</p> + +<p>“I was wondering where the camp would be,” +Ted nodded.</p> + +<p>“Have you ever heard of Black Riders’ +Camp?” the lawyer asked.</p> + +<p>Ted considered. “That is the place where +a number of patriots used to meet in a band at +the time of the Revolutionary War, isn’t it?”</p> + +<p>Mr. Calvert nodded. “Yes. This state played +a big part in the Revolution and a band of +mounted men, known as the Black Riders, used +to meet in a camp near here and sally forth to +worry the British all over the countryside. That +camp is now owned by the members of the +Boys’ Club Trustee Board, and it is on that +spot that we wish the camp to be pitched. A +large and beautiful stream of water, called Bear +Creek, runs through the hollow where the camp +was, there is an excellent natural swimming +hole, and all in all the spot is ideal, except in +one particular.”</p> + +<p>“What is that?” Ted asked.</p> + +<p>“Unfortunately,” replied Mr. Calvert slowly. +“The camp of the Black Riders is said to +be a haunted spot!”</p> + + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> + +<div class="chapter"> +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_16">[Pg 16]</span></p> + +<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_II">CHAPTER II<br> +<span class="fs70">IN THE CAMP OF THE BLACK RIDERS</span></h2> +</div> + +<p>“The camp is haunted!” Ted asked, quickly, +leaning forward in interest.</p> + +<p>Mr. Calvert smiled. “It is said to be, at any +rate. There are all sorts of foolish stories connected +with the place, and I have no doubt that +people residing in the surrounding country +could tell you many of them. It is all probably +nonsense, but I thought it better to tell you.”</p> + +<p>“Do any of the boys who are going on the +camping trip know that the camp is supposedly +haunted?”</p> + +<p>“As far as I know they don’t, but they will +be told of it by someone. You may have a little +difficulty on that score, but not much, I think.”</p> + +<p>“I don’t think that we will,” affirmed Ted. +“Most of the boys are sensible fellows and they +will take care of the rest. The camp is some +little distance away from here, isn’t it?”</p> + +<p>“About forty miles. Some of the parents +may wonder why we select a spot so far away,<span class="pagenum" id="Page_17">[Pg 17]</span> +but there is not much real fun out of a camping +trip unless the camp is some distance away. +There are other spots nearer, but none of them +is as ideal as the Black Riders’ Camp, and the +trustees wish that particular spot to be used. +The creek that runs through the natural basin +has a fine curve in it which makes the swimming +hole I spoke of and seldom have I seen anything +to even equal it for attractiveness. If our boys +get a month in a place like that, with constant +outdoor work and play, I’m sure that it will do +them a world of good.”</p> + +<p>“There is no doubt of it,” Ted agreed. “I’m +very glad to be in on the thing. Buck and I +have had enough camping experience to swing +the job and I think we’ll both enjoy the experience +of handling a big crowd instead of +just a few fellows. How will we get to the +place?”</p> + +<p>“A couple of trucks will take you there and +all of the necessary equipment will be provided. +Anytime that you desire fresh food you can +call me up and it will be sent. I’m very glad +that you are going, Thorn, because I feel sure +that the camp will be in the hands of two trustworthy +fellows. I wasn’t sure whether your<span class="pagenum" id="Page_18">[Pg 18]</span> +friend Buck would be free to go along and so I +only asked you to come and see me.”</p> + +<p>“Buck will be glad to go along,” smiled Ted. +“We don’t go very many places without each +other! By the way, do you think it would be +wise for me to run out and look over Black +Riders’ Camp before the camp actually settles +there?”</p> + +<p>“I think it would be an excellent idea. Take +the Black Horse Pike out past Montvery, turn +off on a dirt road which you will find on your +left as you leave Montvery, and you’ll have +no trouble locating the camp. If you see the +site of the location you will have no trouble in +setting up camp, because you have time ahead +to figure out space.”</p> + +<p>“All right, I’ll do that. How soon will the +boys be ready to go?”</p> + +<p>“In a week. There are some few details to +be worked out and then everything will be in +readiness.”</p> + +<p>After some more talk Ted left the lawyer’s +office, well pleased with the project which +loomed up before him, and made his way quickly +to the lumber yard. The sense of responsibility +which would rest upon him gave him +something serious to think about, but the more<span class="pagenum" id="Page_19">[Pg 19]</span> +he thought it out the more it seemed to him that +the experience would be a good one. On the +other camping trips there had always been a +few fellows and every one had had his own +affairs to look out for, but this club camping +trip promised to tax his executive powers. +There would have to be system and obedience +and he liked the prospect of organizing such +a camp.</p> + +<p>“Buck and I will learn a whole lot out of this +trip,” he thought, as he entered the lumber +yard.</p> + +<p>Buck was in the yard office, busily checking +up on some lumber when Ted came in, and he +looked up with his customary grin. “Here +comes the big boss!” he cried. “Good morning, +Mister Thorn!”</p> + +<p>“Good morning is right!” flashed back Ted. +“Arriving to work at three o’clock in the afternoon +is quite a privilege, isn’t it? Never mind, +when you get to be an old and trusted employee, +as I am, you can do the same!”</p> + +<p>“I’ll do that. What did Mr. Calvert have to +say, if it is for me to know.”</p> + +<p>“It is very much for you to know, Buck,” +replied Ted, seating himself on a stool beside +his chum. “You and I have been appointed<span class="pagenum" id="Page_20">[Pg 20]</span> +camp leaders for the Boys’ Club during their +August encampment!”</p> + +<p>“Get out! You’re fooling!”</p> + +<p>“I thought Mr. Calvert was, but he wasn’t. +No, he wants us to go and take charge of the +camp, which will be out in the woods at the +camp of the Black Riders.”</p> + +<p>“Hello, the haunted camp!”</p> + +<p>“Where did you hear that it was haunted?” +Ted asked, quickly.</p> + +<p>“Oh, a cousin of mine told me, but it is just +some foolishment, as our friend Jake Meyers +would say. Some countryman went to sleep +there one time and a rock rolled down hill, +passing close to his head. It was a big rock +and the man wouldn’t believe but that some +ghost or goblin or something did it, and I guess +from that time on there have been stories. They +don’t amount to anything, though.”</p> + +<p>“They don’t with us, but I don’t know how +things will be with younger boys. You and I +will have to laugh off any such feelings if they +do get around, and if possible, we must do our +best to see to it that they don’t get around. +You’ve never been there, have you?”</p> + +<p>“No. Have you?”</p> + +<p>“No, but in accordance with a suggestion<span class="pagenum" id="Page_21">[Pg 21]</span> +which Mr. Calvert approved, I’m going to run +up there on Saturday afternoon and look the +place over. Want to come along?”</p> + +<p>“I won’t be able to, because I’m going visiting +with the family. But you go ahead and look +things over. Now, let’s have the whole story +of what Mr. Calvert said.”</p> + +<p>Ted told Buck the arrangements and his companion +was enthusiastic. “We’ll get a good +insight on how to run a big camp,” he declared. +“Of course, in some respects, it won’t be as +much fun as camping alone, because when you +are with one or two fellows you can do pretty +much as you please, but we’ll try our hand at +something new. I’m all for it.”</p> + +<p>“I knew you would be, and I told Mr. Calvert +so. What I’ll do is this: I’ll drive up there +in the Rattletrap and look over the spot, to get +a fair idea of the place. Then you and I will +figure out just where we want the tents to go +and how we’ll want things arranged.”</p> + +<p>That night the two boys told the news at +their respective homes and the plans for the +rest of the summer were approved. Buck was +the only son of his parents and they were very +proud of their stalwart son. Between the two +families there existed a warm friendship which<span class="pagenum" id="Page_22">[Pg 22]</span> +was of years standing. And although Buck +went to Ted’s house presumably to see Ted, it +was no secret that he hoped on each visit to +see Ted’s sister, Dorothy.</p> + +<p>On the following Saturday both boys terminated +their work at the mill yard and that +afternoon Ted went to the old barn back of +his house and took out his battered old car, +which he capped with a fitting name when he +termed it the Rattletrap. It was of an ancient +vintage and rattled before each start and halt +with singular energy and application. But it +always went and it had more than once taken +the two boys to school and other events, keeping +to date a record for performance of which +any car might well be proud.</p> + +<p>In this old wreck of a car Ted left Ridgefield +and headed out for the Black Horse Pike, one +of the oldest roads in the State. He followed +this for the forty miles which Mr. Calvert had +told him of, and reached the small town of +Montvery. Traversing this same road he passed +through the village and came to a grass-grown +old road that led away toward the encircling +forest. Judging this to be the road in question, +Ted followed it, and after passing about +a half mile of fields, the road dipped into thick<span class="pagenum" id="Page_23">[Pg 23]</span> +woods. As soon as he left the open grounds +the gloom seemed to wall him in and the woods +were cool.</p> + +<p>A farmer was approaching and Ted brought +the Rattletrap to a stop, hailing the man. +“Am I anywhere near the camp of the Black +Riders?”</p> + +<p>“Keep going for another half mile,” was +the answer. “Then you’ll get to the end of +the road and you’ll have to hike down the path +into the gully.” He rested his foot on the +runningboard of the shaking car. “Don’t many +people come up to see the camp any more,” he +confided.</p> + +<p>“How is that?” Ted asked.</p> + +<p>“Oh, people get tired of lookin’ at nothing +but an open space. If it was a building or +something else it would be different. You going +to take a look at it?”</p> + +<p>“Yes,” Ted nodded. “A bunch of fellows +are going to camp there in a week or so.”</p> + +<p>“I see. Well, you won’t have nobody bothering +you.”</p> + +<p>“That is comforting news,” Ted thought, as +he left the farmer and moved on. “That will +be something like real camp life.”</p> + +<p>He came to the end of the rough road and<span class="pagenum" id="Page_24">[Pg 24]</span> +left the car, starting out on a steadily descending +path until he came at last to the camp of +the Black Riders. Before going to the bottom +of the basin he paused to look around him. +The place was a perfect bowl, the sides of which +were sheathed with fine pine trees. At the +bottom ran Bear Creek with its curve that made +the swimming pool. On all sides, sloping upward, +the forest rippled away into the distance, +solid and green.</p> + +<p>Ted descended to the bottom of the basin +and looked closely over the camp site. His +satisfaction was complete as he discovered two +fine springs at a little distance above the spot +where he figured that the tents should go. The +streams from the springs flowed down and into +Bear Creek.</p> + +<p>“Two dandy springs,” he reflected. “That’s +fine. The water goes into the creek, and I guess +that makes the water pretty cold, but I suppose +we won’t mind that.”</p> + +<p>He continued to look over the spot, noting all +the natural advantages of the place. As far +as he knew there were no disadvantages attached +to it. The ground was carpeted with +soft pine needles and the air was charged with<span class="pagenum" id="Page_25">[Pg 25]</span> +a fragrant tang. Lost in his thoughts, Ted did +not notice the swift passage of time.</p> + +<p>The gloom of the woods increased and he +awoke at last to the lateness of the hour. His +start that afternoon had not been an early one +and he realized that he must hurry back. The +suddenness with which darkness, aided by a +group of dull clouds, came up, amazed him. He +could scarcely see before him as he turned to +leave.</p> + +<p>“Golly, it certainly did get dark in a hurry,” +he thought. “I must be getting out of here. +I must be the only one for miles around.”</p> + +<p>But a moment later, as he glanced up the +towering mountains to the left of the camp site, +he knew that he was mistaken. In the darkness +above a lantern bobbed and swung.</p> + + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> + +<div class="chapter"> +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_26">[Pg 26]</span></p> + +<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_III">CHAPTER III<br> +<span class="fs70">FOLLOWING THE LIGHT</span></h2> +</div> + +<p>The sight of a lantern high up in the mountains +captured Ted’s imagination as well as his +attention. The region seemed to be a particularly +lonely one and he wondered who the lantern-carrier +could be. While there had been +light he had looked along the mountain side +but had seen no house or barn. The wooded +slopes had appeared untouched by the hand of +man and altogether too dense and forsaken for +a house of any kind. Yet the bearer of the +lantern was going somewhere.</p> + +<p>The light flashed in and out among the trees +as the bearer carried it onward and upward, +winking at irregular intervals as it passed back +of trees. The gleam was yellow and a trifle +dim, yet there was power enough to it for the +watching boy to see. Although it was perhaps +perfectly natural for someone to walk the mountains +with a lantern, Ted’s mind pondered it.</p> + +<p>“Wonder where he can be going? It really<span class="pagenum" id="Page_27">[Pg 27]</span> +isn’t any of my business, and I suppose that +the person carrying the lantern knows what he +is up to, but it looks a bit mysterious. Still, it +isn’t necessary to follow it.”</p> + +<p>His mind had already considered the possibility +of following, but at first he rejected the +idea wholly. In the first place, the action would +probably end in his seeing the man enter some +hidden barn on perfectly proper business, and +in the second place, it was the right of anyone +to walk along the mountain at any time. But +the upward twist and turn of the tiny, bobbing +light fascinated him.</p> + +<p>“I guess I will follow it,” he finally decided. +“I’d like to see where it goes to. I may learn +something about the region if anything can be +learned on a dark night like this, and anyway, +I’ll feel a little more satisfied if I see where +the light is going. Now, let’s see how good I +am at finding my way around here in the dark!”</p> + +<p>Centering his eyes upon the light’s feeble +gleam Ted started on his climb up the side +of the mountain. As soon as he plunged into +the trees he lost sight of the gleam which he +was trying to trace, but from time to time he +caught sight of it again as he came out into a +cleared space. It was no longer moving up<span class="pagenum" id="Page_28">[Pg 28]</span> +but was keeping on a level of the mountain side +and he took an abrupt cut across the contemplated +line of march. The light moved slower +and slower now and he gained upon it.</p> + +<p>In one stretch of his climb Ted lost sight of +the light altogether and for some moments he +was unable to locate it. He was about to give +it up as a bad job when a fleeting flash came +to him through the trees. Now he made out +that the lantern-bearer was standing still and +in this interval he hoped to catch up. With +this in mind Ted rapidly climbed the last slope +and stood on comparatively level ground on +what was a great shoulder of the mountains, +heavily wooded as was the rest of the region. +Before him the lantern, hung in an invisible +hand, cast a circle of light around the ground.</p> + +<p>In the shelter of some bushes and trees Ted +crouched and looked at the lantern. It was an +extremely old-fashioned one, with three +rounded sides open and the fourth blank. Due +to this structure of the lamp Ted was unable +to see who it was who held the thing. The +uncompleted circle cast by the lantern showed +only the tips of two large shoes and the shadowy +outline of a pair of trousers which seemed much +the worse for wear. Above this, the bearer was<span class="pagenum" id="Page_29">[Pg 29]</span> +invisible and might have been looking in Ted’s +direction as well as in any other, for all that the +boy knew. In fact, the continued silence of the +man, combined with his motionlessness, made +Ted somewhat uneasy, for it was possible that +he was simply standing there and looking +around. Ted imagined that he had made a lot +of noise in his climb.</p> + +<p>At last the lamp was slightly shifted, much +to Ted’s relief, and he saw at once the object +of the man’s search, or at least the goal of it. +The feeble rays from the old lantern showed +dimly the outline of an old house. In the fitful +gleam there was revealed a short section of the +foundation, which was crumbling away, and a +limited view of the warped boarding on the +side of the house. It was to this spot that the +lone prowler had come and he seemed to be +intent upon his job.</p> + +<p>As Ted remained at his post watching the +lantern and the man moved away, passing along +the side of the house. The watcher had a hurried +glimpse of broken masonry and rotting boards +occasionally obscured by masses of bushes and +creepers. The man went around to the back +of the house and for a few moments the light +was entirely withdrawn from Ted’s sight.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_30">[Pg 30]</span></p> + +<p>By this time Ted had entered fully into the +sense of adventure of the thing. Surely, there +was something unusual going on. Something +important must be bringing this man out with +his lantern to look around an old house. The +building itself aroused Ted’s curiosity. Who +could have built it up in the solitary fastness +of the woods and how long had it been standing +idle? Something beside the beauty of the +place must be responsible for the intent prowling +of the man with the lantern.</p> + +<p>“I must see this house by daylight,” Ted +decided.</p> + +<p>The light winked suddenly around the far +corner of the house and moved along the front. +Rough steps were revealed and the man with +the shadowy legs mounted the steps, crossed the +porch and passed through a gaping doorway +into a front door. A swift glimpse was afforded +Ted of white plaster on the walls and then the +light disappeared.</p> + +<p>It was gone for some little time, finally +appearing briefly in an upper window. After +that it disappeared again and was gone so +long that Ted grew highly impatient and +seriously contemplating leaving. He knew that +he should be getting back to the town, for it<span class="pagenum" id="Page_31">[Pg 31]</span> +was late and he had a long drive before him. +But the subject in hand fascinated him and he +wanted to see it through.</p> + +<p>“I’ll give the gentleman a few more +minutes,” he thought. “If nothing shows up +then, I’ll have to beat it.”</p> + +<p>Crouching there in the bushes he waited +straining his eyes toward the blackness of the +house. The whole mountainside had now become +so black that the house was not even distinguishable +as a darker blot, and if the man +with the lantern had not revealed it, Ted could +not possibly have become aware of its presence +except by bumping into it. With the light out +of sight the darkness was a solid wall.</p> + +<p>Just as Ted’s impatience was nearing the +breaking point he heard the man with the light +returning. There was a sound of crunching +footsteps and he came down a staircase in the +house and before long the flashing beam of the +lantern showed. Man and lantern crossed the +front porch and without hesitation approached +the bushes off to the left of where Ted was +concealed.</p> + +<p>Now the lantern was placed on the ground +and the man, still invisible and keeping out of +the rays of the lamp in a manner that was<span class="pagenum" id="Page_32">[Pg 32]</span> +particularly irritating, crashed his way into +the bushes. Something was hauled forth with +a rustling, crackling noise. For a brief instant +the sides and rungs of a ladder were disclosed +and then the thing passed out of the light circle. +But there was a bump which led Ted to believe +that the ladder, an old common farm ladder, +had been placed against the side of the house.</p> + +<p>In this guess he was correct. The lantern +was lifted from the ground and the two mysterious +legs sought the bottom rung of the +ladder. As Ted watched, the light and the legs +went up step by step, the side of the house, +briefly illuminated, sliding by as the man +mounted to the top.</p> + + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> + +<div class="chapter"> +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_33">[Pg 33]</span></p> + +<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_IV">CHAPTER IV<br> +<span class="fs70">A STARTLING SIGHT</span></h2> +</div> + +<p>A flash of the lantern showed the slope of +the roof and a broken tin gutter. Plainly the +intention of the man was to mount this roof and +the watching boy wondered how he was going +to do it, as there was a decided slope to the +house covering. But the man with the lantern +evidently knew his territory, for he stepped +from the top of the ladder and his foot descended +to the roof, resting in a hole which the +elements had eaten through the shingles. He +began to climb upward, picking his way along +the top of the roof with a certain foot, knowing +the breaks and the rough spots where he could +travel in safety. Without wavering he pressed +on and reached the top of the house, where a +crooked chimney was shadowily revealed in +the glow of the light. The man raised the +lantern.</p> + +<p>Ted peered eagerly from his post in the +bushes, hoping to get a good look at the man<span class="pagenum" id="Page_34">[Pg 34]</span> +but he was doomed to disappointment, at least +as far as the man’s face was concerned. He +had his back to the boy and only the general +outline was disclosed by his act of raising the +lantern. He was outlined against the sky in +a blurred picture, and he seemed to be tall +and thin. His clothing was of the roughest +sort and his hat was a relic which might, at +one time, have been a soldier’s campaign hat. +The roof seemed to be familiar to the man, +for he proceeded to business as coolly as though +he was standing on the firm ground instead of +on the slope of a rotting roof on a solitary house +in the mountains.</p> + +<p>He rested the lantern on the top of the tilted +chimney and then dropped his hands to his +waist, fumbling there for a few moments and +puzzling Ted, who could not make out this +latest move. At length the question was cleared +up, for the man began to pull on something +which revealed itself as a rope and which was +coiled around his waist. In a few minutes it +slipped off of his person and then he proceeded +to tie one end of it to the handle of the lantern. +Then he dropped the lantern down the +mouth of the chimney, paying the rope out<span class="pagenum" id="Page_35">[Pg 35]</span> +gradually, his body bent over so that he could +look down the shaft.</p> + +<p>Ted was rooted to the spot by the strangeness +of the thing. The light had ceased to shine +abroad, instead, it now shot up a feeble shaft +from the interior of the chimney, bathing the +head and shoulders of the lone man in its +wavering, uncertain gleam. The lower part of +the man’s body was lost to sight and the upper +portion, half disclosed, gave a weird appearance, +as though the man was a half-spirit +materializing in the air. With absorbed attention +the man lowered the lantern until the end +of his rope put an end to the process and then +he began what looked to be a profound search +of the depth of the brick shaft. He moved the +rope from side to side, backward and forward, +the ray of light shifting as he did so, becoming +larger and smaller as the man persisted in +his efforts.</p> + +<p>Whether or not his work proved profitable +Ted never knew, for he could not see the face +of the man and there was nothing to be learned +as long as the purpose of the thing was a +mystery. But the man concluded his search in +short order, drawing up the rope rapidly and +pulling out the lantern. Rapidly he untied the<span class="pagenum" id="Page_36">[Pg 36]</span> +rope, wound it around his waist and then descended +the roof, finding the places where he +dared to walk. His foot found the top rung of +the ladder and he reached the earth a few +seconds later.</p> + +<p>The lantern was once more deposited on the +ground. The ladder was removed and placed +in the bushes, and the work of the man seemed +to be finished. He picked up the lantern and +walked off, passing so close to the hiding Ted +that the boy felt the perspiration start suddenly +as he realized that the faltering rays of the +lantern might disclose his hiding place. The +looks of the man were unknown and the prospect +of being seen by a man whose features +were still formless in his mind did not look +inviting to Ted. But the man passed the spot +while he was thinking of these things and +started down the mountain, leaving him to lie +there and wait until it was safe to go on.</p> + +<p>It was manifestly not safe to go on just then. +The man was below him and in the darkness +Ted might start a stone down and advertise +his presence, in which case the game would be +very much against him, for the man with the +light knew the country and he was a stranger +in a strange land. He watched the lantern bobbing<span class="pagenum" id="Page_37">[Pg 37]</span> +down the slope until it was out of sight +and then he sat up, turning the whole thing +over in his mind.</p> + +<p>“By George, that surely was a funny one!” +he thought. “What in the world should he go +and lower the lantern down the chimney for?”</p> + +<p>The whole circumstance was so unusual that +he was forced to give up the solution as a bad +job and one far beyond his powers to figure +out. The house which the boy had caught brief +glimpses of was apparently a deserted old place +of no value whatsoever and why any one should +take the trouble to search it with a lantern for +was beyond him.</p> + +<p>“Can it be possible that there is something +of value in the house?” he wondered, as he +stood up and looked in vain for the light. “I +can’t see why else a man should look around +a place in the night. I wonder why he doesn’t +look around in the daytime? Probably he +would have to have a lantern in the daytime +as well as in the night if he wanted to explore +the bottom of that chimney.”</p> + +<p>Ted glanced toward the black outline of the +house, hesitating as a thought entered his mind. +He was debating the question of entering and +looking around the place. In one sense, he<span class="pagenum" id="Page_38">[Pg 38]</span> +wanted to do so, and in another he did not +want to. The curiosity of the whole thing was +strongly upon him, yet the solitary house was +not inviting. He had no way to make a light +and he knew better than to think of prowling +a dark house, yet he could make an expedition +around the house and get a fair idea of the +place. Then another thought caused him to +abandon that idea.</p> + +<p>“There may be some well close to the +house, and I couldn’t afford to fall into it. No, +I guess I’ll be better off to stay out and away +from it. After we have made our camp up here +I’ll go through the house some day.”</p> + +<p>Realizing that it was becoming far later than +he had had any idea of, Ted decided to go +back to his little car and drive home. For a +moment he paused, undecided. In his haste to +track the man with the lantern he had not taken +time to map out in his mind the direction in +which he had come and for a moment he was +dismayed at the blackness of the woods. Anyone +used to at least the partial illumination +that exists at all points in a city is apt to be +disagreeably surprised at the total blackness +of the night in the woods, and Ted was experiencing<span class="pagenum" id="Page_39">[Pg 39]</span> +this feeling now. But he fought +off his uneasiness.</p> + +<p>“I’ll get back to the car,” he told himself. +“I’ve got to! I’ll just follow down the side +of the mountain. Gosh, I never knew how dark +the woods could be!”</p> + +<p>He began to descend carefully, feeling his +way before him, covering to the best of his +knowledge the route which he had followed as +he tracked the man with the light. Once or +twice he came out on ledges which ended +abruptly and he was compelled to retrace his +steps and work further down, but before long +he found ground which was more level. In a +few moments he heard the murmur of the +stream and recognized it as that of Bear Creek.</p> + +<p>“Landed almost at home!” he exulted. “Now +I guess I can find my way to the Rattletrap!”</p> + +<p>He started to cross the long glade which had +been the camp of the Black Riders and came +in sight of the springs. A light flashed there +and he stopped quickly.</p> + +<p>Beside one of the springs the lantern rested +on the ground and the figure which had carried +it bent over the spring, washing his hands. +Ted’s foot touched and rolled a stone, which +made a slight noise as it rolled.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_40">[Pg 40]</span></p> + +<p>The man at the spring bent forward without +looking around and with a single breath blew +the light out.</p> + +<p>The situation was an odd one and not at +all a comfortable one. The man with the lantern +was there in the darkness, crouching beside +his darkened instrument, doubtless peering +around him to ascertain who it was who had +approached. Ted stood on the spot where he +had first seen the man at the spring, undecided +as to what to do, his nerves tingling. The one +comforting thought that he had was to the +effect that the man did not know who it was +that had come up behind him and so he felt +a certain reassurance. But if the prowling +man knew from what direction the sounds +of approach came he might take it into +his head to explore in the dark, a thing which +might be very bad for Ted.</p> + +<p>In silence they both kept their positions—at +least Ted hoped that the man was keeping his, +and as for the boy he never moved a muscle, +but listened with straining ears. No sound of +a footstep or anything else reached him, the +woods were silent and as far as sound went +Ted might just as well have been in another +world. But he knew that the man was there<span class="pagenum" id="Page_41">[Pg 41]</span> +near him and the feeling was not a happy one.</p> + +<p>It was always possible for him to call out +and explain his presence there, trusting to luck +that the man before him was no madman and +that his explanation would be accepted on its +face value. But the actions of the man were +so stealthy, so mysterious, that they could not +possibly be honest ones. For any man to bend +forward and blow out a lantern in one, swift +decisive breath was worthy of comment by the +most unsuspicious, and it would be reasonable +to suppose that explanations would not be +accepted by a man engaged in the type of +business that this was employed in.</p> + +<p>So he waited for what seemed an age and +when the situation had become almost unbearable +he heard a stone roll and a twig snap +some distance away from the spring, conclusive +proofs that the man with the lantern was stealing +away. Other sounds, accidental but informing, +came to him in the distance which the +man was trying to put between himself and the +boy and Ted felt a sense of relief.</p> + +<p>“But he knows that I am here,” he realized. +“He must be up to something so shady that he +doesn’t want to see anyone, no matter who they +may be. Maybe he is one of the fellows who<span class="pagenum" id="Page_42">[Pg 42]</span> +gives this camp the reputation of being haunted, +and I don’t wonder that anyone would think +of such a thing if they saw him dodge around +with his lamp. I hope he doesn’t show up and +give the boys a scare, because some of them +are pretty young.”</p> + +<p>Guided solely by a sense of direction, Ted +found the path and located his car in the same +spot where he had left it. A rapid inspection +convinced him that the little machine had not +been harmed and he got in, starting his engine +and leaving the spot as rapidly as possible.</p> + +<p>“I must get home,” he thought. “My folks +will be worrying and I don’t want them to do +that. Tomorrow I must hunt up Buck and tell +him what I saw out there. I think that he will +agree with me that we ought to keep it quiet.”</p> + +<p>Ted’s folks were beginning to get worried +but his appearance reassured them and he gave +the excuse that certain things about the camping +spot had interested him so much that he +had remained at the place longer than he had +intended to. Conscious that he had told the +truth and not wishing to alarm them with any +further details, he retired for the night and +enjoyed a good sleep.</p> + +<p>On the following day he and Buck attended<span class="pagenum" id="Page_43">[Pg 43]</span> +the local Young Men’s Bible Class in their +church and on the way back they discussed +the things which Ted had related to his chum +on the way to the church. Buck was unable +to figure anything out and he agreed that they +should make it their own secret.</p> + +<p>“We’ll take a look at that old house when +we get camping there,” he said. “Maybe when +we see what it looks like in the daylight we will +be able to tell something. Whatever we do, we +mustn’t allow the boys to know what you saw +and we’ll have to laugh down any silly stories +that are brought up.”</p> + +<p>“When the gentleman with the lantern sees +that there is a camp around he’ll probably stay +away,” replied Ted.</p> + +<p>“You’re not even going to tell Mr. Calvert, +are you?”</p> + +<p>“No, I’ll just tell him that I am impressed +with the camp site itself. No use in spreading +alarm, and it might get out. After all, that +man might have had a good reason to walk +around in the woods at night, and we’d only +look silly making a big story out of it.”</p> + +<p>“Sure. Well, I’m all set for the trip. We +start this week, and it can’t come too soon for +me.”</p> + + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> + +<div class="chapter"> +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_44">[Pg 44]</span></p> + +<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_V">CHAPTER V<br> +<span class="fs70">SETTING UP CAMP</span></h2> +</div> + +<p>One morning later in that same week the +two chums arose early and gathered up their +camping outfits. Ted said goodbye to his folks, +swung his pack on his back and sallied forth +to meet Buck, who was standing at his own +gate and waiting for him. Buck was rigged out +in a style similar to Ted’s, with a good camping +pack, a campaign hat, buckskin blouse, stout +trousers, heavy shoes, pick and camp shovel, +and an axe.</p> + +<p>“Well, here we go at last!” hailed Buck, +delightedly, eager for the trip before them. +“Seemed like this morning would never come!”</p> + +<p>“I was awake a couple of times myself,” +smiled Ted, as they swung along toward the +club house in town. “We have a dandy day for +a start.”</p> + +<p>It was a cool morning, bright and clear, and +a more promising day could not have been<span class="pagenum" id="Page_45">[Pg 45]</span> +ordered. Their blood tingled as they looked +forward to the coming encampment.</p> + +<p>“Are they going to have one or two trucks?” +Buck asked, as they turned down the street +upon which the club house was located.</p> + +<p>“One big one,” Ted replied, “for the fellows, +and a little one for supplies. The tents +and the grub will take up plenty of space and +I guess the number of boys who are going will +fill up the big truck. Eighteen boys have given +their names and with the two of us we’ll have +twenty, a big enough crowd to handle.”</p> + +<p>“It surely will be,” murmured Buck. “Especially +if you have never done that sort of thing +before.”</p> + +<p>“We won’t have any trouble if we start +right,” said Ted. “If we show the right +authority and set up a sort of military discipline +we’ll get along very well. Most of these +club boys are just small fellows and things +shouldn’t be so difficult with them.”</p> + +<p>By this time they had arrived at the club +rooms of the Boys’ Club and there they found +about half of the young boys assembled. Mr. +Calvert was with them and the two trucks +stood at the curb. With interest the two camp +leaders looked the boys over.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_46">[Pg 46]</span></p> + +<p>They were young boys of the age ranging +between twelve and fifteen and there was one +boy sixteen. They seemed to be a lively bunch +of young fellows who were all obviously keen +for the trip before them. Some of the boys +Ted and Buck knew, either by sight or by name, +but there were several that they did not know. +The boys all had variously assorted packs and +kits with them and while waiting they were +amusing themselves by chattering and tossing +around a large hand medicine ball.</p> + +<p>But if the two leaders did not know the boys, +the boys knew them. There was an immediate +rush toward them as they entered the yard +before the frame building which housed the +club. A number of boys plied them with questions.</p> + +<p>“You’re really going to be the leader, +Thorny?” a boy asked Ted, who nodded in +smiling assent.</p> + +<p>“I am, along with Buck,” he said.</p> + +<p>“Gee, that’s great!” was the enthusiastic +reply. A stout boy of fourteen pushed up to +Ted, with an anxious look on his face.</p> + +<p>“Mr. Thorn, is it true that we won’t have +anything but oatmeal and bread on our camping +trip?”</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_47">[Pg 47]</span></p> + +<p>“Why, I don’t know!” puzzled Ted, looking +toward Mr. Calvert, who winked. “Why do +you ask that?”</p> + +<p>“All these fellows been telling me that,” +said the chubby one. “I don’t like just oatmeal +and bread! I guess they’re fooling, eh?”</p> + +<p>“I hope so myself,” smiled Ted. “I’d like +something else beside that!”</p> + +<p>Mr. Calvert joined the group. “Don’t mind +this boy and his demands for food, Thorn,” he +said. “This is Al Barker, but the boys call +him Drummer.”</p> + +<p>“Why? Does he play a drum?” Ted asked.</p> + +<p>There was a general laugh and Mr. Calvert +explained. “No but he spends his time between +meals drumming up an appetite for the next +one! So the boys have always called him +Drummer!”</p> + +<p>“We’ll try to keep him so well filled that +he won’t have to drum,” grinned Buck, while +the stout boy looked pleased and relieved.</p> + +<p>The boys drifted away to various occupations +and the two chums talked over details with Mr. +Calvert. A few more boys had arrived and +the lawyer remarked that they were almost +all on the spot.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_48">[Pg 48]</span></p> + +<p>“Are all of the boys of this same age?” +Buck asked.</p> + +<p>“All but one of them,” Mr. Calvert said, +lowering his voice. “Or I should say, two of +them, for we have one young boy of eleven and +one boy of seventeen. It is of the older boy +I wish to warn you. His name is Ralph Plum +and he is actually too old for the club boys, +but an uncle of his gave quite a bit of money +toward starting the club and so has always been +allowed to join in with them, though none of the +trustees have felt very cheerful about it. He +is a big hulking fellow and apt to be a trouble +maker, so keep your eyes on him and use your +own judgment. We’re hoping all the time that +he’ll get tired of the club and leave, but so far +he hasn’t, and it was with much regret that +we learned that he was going to go on this +trip. We’ve tried here to teach him something +in the manly line, but haven’t progressed very +far, I’m afraid. Speaking of bad pennies, +there he is now.”</p> + +<p>They turned to look at the boy who walked +into the club house yard and were not impressed. +He was as Mr. Calvert had described +him, a huge fellow with wide-spreading +shoulders and a rolling, careless walk. His<span class="pagenum" id="Page_49">[Pg 49]</span> +camping outfit was brand new and his axe and +knife were of the best. A fine pack was strapped +to his back. But his face was a discontented +one and he chewed gum with an assurance that +was insolent. He passed them easily, nodding +to Mr. Calvert and immediately took the ball +away from the smaller boys and kept it for +some time.</p> + +<p>“Something of a bully,” murmured Ted, his +eyes narrowing.</p> + +<p>“Quite a bit, I’m sorry to say,” was the reply.</p> + +<p>The boys all seemed to be on the ground, Mr. +Calvert said, as he glanced around. “All except +the smallest boy, the eleven-year-old I was +telling you about,” he went on. “Little Tom +Clayton, but I guess he isn’t coming, although +he was eager to come.”</p> + +<p>But at that moment the small boy appeared +in company with his father and Mr. Clayton +was introduced to Ted and Buck. He had come +with his boy for a purpose.</p> + +<p>“I heard that you two boys were going to +lead the camp,” he told the boys. “It was only +because Mrs. Clayton knew you that she allowed +Tom to go along.” He smiled in a somewhat +nervous manner. “Tom’s our only boy—only +child, in fact, and we set a lot of store by him.<span class="pagenum" id="Page_50">[Pg 50]</span> +His mother would spoil him by not letting him +go anywhere and certainly never on a trip like +this, but I want Tom to grow up to be a real +man.” He glanced down at his son, a somewhat +pale and sensitive-looking boy, and then went +on: “We had a hard time getting permission +for this camping trip, didn’t we, Tommy? But +we finally made it. I just want to ask you +fellows to see to it that the boy is well taken +care of and that he is properly developed. I +know you will, but I just wanted to make sure +that everything will be all right, you know.”</p> + +<p>The two leaders made haste to reassure him. +They could visualize without any trouble the +condition of the boy’s home and they sympathized +with him. The father’s desire to have +the boy grow up to be a fine, strong man was +evident.</p> + +<p>All of the boys were now assembled and Mr. +Calvert called for their attention. “I want +you all to file into the club room and sit down +for a last word of instruction from me,” the +president of the club announced, and with more +or less noise they obeyed, pushing and scrambling +to the seats inside the long frame club +house. In the front of them Mr. Calvert and +the two chums stood.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_51">[Pg 51]</span></p> + +<p>“Now, boys,” the president announced, when +he had obtained their attention. “I simply want +to give you some last minute instructions. Most +of you know that Mr. Thorn and Mr. Dalton will +be in complete charge of the camp to which you +are going, and you are to give them your very +best support in making the camp a good and +effective one. This point I want you to get +clearly in your minds: these two young men are +in absolute charge. Their word is law. If they +do something that you don’t feel is the right +thing to do, you do it anyway, and if you think +it is so bad that you can’t stand it, you write +to me or call me up somewhere before you refuse +to obey orders! We want this camp to be +a credit to the Boys’ Club of this city, and it +can’t be that unless it is an orderly one!”</p> + +<p>“You will have a certain amount of camp +work to do, and these leaders will be in charge +of that. Obey them without question. In that +way you will make the most out of your camping +trip and I’m sure that in another year +you’ll want to go again. Any questions, before +you start?”</p> + +<p>“This Black Riders’ Camp is said to be +haunted, isn’t it?” Ralph Plumb spoke up, +from where he was lolling around on a bench.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_52">[Pg 52]</span></p> + +<p>There was a moment of silence and the two +boys felt some annoyance. But Ted spoke up.</p> + +<p>“There used to be some silly stories about +that,” he smiled. “But they were just old women’s +tales! We’re too sensible to give any +thought to anything like that. If twenty fellows +couldn’t scare away a poor little ghost or witch +or whatever it is they used to say hung around +the place, then we’d better go camping over in +the City Park!”</p> + +<p>There was a laugh at this and Plum muttered +something, but no attention was paid to him. +There was a scene of confusion as packs were +slung and then the big truck shook as the boys +swarmed over the sides and into it. The smaller +truck with the supplies had already started off.</p> + +<p>It had been agreed that Ted would drive the +big truck to the camp and that the driver of the +supply truck would drive it back. The little +truck was the property of the club and would +remain in camp with them, in case they wished +at any time to drive to town for fresh food. +The big truck, which was a hired one, would +go back to the city and return at the end of the +month for the boys.</p> + +<p>“Buck, maybe you had better get into the +body of the truck and see to it that none of<span class="pagenum" id="Page_53">[Pg 53]</span> +these fellows get to fooling and fall off,” Ted +said, as the boys pushed and jostled in the truck. +“I’d like to have you drive along with me, but +we had better have somebody on duty back +there.”</p> + +<p>“Guess you’re right,” nodded Buck. “I’d +like to drive alongside of you, but I’ll get back.” +He tossed his pack on board and climbed into +the truck. “All shipshape back here!” he sang +out.</p> + +<p>Ted warmed up the engine, shaking hands in +farewell with Mr. Calvert. “Lots of good luck!” +smiled the lawyer.</p> + +<p>“Thanks! I’m sure we’ll have a fine time!”</p> + +<p>The president leaned nearer. “If there is any +trouble, Thorn, let me know at once.”</p> + +<p>“I will,” Ted nodded, “but I’m sure everything +will be fine. Goodbye.”</p> + +<p>The truck rumbled off in a cloud of dust and +gasoline smoke, the boys gave a shrill cheer, +and the journey to Black Riders’ Camp had +begun.</p> + +<p>The ride was a long one in the truck but the +boys did not mind it. In the back of the truck +the boys talked and sang and Buck joined them +in their conversation, answering a number of +questions concerning camping life in general.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_54">[Pg 54]</span></p> + +<p>Outside the last town on their route they met +the supply truck waiting and in company they +proceeded down the bumpy wood road until the +autos could go no farther. They were in the +shelter of the trees and a stone’s throw from +the camp of the Black Riders.</p> + +<p>“All out and grab some equipment!” shouted +Buck, and they descended from the truck in a +torrent, making shrill demands for their packs +from those who were still in the truck. These +were supplied and then Ted and Buck ordered +them to unload the supply truck. This was +soon done and the boys began to descend the +slope to the camping spot.</p> + +<p>The driver of the supply truck took the big +truck back to the city, leaving the smaller vehicle +alone there in the woods. Ted then made +his way to the camping grounds and heard with +pleasure the cries of delight as the boys looked +over the spot.</p> + +<p>“It surely is a dandy,” Buck told him. +“Well, I suppose we had better step to it and +get the tents up.”</p> + +<p>To this work they fell with a will and before +long four big brown tents had been pegged down +tightly. They were on a slight slope facing the +creek, with the springs off to one side and back<span class="pagenum" id="Page_55">[Pg 55]</span> +of them. By the time the canvas shelters were +up it was growing dusk and Buck and a squad +made haste to gather a big load of wood for +night. Others, under Ted’s leadership, built a +fine, substantial fireplace. By the time that this +was done the darkness had settled over them +like a blanket, and the new fires tossed a yellow +and flickering light to the sky.</p> + +<p>“This will be our first night out here,” Ted +reflected, as he looked around him. “Wonder +what it will be like?”</p> + + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> + +<div class="chapter"> +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_56">[Pg 56]</span></p> + +<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_VI">CHAPTER VI<br> +<span class="fs70">A PROWLER IN THE NIGHT</span></h2> +</div> + +<p>An event for which the boys had long been +waiting now came, after some confusion, to +pass. Several requests had been made for +something to eat but Ted turned a deaf ear to +it until the camp had been put in shape. The +noon meal had been a sandwich affair and now +the hungry stomachs were demanding something +solid. Ted gave orders for the meal.</p> + +<p>He and Buck took care of the cooking for +that one meal and they had a big job on their +hands. The two fires were used to cook beans +and soup and warm up coffee and before long +the fragrant smell of the food floated through +the woods around them. Impatiently the boys +awaited their meal.</p> + +<p>“Seems like I never was so hungry before!” +sighed Drummer, gazing at the big pot of cooking +beans with wistful eyes.</p> + +<p>“You drummed up a good appetite this afternoon,<span class="pagenum" id="Page_57">[Pg 57]</span> +didn’t you?” someone asked, and the +stout boy nodded.</p> + +<p>They used a flat stump to cut the bread on +and for a general table, finding that its location +to the fires made it a handy natural object. +Buck organized a number of the boys to +go and bring pails of water so that they could +be put on the fire as soon as the food was off, +to heat for dish water.</p> + +<p>“Do we have to wash dishes here?” was an +innocent inquiry.</p> + +<p>“Well, I want mine washed,” grinned Buck. +“If you want to eat from yours without washing, +why, go right ahead!”</p> + +<p>“Who is going to wash them, Mr. Dalton?” +a boy asked.</p> + +<p>“We’ll have a volunteer gang tonight,” responded +Buck, seeing to it that each boy had +a pail. “After that, we’ll have regular squads +to do the work. Go to it, boys.”</p> + +<p>Ted had found that the supply truck was +well filled and figuring even recklessly he was +of the opinion that they would not soon have to +renew their main supplies, though things such +as butter and eggs and milk would have to be +taken care of from day to day. Much care and +thought had been taken by the leaders of the<span class="pagenum" id="Page_58">[Pg 58]</span> +Boys’ Club in the selection of the goods, and +Ted was pleased.</p> + +<p>At length the supper was cooked, the beans +lifted from the fire and the coffee pushed back +to keep warm. “Come and get it!” called +Buck, and they obeyed loyally and enthusiastically. +Forming in a line they pushed their cups +and plates toward Buck and Ted and for some +minutes the two leaders were busy dishing and +pouring. Within the circle of the fires the boys +sat around, most of them silent as they applied +themselves to the subject at hand.</p> + +<p>“Golly, nothing ever seemed so good at +home!” declared Drummer, munching contentedly.</p> + +<p>“I don’t think so much of beans,” struck in +Ralph Plum. “I wouldn’t eat ’em home!”</p> + +<p>“You aren’t home,” was Drummer’s retort. +“What do you eat them here for?”</p> + +<p>“There isn’t anything else, is there?” retorted +Plum.</p> + +<p>“I guess not,” replied Drummer. “Any time +you don’t want your beans you just let me know, +Ralph.”</p> + +<p>The little fellow, Tom Clayton, sat close beside +Ted as they ate and Ted smiled down into<span class="pagenum" id="Page_59">[Pg 59]</span> +his serious face. “How are you enjoying it, +Tom?”</p> + +<p>“Great!” was the answer. “I’m glad I could +come along, Mr. Thorn!”</p> + +<p>“So am I,” agreed Ted. “We’ll have a lot +of fun out of this camping trip. You won’t +get homesick, will you?”</p> + +<p>“No, I guess not,” was the slow answer. +“I’ve only been away from home once before +this, but I guess I won’t be homesick. Anyway, +if I do, I won’t let these fellows see it, because +they’ll kid me about it!”</p> + +<p>“That’s the spirit!” approved Buck.</p> + +<p>After the meal was over came the task which +was not welcomed any too cheerfully. A multitude +of greasy tin plates and cups lay piled up +near the creek and the pails of water were +ready. Ted asked for volunteers, and a few +of the boys helped the two leaders do the washing +and drying. Most of the boys were content +to lie around and chatter. When the camp work +was finished they all gathered around the fires +while Ted addressed them.</p> + +<p>“Now, fellows,” he began, when he had +claimed their attention. “Tonight is rather an +informal time and we’re just getting acquainted. +Tomorrow we’ll settle down to real business.<span class="pagenum" id="Page_60">[Pg 60]</span> +Up to now I don’t even know the names +of all of you, but I’ll get on to them pretty +quickly. In order to get the best results out of +our encampment we’ll have to have good discipline +and willing workers. For instance, we’ll +have to have a wood-gathering committee, a +fire committee, a cooking committee, a water +committee, and a dishwashing committee. Some +of these committees won’t be as popular as +others, I know, but we won’t be on the same +committees all of the time. Frequent changes +will give us all a chance to work at something +different. Buck and I will take our share of +the work along with the rest of you.”</p> + +<p>“That makes me think of something else. +Some of you are calling me Mr. Thorn and calling +Buck, Mr. Dalton. That’s very nice, but we +want to be all fellows here together and so we +are just plain Ted and Buck to you. We’ll all +work together and have a good time. Now +about the tents: we have four of them and that +means that there will be five in a tent. We have +plenty of room, and Buck will sleep in one of +the tents and I in another. For the other two +tents I’ll appoint a captain and he is to be in +complete charge of that tent. To him you will +make any complaint or suggestion and he can<span class="pagenum" id="Page_61">[Pg 61]</span> +take it up with me. We’ll want to go to bed +early at night so that we’ll get plenty of good +sleep. We’ll be up early in the mornings.”</p> + +<p>“Why didn’t we put the tents up in between +the trees?” a boy asked.</p> + +<p>“Because there will be such things while we +are here as thunder storms,” smiled Ted. “And +if we do have them we want to be out in the +open and not under a tree which might be struck +by lightning and fall over!”</p> + +<p>This was a thought which had not as yet +struck any of them and for a moment there was +complete silence. They were all young boys +and the woods experience was new to them. +Thunder storms had been witnessed by most of +them from a secure house or a comfortable bed +and the thought that they would now be almost +exposed to the elements was somewhat staggering. +They looked around and up into the blackness +of the crouching mountains.</p> + +<p>“Gee, it does get some dark up here, doesn’t +it?” inquired one boy, in an awe-struck voice.</p> + +<p>The circle of light from the fires was not a +large one and the blackness around them seemed +an immensity which held untold things mysteriously +unpleasant. Buck laughed to reassure +them.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_62">[Pg 62]</span></p> + +<p>“Yes, they don’t have any street lights up +here,” he said. “The animals like dark nights!”</p> + +<p>“Animals!” cried another boy. “Are there +any animals up here? Do they call the water +Bear Creek on purpose!”</p> + +<p>“I don’t know,” said Ted. “Some day we’ll +look up the animals and see if any of them live +around here.”</p> + +<p>The talk was resumed and under cover of it +Buck and Ted conferred. “You think I had better +sleep in another tent than the one you are +going to have?” Buck asked.</p> + +<p>“I think so,” nodded Ted. “You take the +one on that end and I’ll take the one at this end. +We’ll put the smaller fellows in the two middle +tents and that will reassure them a little +more.”</p> + +<p>“Do you think they are going to be scared?”</p> + +<p>“No, not when they get used to the camp, but +you see they didn’t have much in the way of +daylight today while here and the night seems +so black. Probably a lot of them won’t sleep +and it will seem an age before the sun comes up +tomorrow.” He glanced at his watch. “I guess +we had better turn in now.”</p> + +<p>The word to this effect was passed around +and the boys were not reluctant to turn in. Ted<span class="pagenum" id="Page_63">[Pg 63]</span> +told off Bob Gilmore as the captain of one tent +and Charlie Wells as leader of the other one.</p> + +<p>“Each one of you will undress by the light of +a single lantern which will be hung from the +pole of the tent,” he directed. “As soon as the +last man is in bed the captain of that tent will +personally put out the light. No loud talking +after you are in your beds, in fact, none at all +would be better, because you’ll keep somebody +else awake. Now go to it.”</p> + +<p>The fires burned low and the four tents glowed +with a subdued light as the boys all prepared +for bed. In the tent with Ted was little Tom +Clayton and three other fine young fellows and +they were speedily in their beds which they had +built from boughs and packed leaves. Ted had +purposely placed the bed of the small boy beside +his own. They were all in under their blankets +when he put out the light and crawled in +between his own.</p> + +<p>The talking in the other tents died down as +the lights were extinguished. That some of the +boys were restless was attested to by the rustling +turnings in their beds. One boy had gathered +his boughs with too much wood attached +to the smaller branches and they made him so +uneasy and uncomfortable that he was compelled<span class="pagenum" id="Page_64">[Pg 64]</span> +to throw most of it out and sleep closer to +the canvas covering that served as a tent floor. +Some deep breathing announced that a few boys +had fallen instantly asleep, tired out with the +events of the day.</p> + +<p>There was no talking on the part of the boys +in Ted’s tent, inspired probably by his presence +and the little boy at least did not remain awake +long. Ted’s eyes began to close and the last +sounds and impressions were somewhat dim. +The fire snapped once or twice, the wind blew +with a very faint rustle of leaves, and a katydid +started his endless fiddling, being joined by several +others who tried to out-fiddle him. Then +Ted went to sleep.</p> + +<p>He slept on for what seemed to be some hours +and then a light struck quickly and fleetingly +across his eyes. The flap of the tent was half +open and he could look out, but there was no +repetition of the incident. He was puzzled and +sat up.</p> + +<p>“Was that from the fires?” he wondered, +poking his head out of the tent and glancing towards +the two fireplaces.</p> + +<p>It was not. Both fires had gone out and not +a single spark glowed to show even where they +had been. But there was no question in his<span class="pagenum" id="Page_65">[Pg 65]</span> +mind as to whether there had been a light, for +the thing had been very definite. He stepped +out of the tent, unmindful of the cool, damp +earth under his bare feet, and stood there in his +pajamas, looking keenly around.</p> + +<p>A wandering beam of light came from around +the last tent, the tent in which Buck was sleeping, +and Ted frowned. “Now, who the dickens +can be prowling around with a lantern?” he +wondered, starting forward. “I’m going to +find out.”</p> + + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> + +<div class="chapter"> +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_66">[Pg 66]</span></p> + +<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_VII">CHAPTER VII<br> +<span class="fs70">WEIRD SOUNDS</span></h2> +</div> + +<p>The faint shaft of light vanished as Ted made +his way along the line of the silent tents and for +a moment he almost doubted that he had seen it. +His total glimpses had consisted of flashes and +nothing more, and the fact spurred him on with +greater curiosity. When he had first seen the +light he thought it might have been one of the +boys or even Buck prowling around, but the way +the gleams came and went he began to doubt +it seriously. Remembering the man whom he +had previously seen, he became cautious as he +stepped to the end of Buck’s tent and looked +around.</p> + +<p>He was not able to see a thing, for the darkness +was so dense that it presented to him only +a solid wall. His ears were listening keenly but +he heard nothing. He supposed he had better +look back of the tents, but this thought brought +a problem. There was no use in doing that unless +he took a lantern with him, and he might<span class="pagenum" id="Page_67">[Pg 67]</span> +alarm the boys if he did so. The question was +not an agreeable one.</p> + +<p>A low hiss reached his ears, a sound which +came from the tent. He thrust his head inside +the flap.</p> + +<p>“That you, Buck?”</p> + +<p>An answering whisper came back to him. +“Yes. What are you doing up?”</p> + +<p>“I’m just looking around, that is all. Can’t +you sleep?”</p> + +<p>“I was sleeping until you flashed your light +in here! What are you looking for?”</p> + +<p>“Come on outside a minute,” directed Ted, +still in the same low whisper. Buck made motions +which led his chum to think that he was +tossing aside his blanket and then he joined him +outside of the tent, grunting as his feet touched +the cool earth.</p> + +<p>“Gosh, this ground is cold! What in the +world are you—”</p> + +<p>“Buck, did you see a light before?”</p> + +<p>“Yes, when you passed by with the lantern.”</p> + +<p>“That’s just the point—I didn’t pass by with +any lantern! I was awakened by a flash in my +eyes and then as I looked out of the tent flap I +saw the light dodge down this way. Somebody<span class="pagenum" id="Page_68">[Pg 68]</span> +who doesn’t belong to the camp is prowling!”</p> + +<p>Buck was impressed at once. “But we don’t +know if everybody is in their tents,” he pointed +out.</p> + +<p>“They are all in my tent and I suppose they +are all in yours, but we don’t know about the +others. The worst part of it all is that we can’t +go snooping into the tents to see, because if we +wake the youngsters up we’ll throw a scare +into them. I guess we’ll have to do all the investigating +ourselves.”</p> + +<p>“I’ve got a flashlight inside and I think I can +locate it,” whispered Buck. “Hope I don’t +wake anybody up!”</p> + +<p>He felt his way into the blackness of the tent +and located the flashlight, appearing with it immediately +afterward. “All right, let’s go,” he +whispered. “I don’t like this barefoot business +though.”</p> + +<p>“Best we can do. Keep your light shaded +away from the tents.”</p> + +<p>Buck carefully switched the light on, keeping +the glare of it away from the tent, playing the +beam on the undergrowth in back of the tent. +Nothing out of the ordinary was disclosed to +their view and they walked with tense muscles +around in the back of the shelters. Here the<span class="pagenum" id="Page_69">[Pg 69]</span> +light was played around the bushes and trees +but everything around the camp was normal. +In silence they moved away and even went as +far as the springs, but their trip was in vain +and their only reward wet and cold feet.</p> + +<p>“Nothing doing,” shrugged Buck, turning off +the light.</p> + +<p>“I’m glad that you saw the light, though,” +said Ted. “I would have begun to think that +I was seeing things. Well, I don’t know what +we had better do.”</p> + +<p>“The only thing that we can do is to go to +bed and sleep as lightly as possible,” returned +Buck. “We are on the ends and if anyone +comes into the camp we should hear ’em. Funny +thing, though, we didn’t hear anything out of +that prowler after he put his light out. Confound +it, looks like somebody was trying to +make this a haunted camp!”</p> + +<p>“Well, we won’t let the boys know anything +about it. Suppose we get to bed and keep our +ears open as much as we can.”</p> + +<p>They parted, each to return to his own tent, +and in his Ted carefully eased himself into his +bed listening intently. There were no sounds +abroad, however, and for a long time he managed<span class="pagenum" id="Page_70">[Pg 70]</span> +to keep awake but at last the effort was +too much for him and he went to sleep.</p> + +<p>Morning came without incident and early the +whole camp was astir. The day was a fine and +clear one, a little warm but not too much so. +Some of the hardier souls went for their initial +swim in Bear Creek but to most of the boys the +black waters looked too cool. Ted and Buck +were among those who went in, and Ted, after +probing for depth with a pole, was perfectly +satisfied that it was deep enough at one point +to dive in. He led the way in a splendid dive.</p> + +<p>The water struck a sharp shock through him +and by its very coldness he knew that springs +surely fed the brook somewhere. But he showed +no sign of his shock when he bobbed to the +top, shaking his head and clearing his eyes.</p> + +<p>“How is it?” Buck cried, from his post on +the bank.</p> + +<p>“Fine!” replied Ted. “Warm as toast!”</p> + +<p>“Doesn’t feel like any toast I ever had to my +feet,” Buck replied, poising for his dive. “But +I guess it is all right when you get in. Here +goes!”</p> + +<p>He flashed downward in a fine dive and when +he appeared on the surface of the water he +looked at the grinning Ted. “Wow! what nice<span class="pagenum" id="Page_71">[Pg 71]</span> +cold water!” he shouted. “This may be Bear +Creek, and I’ll say it is a bear! Warm as toast, +eh?”</p> + +<p>After the invigorating swim they dressed and +the task of preparing breakfast was undertaken. +The effects of the camping trip were beginning +to tell, for all the boys had developed +hearty appetites and looked in a fair way to +sinking the provision pile alarmingly.</p> + +<p>Ted and Buck managed to take a quick look +back of the tents but there was no trace of the +night visitor. They were inclined to think that +it was merely some neighboring farmer, though +they confessed that his zeal must have been +great to have brought him in curiosity to that +spot at such a time.</p> + +<p>“Anyhow, nobody knows about it,” Buck +said, but he was mistaken. Plum spoke up as +they were eating breakfast.</p> + +<p>“Who was going around with a lantern last +night?” he asked. There was a general stir of +interest.</p> + +<p>“Who says anybody was?” Buck asked, +coolly.</p> + +<p>“I saw it,” was the confident assertion. “I +slept in your tent and you went out and talked +to Ted, only I couldn’t make out what you said.<span class="pagenum" id="Page_72">[Pg 72]</span> +Then you two went for a walk around the +tents.”</p> + +<p>“You didn’t do much sleeping, did you?” inquired +Buck.</p> + +<p>“No. But how about the light? Was somebody +walking around the camp last night?”</p> + +<p>Ted and Buck exchanged glances. They were +annoyed that Plum had brought up the subject +but they saw that he was not to be denied. Ted +took it upon himself to answer.</p> + +<p>“We think somebody did pass the tents,” he +was forced to admit. “Perhaps it was some +farmer who took a shortcut or something, because +we didn’t find him. That is all there was +to it.”</p> + +<p>But Plum had ideas of his own. “But you +two were worried, weren’t you?” he pressed. +“I heard you talking and then Buck got his +flashlight and you went exploring. How about +it?”</p> + +<p>“Do we look very much worried over anything?” +Buck grinned, secretly angry with the +insistent one.</p> + +<p>“You were last night,” said Plum doggedly.</p> + +<p>They turned the conversation and the meal +was soon over, but the boys talked of the unknown +prowler more than Ted and Buck cared<span class="pagenum" id="Page_73">[Pg 73]</span> +to have them talk. There was one good remedy +for their fears, however, and that was tried. +Hard work soon made them forget about the +previous night. Squads were told off and the +labors of the day were begun. A group spent +a few hours cutting and piling fire wood and +others washed the dishes. One group under +Buck went to work in deadly earnest on the +tents. The bedding was all strung on lines to +air and the boys were taught that cleanliness is +as important in camping life as in private life. +The beds were all more carefully remade and +then ditches were dug around the tents so that +the water from a rain storm would run away +from the tents and not come in over the canvas +floors. All these tasks took up most of the day +and late in the afternoon all of them went swimming.</p> + +<p>The two leaders found that few of the boys +could swim well and some could not swim a +stroke, so they organized a swimming class at +once and the next two hours were spent in giving +instructions. Some of the boys were timid +and clearly afraid of the cold water, but Buck +and Ted patiently taught them, stressing the +value of a thorough knowledge of swimming. +The small boy was very much afraid and<span class="pagenum" id="Page_74">[Pg 74]</span> +shivered pronouncedly, but he kept his lips +tightly closed and made a valiant effort at it.</p> + +<p>In this way another day wore to its close and +while they were eating supper the darkness +folded down over the camp. But by this time +they had become used to the “feel” of camp life +and the location became somewhat familiar to +them. Now that the hardest part of pitching +the camp was attended to they began to plan +more than one tramp through the mountains +which encircled them.</p> + +<p>When the dishes were piled away they sat +around the fire, enchanted by the red magic +which emanates from glowing embers and the +darkness closed in more tightly. There were no +stars on this night and there was even a little +oppressiveness in the air, as though it was +charged with something not altogether pleasant. +Not wishing the boys to dwell on subjects +which would worry them Ted and Buck kept the +conversation going rapidly and they talked of +football and baseball, camping and canoeing.</p> + +<p>But Plum was the trouble maker. His mind +reverted to things which the leaders wished to +avoid. His eyes roved around the dark camp.</p> + +<p>“This camp could easily be haunted,” he remarked,<span class="pagenum" id="Page_75">[Pg 75]</span> +patting an instant stop to the cheerful +conversation.</p> + +<p>“Who believes in ghosts anyway?” snorted +Drummer.</p> + +<p>“Nobody with any sense,” retorted Plum. +“But just think of this place in the old days, +when the Black Riders were meeting here to +plan out raids on the British. There must be +something scary about a place like this.”</p> + +<p>“Never mind any such talk about foolish +things, Plum,” called Ted, sharply. “This is +a fine place and everything around is as it +should be.”</p> + +<p>Hard on the heels of this statement there +came a sound which made the faces of the boys, +old and young, blanch with fear. A wild, dismal +howl rose on the air, seemingly overhead, +and echoed in a sobbing wail as it was tossed to +the mountains. The silence which succeeded +was almost as bad as the shuddering shriek.</p> + + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> + +<div class="chapter"> +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_76">[Pg 76]</span></p> + +<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_VIII">CHAPTER VIII<br> +<span class="fs70">A GRIM FIND EXPLODED</span></h2> +</div> + +<p>The silence lasted for what seemed to be a +long moment and then Buck and Ted sprang to +their feet. A dozen tongues were unloosed and +an exciting chorus went up, in which uneasiness +prevailed.</p> + +<p>“What in the world could that have been?” +Buck asked Ted, as they peered into the darkness +beside the camp, in the direction from +which the sound had seemed to come.</p> + +<p>“You’ve got me,” was the perplexed answer. +“I never heard anything like it before in my +life. Let’s get the lanterns and go look +around.”</p> + +<p>They went to the tents to get the lanterns and +Bob and Charlie got out the ones in the middle +tents and lighted them. The boys were now +standing in a huddle around the fireplace and +talking.</p> + +<p>“I knew that this was no place for us,” Plum +was telling the other boys. “I always heard that<span class="pagenum" id="Page_77">[Pg 77]</span> +this camp was haunted. I guess I’m going +home.”</p> + +<p>“Maybe we had all better go home,” suggested +another boy.</p> + +<p>“Yes, go home and let the whole town have +the laugh on us!” snorted Drummer.</p> + +<p>The four lanterns were lighted but before +they sallied forth another sound reached their +ears. It was that of an object which had apparently +just fallen, for they could hear it strike +the rocks and break. This came from the same +direction as the weird call had come and for an +instant they simply stood and looked in the direction, +waiting for some further sign. But the +silence was unbroken.</p> + +<p>“Well, let’s go,” said Ted, starting off +towards the woods with his lantern. “We’ll +see if we can learn anything.”</p> + +<p>He and Buck took the lead, the two smaller +boys bringing up cautiously in the rear, fearful +but curious. The two older boys plunged +straight into the bushes that fringed the camp +and mounted the slopes of the mountain, looking +before them as they went, on the alert for +something unusual. There was no further sound +and they proceeded to the spot from which the +sound had come, to find it a high and bare rock<span class="pagenum" id="Page_78">[Pg 78]</span> +which commanded an excellent view of their +camp.</p> + +<p>“Somebody stood here and looked down at +the camp,” said Buck, with conviction.</p> + +<p>“You’re right about that,” nodded Ted. “I +think they must have dropped something at the +bottom of this big rock. Let’s go and see.”</p> + +<p>“Here come the rest of the boys,” said Bob.</p> + +<p>The others had become tired of standing +around the fires and now, as their courage began +to return, they climbed the short slope and +joined the boys with the lanterns. The lightbearers +had made their way down to the base +of the rock and there they flashed the light +around, resulting in an instant discovery. On +a smaller rock lay some fragments of a sea +shell, now broken into several sections.</p> + +<p>“Just an old sea shell!” cried Drummer. +“What good is that?”</p> + +<p>“Do you know what it is?” Ted asked Buck.</p> + +<p>“Can’t say that I do,” he shook his head.</p> + +<p>Ted picked up the fragments, fitting them together +until the large shell was nearly whole. +“This is a conch shell,” he said. “It is often +used as a horn, and when it was blown it makes +plenty of noise, as we just found out! This is +the horn which was blown to scare us.”</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_79">[Pg 79]</span></p> + +<p>“That’s a seashore shell, isn’t it?” Plum +asked.</p> + +<p>“Yes, a large marine shell, a univalve shell, +and it can be blown into and makes quite a good +horn. Somebody from up on top of that rock +saw us down in the camp and just tooted that +shell to scare us.”</p> + +<p>“Didn’t they use those shells a lot in the Revolutionary +war, to call people?” a boy asked.</p> + +<p>“Yes, and this may be one as old as that. +Some farmer around here must have owned it.”</p> + +<p>“I’ll bet anything that those Black Riders +had shells like that and maybe all that stuff +about the camp being haunted is true,” argued +Plum. “It sort of seems as though a spirit of +one of those fellows is trying to warn us away!”</p> + +<p>“Do you believe in ghosts, Plum?” Ted asked, +looking straight into the eyes of the big boy.</p> + +<p>“Well, no, but——”</p> + +<p>“If this was a ghost he was a pretty careless +one wasn’t he? Couldn’t even hold on to his +conch. I guess we don’t have to worry about +anyone as careless as that.”</p> + +<p>Plum muttered but no further attention was +paid to him. They hunted all around the rock +and even went a short distance into the surrounding +woods, but not a single clue was to be<span class="pagenum" id="Page_80">[Pg 80]</span> +found. The woods were dark and silent, breathing +an air of mystery.</p> + +<p>Ted ordered them back to the camp and to +bed. There was a bit of protest at this, but Ted +put it down at once.</p> + +<p>“There is no need to sit up and talk about it +all,” he told them. “It is already past the hour +for retiring anyway, and you need sleep, because +some of you didn’t sleep any too well last +night. I guess everything is over and you’ll +have nothing to worry about.”</p> + +<p>“You guess!” grumbled Plum, expressively.</p> + +<p>Ted looked at him sternly. “We’re not going +to sit up like a bunch of frightened old maids +looking for something to happen,” he said. “Into +your tents, now!”</p> + +<p>There was much chattering as the boys reluctantly +obeyed this order. Buck and Ted met +for a final word.</p> + +<p>“Looks as though somebody didn’t want us +around here,” Buck said.</p> + +<p>“I’m afraid that is the whole point,” nodded +Ted, speaking in a low tone. “But we have +every right to be here and no one is going to +make us go. The bad part about this whole +thing is that we can’t ask any of these little fellows +to stand guard at night. They’d fall<span class="pagenum" id="Page_81">[Pg 81]</span> +asleep and be scared to death in the bargain. +Neither can you and I do all the watching, so +we’ll have to just trust to luck and be on the +lookout.”</p> + +<p>But the balance of that night passed quietly +away. The two leaders tried to sleep lightly +and some of the boys slept fitfully and fearfully, +but there was nothing to disturb them and +when the morning came the events of the night +did not seem so black as they had seemed at the +time.</p> + +<p>After camp chores had been completed the +two older boys and a small squad set out to +make a thorough search of the immediate +neighborhood, but nothing was found although +their search was an exhausting one. It was +finally given up as a bad job and the afternoon +was devoted to swimming. That evening and +night were undisturbed and for the first time +since they had struck camp everyone got a good +and satisfactory sleep.</p> + +<p>On the following day they took a hike, leaving +a reserve force back at the camp under Buck. +Between themselves they had agreed that one of +them was to stay in camp if the other was out +of it, and Ted felt safer knowing that the camp +was well protected. They made a long trip of<span class="pagenum" id="Page_82">[Pg 82]</span> +it, climbing the mountains, finding a deep valley +and a cave and when it was growing late in the +afternoon they came back, tired but satisfied. +Ted had purposely led them around by the old +house where he had first watched the man with +the lantern and as soon as the boys saw the +place they wanted to explore it.</p> + +<p>Nothing suited Ted better and they roamed +all over the house, finding it of great interest. +It had evidently been furnished at the time of +its abandonment, for there were beds and bureaus, +tables, chairs and a sofa in the house, all +the worse for the wear and tear of the elements +which had found unobstructed entrance through +doors and broken windows. It was not a farm +house, for there was no barn near it and it appeared +to be more on the style of a private +house. On one corner, just above the front +porch, there was an octagon tower or cupola +and they entered that from the front bedroom, +obtaining from its glassless windows a fairly +good view off across the mountains. Whoever +had lived in the place had left it fully furnished +and the storms of a few years and one or two +visiting and curious persons, possibly small +boys, had made a wreck out of the glassware +and the furniture.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_83">[Pg 83]</span></p> + +<p>Ted looked around carefully to see if there +was any clue as to why the man with the lantern +should have lowered the thing into the chimney +but he could learn nothing definite. There were +several open fireplaces in the house and he could +see no reason why anyone should want to lower +a lantern to them. When they finally left the +place he had obtained a working knowledge of +it but was none the wiser as to the intentions of +the mountain prowler.</p> + +<p>The others were preparing the fires for supper +when they returned and everyone helped in +the process of getting the evening meal. Buck +and the camp squad planned a hike on the following +day while the others took their turn at +guarding the camp.</p> + +<p>Once more the night passed without incident +and they were beginning to feel reassured. If +someone did not desire their presence they had +undoubtedly tired of the attempt to oust them +and they were now able to enjoy the camping +trip unmolested.</p> + +<p>Buck’s squad went for their hike on the following +day and came in late in the afternoon. +They had taken an entirely different direction +and they had but one incident of importance to +report. In a sheltered valley about a mile away<span class="pagenum" id="Page_84">[Pg 84]</span> +they had come upon something that excited +their curiosity.</p> + +<p>“It was a good sized log cabin,” Drummer +related. “There was a high barbed wire fence +around it! Can you imagine a log cabin way out +in the woods with a barbed wire fence around +it?”</p> + +<p>“Anyone living in it?” Ted asked.</p> + +<p>“Yes, I guess so, at least it looked as though +somebody was. A couple of windows were open +and a curtain was flapping out in the breeze. +The gate on the fence was padlocked. Whoever +lives way out there doesn’t want any company.”</p> + +<p>“It surely is a queer looking place,” Buck +said, thoughtfully “Right in the midst of wild +country, too. There is a little cabin that looks +like a stable in the back of the place, and a +steamer chair was out in front. We went +up and looked in but nobody came out, though +if there was anybody at home they must have +heard us talking.”</p> + +<p>“Funny that anyone should want to put up +a fence like that out in the mountains,” Ted +thought. “And with curtains and a steamer +chair in evidence, it doesn’t look as though it +was some wild mountaineer. I’d like to know +who it is.”</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_85">[Pg 85]</span></p> + +<p>“Maybe someone around here knows about +the place,” suggested Buck. “When we go for +eggs and butter we’ll find out.”</p> + +<p>“Yes, and we will have to go tomorrow,” nodded +Ted. “By the way, we must build a good +ice box. I think we can sink one in the mud +down near the creek.”</p> + +<p>They were on their way to the tents that night +to turn in, when an odd sound reached their +ears, causing them to look toward the back section +of their camp beyond the tents. The wind +had been blowing in gusts for the last hour and +there had been a distinct rustling in the trees +and bushes. But this was something different, +a rattle and a click, and it came from a section +which they had never bothered to investigate +with any degree of interest, though it is probable +that one or two of them had been to the +spot. They stood outside the tent and listened, +and as a gust of wind sighed through the trees +the clicking came again.</p> + +<p>“What can that be?” Buck asked.</p> + +<p>Ted reached into the tent and took down the +lantern. “We’ll soon see,” he said. But one +of the younger boys was ahead of him. Bob +Gilmore, the captain of the tent next to Buck’s, +took the lantern from his tent and taking a short<span class="pagenum" id="Page_86">[Pg 86]</span> +cut between the tents, plunged into the undergrowth. +The light winked at them for a moment +and then was gone.</p> + +<p>The others followed Buck, Ted, and Charlie +Wells in a body as they hurried on after Bob. +Then, right in front of them they heard a smothered +gasp and a crashing. Bob burst through +the bushes, lantern in shaking hand, his face +white as a sheet.</p> + +<p>“A skeleton!” he gasped, staring at them +with wide eyes.</p> + +<p>“A what?” cried Buck, sharply.</p> + +<p>“A skeleton,” the boy repeated. “Hanging +on a tree and the bones are clicking together. +Listen!”</p> + +<p>The wind sighed, and the clicking noise reached +them, blanching the faces of the boys. Ted +started forward, and in an open space he came +upon a sight calculated to unnerve anyone not +gifted with feelings of iron. A skeleton hung +from an old rope, swaying in the breeze, the +skull lying on the ground upside down. In the +dark glade, lighted only by their lanterns, the +sight was indeed a creepy and chilling one.</p> + +<p>The other boys came crowding in, huddling in +a group, scared but fascinated, while Ted picked +up the skull and examined it. Then he moved<span class="pagenum" id="Page_87">[Pg 87]</span> +all around the hanging bones, the lantern flashes +stabbing through the ribs. When he turned to +the others they were amazed to find that he was +smiling broadly.</p> + +<p>“What is the joke?” Buck asked, blankly.</p> + +<p>“Why, this poor skeleton must feel pretty +much out of place here in the woods,” was +Ted’s reply. “He belongs in, and must recently +have come from a doctor’s office!”</p> + + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> + +<div class="chapter"> +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_88">[Pg 88]</span></p> + +<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_IX">CHAPTER IX<br> +<span class="fs70">TED LAYS DOWN THE LAW</span></h2> +</div> + +<p>“How do you know that?” Buck asked, as +they all crowded closer to look at the dangling +skeleton.</p> + +<p>“Because the person who hung it here forgot +to notice that there is a name on the lower left +rib,” replied Ted, pointing. “There is some +white chalk over it, but if you look closely you’ll +see the name of Doctor Hemple. I don’t know +anything about skeletons, but this one has evidently +been in this state a long time.”</p> + +<p>“I’ll be hanged!” cried Buck. “What do you +suppose anyone did that for?”</p> + +<p>“I imagine that it is all part of what has been +going on right along,” Ted answered. “Somebody +thought this would scare us. But I guess +they thought we haven’t any eyes or brains! +Look at the rope which is holding it up! It is +an old one, and somewhat weather-beaten, but +not as much as it would be if this was the skeleton +of a man who had either hung himself or<span class="pagenum" id="Page_89">[Pg 89]</span> +been hanged in the woods. I wouldn’t be a bit +surprised if whoever hung it here wanted us to +believe that it was the skeleton of some British +soldier!”</p> + +<p>“Looks like somebody is trying to impress +us with the history of the place,” smiled Buck.</p> + +<p>“Looks more to me as though someone was +trying to impress us with the fact that we aren’t +welcome around here,” grumbled Ted. “But +this act won’t get them anywhere. If that rope +was supposed to have hung there all these years +while the skin dropped off and all trace of the +clothing disappeared, all I have to say is that +it is a mighty fine piece of rope, that is all!”</p> + +<p>“It certainly was well thought out otherwise,” +remarked Buck, as the boys fell to talking +it over among themselves. “The head lying +on the ground half upside down looks for all +the world as though the skull fell off and has +never been touched.”</p> + +<p>“That skull has been touched, though,” said +Ted, examining it. “It has been cut with some +surgical tool. Well, that was just a lot of time +wasted on the part of someone.”</p> + +<p>“But it is a real skeleton, isn’t it, Ted?” +Drummer asked.</p> + +<p>“Oh, yes, it is real enough, all right, but it<span class="pagenum" id="Page_90">[Pg 90]</span> +belongs in some doctor’s study and has been +there for a long time. I never heard of a Doctor +Hemple, but we’ll try and find out if there is +anyone around here with that name.”</p> + +<p>“What are you going to do with it?” Buck +asked. Ted considered, but shrugged his +shoulders.</p> + +<p>“Blessed if I know. We don’t want it, and +at the same time we don’t want it hanging +around here to click with the wind. Let’s put +it up in the hollow above and leave it there. +We can look at it from time to time and see +if anyone has taken it.”</p> + +<p>The boys shrank from touching the thing so +Ted and Buck cut the rope down, picked up +the skull, and carried the skeleton to a small +hollow well above the camp, where they left +it and returned to the others.</p> + +<p>“That skeleton was rather a clever fellow,” +laughed Ted. “We found that his joints had +all been wired together with a thin wire, which +means that after his skin dropped off he got +down off of his rope, wired himself together, +and then got back on his rope, if we’re supposed +to think it is a genuine affair. I think +that whoever hung it there must have hoped +that we’d be so scared that we would flee from<span class="pagenum" id="Page_91">[Pg 91]</span> +the camp in terror, without stopping to investigate +thoroughly.”</p> + +<p>“Say, this couldn’t be a trick to draw us out +of camp, could it?” Buck asked, suddenly.</p> + +<p>There was a moment of silence as they +thought it over. Ted seized his lantern.</p> + +<p>“I hope not, but it might be,” he cried, bolting +through the bushes.</p> + +<p>But there was nothing to worry about on that +score. The camp was perfectly peaceful and +if anyone had visited it in their absence there +was no trace of the fact. The fires were dying +and everything was in order.</p> + +<p>“All right, let’s get to bed, and we’ll talk +about it all in the morning,” Ted called, cheerfully.</p> + +<p>Most of the boys obeyed at once, but four or +five boys clustered around Ralph Plum, who +was talking to them earnestly. Their heads +were close together and he seemed to be doing +all the talking. Ted walked over to them and +they looked at him somewhat nervously.</p> + +<p>“Well, what is on your minds?” Ted asked.</p> + +<p>The other boys looked at Plum and he cleared +his throat defiantly. As he stood before Ted +he was fully as big as the leader, with a bigger +shoulder spread. Obviously he was out of place<span class="pagenum" id="Page_92">[Pg 92]</span> +with the smaller boys and should have been +one of the leaders, a fact that had crossed his +mind more than once as he secretly chaffed +under Ted’s and Buck’s orders. He was well +aware that his relative had given a big sum of +money to the organization, and to rank simply +as a member of the club and not even as a captain +of a tent had irritated him from the start. +Deep in his heart there was a fear of the camp +they were in, and although he would not go so +far as to say that he feared the presence of anything +supernatural near the place, he did feel +a bad atmosphere and it made him perpetually +uneasy.</p> + +<p>“We fellows don’t like this place for a camping +place,” he began. “We want to go somewhere +else.”</p> + +<p>“Want to run away, eh!” asked Ted, as the +other boys, crowding into the open, watched.</p> + +<p>“We aren’t running away,” returned Plum, +doggedly. “But this place isn’t healthy for +anybody. Already we have received several +warnings that we aren’t wanted around here, +and I don’t see why we can’t get wise to ourselves +and get out before something happens. +Up to the present time nothing has happened, +but how do you know that something won’t<span class="pagenum" id="Page_93">[Pg 93]</span> +happen that we’ll be pretty sorry for? We +don’t have to go home, but there are places +nearer home where we can camp, and I can +show you a couple of good ones, almost as good +as this one.”</p> + +<p>“And then, at the end of the month, we go +back to the trustees and tell them that we were +afraid to use their own camping site and had +to go somewhere else? Let everybody in the +town know that we were scared to death? Is +that what you mean?” asked Ted.</p> + +<p>“No, because if we all agree to keep still +we won’t have to let the story out. We could +even go back and make out that we did stay +in this camp all summer, and who would be +the wiser?”</p> + +<p>Ted stood with his hands on his hips, a frown +of contempt on his face. He would have thought +differently about it if it had been one of the +younger boys who had made the request, but +Plum was a big boy and his counsel was dangerous +for the little fellows. Ted longed to take +the big boy and shake him until his teeth +rattled, but he did not feel justified in going +that far. To his mind the question just now +was one of discipline in the matter of going to<span class="pagenum" id="Page_94">[Pg 94]</span> +bed, and he felt that he must make good on +that first.</p> + +<p>“We’ll discuss all that in the morning, right +after breakfast,” he said. “Right now I have +ordered you to bed, and you are going! I’m +the boss of this camp and you fellows are going +to obey me, at least for the present. As to the +idea that I would ever sneak off somewhere +else, and then go back and tell Mr. Calvert that +we had spent the month here, that is so silly +that I won’t even discuss it. You’ve heard what +I said about bed. March to your tents!”</p> + +<p>There was one long moment of indecision. +Those back of Ted near the tents watched with +breathless interest to see what the outcome +would be and Buck was prepared to back his +chum up. The smaller boys with Plum hesitated +and looked at him. That Plum was angry +there was no doubt, but he did not know clearly +what to do. He measured Ted up in a glance +and he felt for a moment that he was physically +able to handle him, but he was not so sure +when he looked into Ted’s clear, direct eyes. +They didn’t look uncertain, and he lowered his +own gaze.</p> + +<p>“You’ll talk it over in the morning?” he +asked, somewhat lamely.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_95">[Pg 95]</span></p> + +<p>“Yes, I will. But not another word tonight.”</p> + +<p>Plum walked slowly to his tent and the other +boys followed to their own. Ted looked to see +if little Tommy Clayton was with them, but +the small boy was over in front of his own tent, +looking on. As Ted walked back to his tent +they all scattered and were soon undressing, +the lights going out one by one.</p> + +<p>The night was quiet and uneventful.</p> + +<p>In the morning something radically different +claimed their attention. One of the boys, looking +out of the tent, cried in an excited voice +that there was a bear in the camp. Every head +was thrust out of the flaps, and sure enough, +there near the dead embers of their fire, was a +small brown bear, sniffing around a spot where +some beans had been dropped. The cries of +the boys made him lift his head, and he stared +at them with his small, piggy eyes.</p> + +<p>“Oh, will he attack us?” a boy asked, in +Buck’s tent.</p> + +<p>“No, unless he is pretty desperate for food, +and I don’t see why he should be at this time +of the year,” answered Buck. “I think I can +get rid of him.”</p> + +<p>Buck reached into his duffle bag. Drummer +stared in fascination at the undecided bear.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_96">[Pg 96]</span></p> + +<p>“Gosh, suppose he ate one of us!” he said.</p> + +<p>Charlie Wells grinned at him from another +tent. “I think he came down here just on purpose +to get you, Drummer!” he said. “He +probably heard that you eat more than anybody +else, and he is here to make a meal of you. If +we had to throw somebody out to him to keep +him quiet, we’d throw Drummer, wouldn’t we, +fellows?”</p> + +<p>“Sure!” came in a chorus.</p> + +<p>“I don’t doubt it!” returned the fat boy.</p> + +<p>Buck appeared in the doorway of the tent +with something in his hand. He drew back his +arm and launched the tennis ball at the bear. +The white ball went straight and true, hitting +the bear on the nose with a whack.</p> + +<p>The little bear gave a grunt of surprise, +shook his head in evident perplexity, and turned +and ran at a lumbering trot away from the +camp, pursued by the laughter of the boys. He +disappeared at top speed in the undergrowth +and avoided the camp from that day onward.</p> + +<p>Breakfast was eaten cheerfully, the bear incident +having put them all in good spirits, and +afterward Ted addressed them as they sat +around the fire. He talked without heat, but +earnestly.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_97">[Pg 97]</span></p> + +<p>“I want to lay down the law to you fellows, +not in any nasty way, but so that there will be +no mistake,” he said. “From the events which +have gone on around here we know that someone +doesn’t want us in this camp, because if +anyone will go to the trouble to blow a conch +shell and hang up a skeleton, they aren’t fooling. +But we’re not going to run away like a +bunch of babies. I’m responsible for this camp, +and if I went back and said that I couldn’t +hold you here, I would be falling down on a +trust which was committed to me. We’ll show +this prowler, whoever he is, that we have more +right to be here than he has and that we won’t +pack up and move!”</p> + +<p>He glanced briefly at Plum. “If any of you +boys have any complaint to make, make it to +Buck or to me. We are the leaders and we’ll +try and do what is right. We’re not going to +run away from this camp just because someone +wants us to, and we’re not going home one +single day before Labor Day! So get that +straight, and also the fact that all orders must +be obeyed without argument. If there are +several bosses around any organization things +jar, and while I don’t want to appear to be +overbearing, Buck and I must have your full<span class="pagenum" id="Page_98">[Pg 98]</span> +support. We’ll be fair with you, I promise you +that. That will be all for now.”</p> + +<p>The group broke up, scattering to the affairs +at hand. Tom Clayton spoke to the morose +Plum.</p> + +<p>“Ted is quite a leader, isn’t he?”</p> + +<p>“He’s too much leader!” was the growled +response.</p> + + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> + +<div class="chapter"> +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_99">[Pg 99]</span></p> + +<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_X">CHAPTER X<br> +<span class="fs70">MOUNTAIN CHASE</span></h2> +</div> + +<p>For a few days after Ted’s talk there was +no further trouble of any kind in the camp. +Neither was there any further annoyance upon +the part of the person or persons who had kept +them in an unsettled state of mind for so long. +After a time the boys began to feel that the +person had tired of the contest and had gone +away, for the time being, at least.</p> + +<p>After the third day of peace one of the boys +discovered that the skeleton had vanished from +the hollow back of the camp. They had watched +it each day to discover if possible the owner +of the weird thing, but apparently during one +of the slack periods of watching the owner had +come and taken it. This was a relief in one +sense and not in another.</p> + +<p>“We’ve had somebody hiding in the bushes +and watching that thing almost every day,” +Ted said to Buck, as they sat apart one day. +“But on the very first day that we didn’t have<span class="pagenum" id="Page_100">[Pg 100]</span> +somebody, away it went. That looks as though +whoever planted the thing knows our movements +pretty well.”</p> + +<p>“He probably knows more about us than +we’d like him to,” was Buck’s comment.</p> + +<p>They had been to a farm house nearby to +purchase butter, eggs and milk and Ted had +asked concerning a Doctor Hemple. No one +knew the man or had ever heard of him.</p> + +<p>“Our local doctor’s name is Ord,” said the +farmer. “Where’d you hear of this Hemple?”</p> + +<p>“Oh, we both know him by name and just +wondered if he came from up this way,” Ted +passed it off.</p> + +<p>Buck told of the cabin with the barbed wire +and the farmer knew something, though not +much about it. The owner was a mystery to +everyone, he said.</p> + +<p>“He built that cabin nigh onto four years +ago, and he’s a mighty unfriendly critter,” +related the farmer, as he tied up their packages. +“I come through there once from huntin’ and +I had my dog with me. Dog run up to the +cabin—the barbed wire fence wasn’t finished +then—and that feller was settin’ in some kind +of a fancy cheer there. No sooner’d that man +see my dog than he popped out o’ his cheer and<span class="pagenum" id="Page_101">[Pg 101]</span> +chased him out of the yard like he was the +plague. ‘Dog won’t hurt you, mister,’ I says +‘he’s a mighty friendly dog.’ ‘Don’t keer if +he is!’ yells back the man, ‘don’t want dogs +or humans on my property. What you think +I’m puttin’ up a barbed wire fence for?’ ‘Well, +mister,’ I sez, ‘not wishin’ you any hard luck +or nothin’, I’d like to have a couple of thousand +wild hogs to chase across your front yard!’ +That’s the way I felt, too!”</p> + +<p>“He must be an unsociable party,” grinned +Buck.</p> + +<p>“Worse than that!” was the hearty response.</p> + +<p>“What does he look like?” Ted asked.</p> + +<p>“Tall feller with a heavy shock of gray hair,” +replied Farmer Crane. “Got a sort of a long +face with deep black eyes. He looks like he +was a drinker or something, because he looks +worried all the time, least he did all the time +I saw him.”</p> + +<p>The supplies which the boys brought back +with them from this trip was eagerly welcomed +at the camp. Then they set to work to make +some improvements in the camp itself. They +cleared away undergrowth which was too close +to the back of the tents. The small truck, which +was marooned up on the dirt road was backed<span class="pagenum" id="Page_102">[Pg 102]</span> +down into the camp by means of two sturdy +ropes, its own brakes, and convenient stones. +By snubbing the ropes around trees they were +able to bear the strain of easing the truck down +hill and in its new position it made a convenient +storeroom. There was still the matter of the +ice box.</p> + +<p>“How you going to sink it?” Buck asked.</p> + +<p>“Straight down in the cool earth beside the +creek,” Ted told him.</p> + +<p>“But the dirt is pretty soft there. How will +you keep the sides from caving in and spoiling +everything?”</p> + +<p>“We’ve had some unexpected good luck,” +Ted smiled. “Under the seat of the truck I +found six large square pieces of tin, and +although I don’t know what they were intended +for, I am going to use them. I imagine that +they were sent along in case we wanted to use +them for a fireplace, but I guess the use won’t +matter. I’m going to floor and wall the ice +chest with that.”</p> + +<p>With a camp shovel Ted and some of the boys +dug a hole a good four feet down into the soft +earth beside the creek and here they placed one +square of tin as the flooring. On the sides they +sheeted with the other pieces of tin, fastening<span class="pagenum" id="Page_103">[Pg 103]</span> +them down with hand cut pegs which they drove +right through the tin in the same fashion as +nails. Except for a cover, the ice chest was +complete.</p> + +<p>The cover was constructed of sections of a +packing box which they sheeted on the under +side and finished off on the top with a wooden +handle. When all this was finished they had a +cool and serviceable ice chest which would never +get hot or need ice. The perishable articles +were lowered into it, the cover was placed on +top at a depth of about six inches from the surface +of the ground and the task was complete.</p> + +<p>“That ought to work all right,” Ted said, +casting an appraising eye over his and his boys’ +handiwork.</p> + +<p>“Mighty nice piece of work,” approved Buck.</p> + +<p>That night Ted called them to attention as +soon as the evening meal was over and asked +them if they wanted to play a night game. The +response was instant and curiosity was expressed +as to the nature of the game.</p> + +<p>“This game is called Mountain Chase,” Ted +told them. “We divide up into two squads +and both squads must have lanterns. There +are ten small lanterns in the truck, and that +means that if we can divide into two squads—that<span class="pagenum" id="Page_104">[Pg 104]</span> +is, if you all will play—there will be a +lantern to every two men. Now, here is the +point. The mountain squad goes out with +lighted lanterns and gets a good twenty-minute +start, time enough in which to lose themselves. +As soon as the twenty minutes are up the camp +squad goes out after them. The object of the +camp squad is to capture the mountain men +before they can sneak back into the camp, and +the mountain men will, of course, try like the +dickens to sneak back past the camp outfit and +win their way into the camp.”</p> + +<p>“The lanterns must be kept lighted at all +times. If there is going to be any prowling +around these mountains without a light, it will +be the last time anyone goes out of the camp +at night. We don’t want anybody to fall in a +gully and get hurt. You may hide the lanterns +behind a tree or your body if you think you +hear an enemy coming, but no lights out! That +wouldn’t be fair to the searchers, for you could +slip past them in the darkness and reach the +camp without any trouble. The game is just +a game of skill with the lamps, and dodging +your enemies.”</p> + +<p>“How do we capture the other side?” was +asked.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_105">[Pg 105]</span></p> + +<p>“Your enemy must be touched before he is +officially captured, and in that the advantage +is clearly with the camp party, because we’ll +all be travelling in parties of two. Now, if the +camp couple spot a couple of mountaineers +sneaking along, the camp men can split and +then run you down from two angles, though +the split isn’t to be big enough to allow the +man without a lantern to get far away from +it. When the mountaineer with the lantern is +touched he and his partner are both captured. +Is everything clear?”</p> + +<p>It seemed that it was and there was vast +enthusiasm over the prospect of an evening of +fun. The two older boys told off the two squads, +lanterns were brought out and lighted, and the +mountain squad prepared to go off.</p> + +<p>“Remember, no lights out!” Ted warned +them, as they started off.</p> + +<p>Buck was with the mountain squad, paired +off with Drummer, for whom he had a warm +friendship, and at this final word from Ted they +took to the hills, splitting up so that five points +of light went bobbing and turning up into the +darkness of the night, to be eventually blotted +out between the trees.</p> + +<p>The twenty minutes seemed a long time to<span class="pagenum" id="Page_106">[Pg 106]</span> +the boys who were waiting in the camp. They +were all eagerly interested in the game which +was before them, for on other nights they had +sat around the campfire talking and singing +until it was time to go to bed. There was the +thrill of the unusual and the challenge of a +combat in this, and they were enjoying it to +the utmost, impatient to get into action.</p> + +<p>“Time is up,” announced Ted, putting his +watch away and getting up from the log upon +which he was sitting.</p> + +<p>They immediately started off in the direction +taken by the other squad, in pairs, with swinging +lanterns which had just been lighted. Ted +had with him the small boy, deeming it wise +to see to it that the small boy was not entrusted +to the care of any one who was not likely to +be too careful of him. The little fellow was +developing under the camp life and Ted felt a +great deal of fondness for him.</p> + +<p>They soon left the camp back of them and +arriving at the foot of the mountain, began the +climb. They spread out in fan shape as they +continued, busily watching their step in front +of them and for a sign of a light between the +trees. Sticks and small stones were avoided +so that noise did not betray them.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_107">[Pg 107]</span></p> + +<p>The woods were profoundly still, so much +so that no one would have believed that twenty +active boys were hunting each other. Ted and +Tom crept steadily forward, keeping the lamp +low and peering into the thickets.</p> + +<p>“Not a sign of them yet,” Ted began, when +the small boy touched his arm.</p> + +<p>“Look down that way, to your left!”</p> + +<p>Ted obeyed, and saw at some yards distance +the gleam of a light. It was behind a tall and +pointed rock, and he motioned to his companion +to follow as they crept toward it, keeping their +own light in back of them so that scarcely a +beam from it showed before them.</p> + +<p>Ted halted and whispered to the small boy. +“You slip around in front of the rock and I’ll +drop on them from the rear. If they try to +get away from me you just touch the fellow +with the lantern. Don’t make any noise.”</p> + +<p>As noiselessly as possible Tom slipped away +around the lower side of the rock and Ted +went around the higher side, his lantern held +far to one side so that the beams would not +show. Cautiously he peered over the top and +the sight pleased him. Bob Gilmore and +another boy were standing there, crouching in<span class="pagenum" id="Page_108">[Pg 108]</span> +the shelter of the big stone, listening and trying +to cover up the lantern beams.</p> + +<p>“I’m sure I heard somebody, even if I didn’t +see a light,” Bob was whispering, as Ted looked +down on them.</p> + +<p>“But they must be gone now,” his companion +said. “Let’s make a sneak for the camp.”</p> + +<p>Ted waited to hear no more, but slid over +the rock and landed beside them. They started +and turned wide eyes upon him, but had presence +of mind to run. But Tom stepped from the +shelter of the rock and touched Bob on the +arm.</p> + +<p>“I got you!” cried the small boy, triumphantly.</p> + +<p>“Yes, you are ours,” smiled Ted, taking the +others’ lantern away from them.</p> + +<p>“I guess we’ll have to surrender,” admitted +Bob.</p> + +<p>In close company they marched back down +the mountain, to find that two other couples +had been captured and that one pair had managed +to return to camp. Only one couple of +each squad was unaccounted for, and presently +Buck and his companion slipped into camp with +the pursuers hard after them.</p> + +<p>“Well, I guess that means that my side has<span class="pagenum" id="Page_109">[Pg 109]</span> +won,” announced Ted. “We captured three +of your teams.”</p> + +<p>“You are right and we admit it,” Buck +acknowledged. “I’m afraid we didn’t spread +out enough. Some other night we’ll play it and +change sides.”</p> + +<p>“Sure. Well, I guess we are all here, aren’t +we?” Ted asked.</p> + +<p>“All present,” Buck nodded.</p> + +<p>“There must be somebody absent,” piped up +a boy. “There goes a light up the side of the +mountain!”</p> + + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> + +<div class="chapter"> +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_110">[Pg 110]</span></p> + +<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_XI">CHAPTER XI<br> +<span class="fs70">THE LONE LIGHT</span></h2> +</div> + +<p>With one accord they turned and looked up +the mountain. Just as the boy had announced, +a single light was moving up, like some firefly +on a wall.</p> + +<p>For the moment it was in a cleared space and +they could follow it. In another moment it had +passed from sight and only a fleeting glimpse +was to be seen as it flashed from between a tree +screen.</p> + +<p>Ted looked in perplexity around him, counting +the boys. “Twenty, counting myself and +Buck,” he murmured. “We are all here.”</p> + +<p>“That must be our party, the gentleman who +has been annoying us,” Buck said, as they +stared up the slope.</p> + +<p>“Perhaps it is. I wonder if he has any intentions +tonight.”</p> + +<p>“Hard to tell. Let’s follow him!”</p> + +<p>“I don’t know as we ought to do that,” mused +Ted. “Suppose it shouldn’t be the right person?<span class="pagenum" id="Page_111">[Pg 111]</span> +If it isn’t the one we think it is, we’ll look silly +chasing him.”</p> + +<p>“Why not have half of the gang stay here +in camp while half of us go out and trail him?” +asked Buck, eagerly. “We could see where he +is going, and if he is coming down this way +for any foolishness we’ll have him red-handed.”</p> + +<p>“That’s true. All right, I’m willing, but we +can’t all go, because he would surely hear the +noise made by twenty of us. One of us must +stay here in the camp with the boys, and four +or five of us can get on his trail.”</p> + +<p>“Oh,” said Buck, with less enthusiasm than +before.</p> + +<p>“I’ll stay here in camp if you want to do +the trailing,” spoke up Ted, quickly, aware of +Buck’s disappointment.</p> + +<p>“I’ll stay with the boys and take care of +them,” said Ralph Plum, stepping forward. +The chance of authority was a welcome one and +he had no personal desire to climb the mountain +after the man with the lantern. The two +leaders looked at him in a moment of doubt, but +his size impressed them, and as both of them +wished to do the trailing, they consented.</p> + +<p>“All right, you can take charge of the boys,” +nodded Ted. “Bob and Charlie, Drummer,<span class="pagenum" id="Page_112">[Pg 112]</span> +Buck and I will do the trailing. See to it that +the lanterns are put back in the truck before +you turn in or even as soon as possible, Ralph.”</p> + +<p>“All right,” said the new camp director. +“You kids get busy and put those lanterns in +the wagon.”</p> + +<p>“That’s no wagon, it’s a truck,” retorted +one boy.</p> + +<p>“Never mind any back talk. I’m in charge +of this camp and I don’t want any suggestions +from anyone,” was the loud answer.</p> + +<p>“You won’t be in charge any longer than I +can help it,” thought Ted, as he lighted his +lantern.</p> + +<p>When the five trailers were ready Ted gave +Plum some final instructions. “When we come +back to the camp we’ll whistle before we enter, +so you’ll know that we are the ones who are +approaching. If anything goes wrong, blow the +automobile horn, which is detached and in my +tent. We’ll surely hear that and come hotfooting +it back to you.”</p> + +<p>“Nothing will go wrong while I’m here!” +returned Plum, with careless ease.</p> + +<p>“Glad to hear you so confident,” half-smiled +Ted. “Come on along, fellows.”</p> + +<p>With lighted lanterns the others joined him<span class="pagenum" id="Page_113">[Pg 113]</span> +and they set off once more for the slopes of +the mountain. Nothing more had been seen of +the vagrant light above them and they realized +that their chase might be a vain one. But none +of them felt content to go to sleep that night +until they knew that everything was safe so far +as the camp was concerned.</p> + +<p>The initial climb was a hard one and they +were all panting when they reached a less +abrupt slope of the mountain. Here they halted +to breathe in the air that they felt the need of.</p> + +<p>“We’ll soon be up to the spot where we saw +him cross that open glade,” Ted said to Buck. +“That is just where I saw the light on the +night I came up here alone.”</p> + +<p>They pressed on, gaining the open stretch of +the mountain and crossed this space, looking +down to where the campfires gleamed like small +red dots. They could make out a few of the +boys standing around the fires and they knew +that their progress was being watched. As a +signal, they waved their lanterns.</p> + +<p>They had just entered the higher wooded +slope above the cleared spot, when a sound +reached their ears which stopped them in their +tracks.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_114">[Pg 114]</span></p> + +<p>“What was that?” Bob gasped, looking +around. But the others knew at once.</p> + +<p>“Thunder!” Ted said to Buck, raising his +eyebrows significantly.</p> + +<p>Buck looked away across the valley in which +Black Riders’ Camp lay. “I don’t see any +sign of lightning,” he said. “Probably it is +miles away from here yet. We can do a little +more hunting around and then go back.”</p> + +<p>“I wonder if it is worth while?” asked Ted, +looking up the slope. “I haven’t seen any sign +of our friend with his light. Maybe he has +gone home and to bed.”</p> + +<p>“We’ll go a little further, anyway,” urged +Buck. “Then we can fetch up in a wide circle +and come in back of the camp. If anything is +wrong down there we ought to arrive in time +to be in on it.”</p> + +<p>“Wait until I see what time it is,” Ted +answered, and he glanced at his watch. “Just +ten-thirty. We must get back pretty soon. All +right, let’s go on.”</p> + +<p>He wondered if he had been wise in giving +in to Buck, for a more penetrating and rolling +peal of thunder reached their ears, bringing +with it a brooding sense of uneasiness that was +disconcerting. The thunder rolled back and<span class="pagenum" id="Page_115">[Pg 115]</span> +forth between the mountains, which seemed to +toss it back and forth after a profound rolling +that had a grinding sound attached to it. The +air itself had been comparatively still but now +a faint and disturbing little wind slipped in +and out between the leaves and branches of the +trees. Out of the corner of his eye Drummer +caught a glimpse of a lightning flash.</p> + +<p>“I saw that flash of lightning just then,” he +proclaimed, confirming an impression that Ted +had in his own mind. Drummer was not comfortable +and longed to return to camp.</p> + +<p>They came to a halt, uncertain, with the +majority desiring to return to camp. Buck +alone wanted to chance the thunder storm +which there was now no doubt in the world was +coming. But he knew that such a course was +foolish and he gave in.</p> + +<p>“All right,” he sighed. “I do hate to give +up the chase, though.”</p> + +<p>“I guess we all do,” agreed Ted. “But we’ll +have to get right back. It will take us a good +half hour as it is, even if we do have to go +down instead of up, and we will be lucky if we +reach the camp in time.”</p> + +<p>“Oh, you’re right there,” his chum agreed, +glancing for the last time up the mountain in<span class="pagenum" id="Page_116">[Pg 116]</span> +a searching way. “We simply must get back. +I was just—Ah!”</p> + +<p>At the sharp exclamation in his tone the others +looked at him, noted his startled facial expression, +and then glanced up the slope to a ledge +some twenty feet above them, and off to one +side. The lantern was coming toward them, +but even as they looked it stopped, hesitated, +and began a speedy retreat. Whoever was behind +it was represented merely by a blur.</p> + +<p>They forgot the advancing storm at once and +set off in pursuit. At the moment of seeing +the light so near to them they were too startled +to move, and had the man with the light advanced +upon them, they would have been frozen +to the spot with apprehension. But now that +the man with the lantern ran from them the +thing was put in a different light. Seeing it +run away put courage into them.</p> + +<p>“Stick together and don’t get lost!” cried +Buck, as he ran up the slope to the ledge upon +which the man had been walking.</p> + +<p>This ledge could only be climbed by taking +a diagonal course and Charlie Wells complicated +matters by slipping when he was almost +at the top and falling all the way down to the +level upon which they had been a minute or two<span class="pagenum" id="Page_117">[Pg 117]</span> +previously. Not wishing to run on without +him they were compelled to wait and when he +joined them, adorned with a few cuts and +scratches, they ran on again. When they +rounded a knob of the mountain there was no +light to be seen and they guessed the story +only too well. The mountain man had put his +lantern out and all trace of him was lost, to +the eye at least.</p> + +<p>They stood in a cluster listening, but no sound +except the wind greeted them. The stillness +inspired a new idea.</p> + +<p>“I’ll bet he just put out his light and is +hiding around here somewhere,” said Drummer, +voicing the thought.</p> + +<p>“I’m afraid that is true,” agreed Ted. +“Well, we don’t care to go looking all around +the bushes for him. I can see now where we +made our mistake in the first place.”</p> + +<p>“Where?” asked Buck.</p> + +<p>“By going around with five lanterns lighted, +making ourselves absolutely conspicuous,” returned +Ted. “If we had had only one light +we wouldn’t have advertised ourselves as we +did. Perhaps if he hadn’t thought there were +five of us he would have offered to talk or fight +instead of legging it away as fast as he did!”</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_118">[Pg 118]</span></p> + +<p>“Yes, one light would have been enough,” +admitted Buck.</p> + +<p>“Sure it would have! Well, there isn’t anything +that we can do about it now. I——”</p> + +<p>He was interrupted by an ear-splitting crash +of thunder and a flaming tongue of fire flashed +across the mountains, causing them to jump +severely. Ted turned back toward the camp.</p> + +<p>“Come on, we’ve simply got to get back +there!” he cried.</p> + +<p>They started off on a fast walk, regretting +that they had chased the man with the light as +far as they had. In their enthusiasm they had +covered a long distance and they had not descended +very far down the side of the mountain +before large rain drops began to spatter +through the trees upon them.</p> + +<p>“I’m afraid we’re not going to make it!” +shouted Ted, above the noise of the rising wind.</p> + + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> + +<div class="chapter"> +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_119">[Pg 119]</span></p> + +<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_XII">CHAPTER XII<br> +<span class="fs70">HEAVEN’S ARTILLERY</span></h2> +</div> + +<p>Ted’s guess was a perfectly correct one. Before +they were half down the mountain side the +rain began to come down in sheets.</p> + +<p>Added to the rush of wind and water there +was the bewildering addition of thunder and +lightning. The thunder kept up the rolling roar +as the sound bounded from mountain slope to +mountain slope, and the flashes of lightning +almost blinded them. The quality of it was +deceptive. It revealed obstacles in the path +which were imaginary most of the time, and by +constant flashing made the lanterns of little or +no use. Two of them had already been puffed +out by the wind and the rain drops on the others +caused them to sputter and hiss. It was with +a sense of feeling rather than seeing their way +that the boys pushed on.</p> + +<p>“Isn’t there any place that we can duck into +for shelter?” Buck shouted in Ted’s ear.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_120">[Pg 120]</span></p> + +<p>“I don’t know of any,” he replied. “This +is all new country to me.”</p> + +<p>“How about that old house?”</p> + +<p>“We’re nowhere near it,” was the discouraging +answer as Ted kept on going.</p> + +<p>They were frantically seeking a shelter, for +there was no thought in their minds that they +could ever make camp with safety. They could +see the fires in the camp below, now rapidly being +put out by the storm. The rain had increased +in violence and it gave every appearance of +being a violent summer storm.</p> + +<p>The glass on one of the lanterns cracked and +broke and the wind promptly snatched out the +dancing flame. But their chief help in their +flight from the storm was the lightning which +flashed with great brilliance. Although it +created illusions it served as a guide and kept +them from running on dangerous ground.</p> + +<p>There was a severe crack of thunder, a +dazzling flash of electrical fire hard on its heels, +and a big tree near them seemed outlined for +an instant in quivering fire. The monarch of +the forest split in two, and one portion came +down with a rush and a roar that bewildered +them.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_121">[Pg 121]</span></p> + +<p>“That was close!” yelled Drummer, as they +came to an abrupt halt.</p> + +<p>“We have got to get under some kind of +a cover,” cried Ted, peering around him. “If +we don’t we may have a tree down on top of +us!”</p> + +<p>“Let’s try that rock over there,” Buck +pointed out, and they dashed in the direction +of the somewhat vague rock which loomed off +to their left. When they reached it they were +grateful to find that it afforded a slight shelter +at least from falling trees, though as a covering +for rain it was a total failure.</p> + +<p>The rock was small at the base and towered +above their heads, mushrooming out as it went +up, until the top was a flat surface which would +hold all five of them without crowding, had they +been in any mood to sit on the top of the big +rock. But they crouched at the base of the +big stone and there prepared to make the best +of it, striving to keep the two good lanterns +going, for in their present predicament even +a little light was welcome.</p> + +<p>“This is better than nothing at all!” declared +Bob, pushing his back up as close to the +rock as it would go.</p> + +<p>“We’re safe from falling trees, anyway,”<span class="pagenum" id="Page_122">[Pg 122]</span> +observed Charlie, as he set his useless lamp to +one side and jammed his hands into his pockets.</p> + +<p>“Not the dryest place in the world!” +chuckled Ted.</p> + +<p>The rain slanted right into their faces, +causing them to avert them, and the drippings +from the top of the rock spattered over them. +A thin trickle oozed down the sleek sides of +the big stone and made their backs more wet +than ever. Their plight was not a happy or +a comfortable one.</p> + +<p>“What I wouldn’t do with a good old +fire right now!” sighed Drummer, shivering +slightly.</p> + +<p>“Here, hold your hands over the top of the +lantern,” directed Ted, and Drummer followed +his instructions and found the warmth welcome.</p> + +<p>“I wonder how the fellows in camp are +making it?” Ted worried, as the lightning +flashes grew less frequent. “Of course they +have the tents, but I wonder if they knew +enough to loosen up on the tent ropes so as to +take the strain off of the pegs? I won’t be +surprised if we get back and find that half of +the pegs have been pulled out of the ground!”</p> + +<p>“How does that work, Ted?” Bob asked, +with interest.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_123">[Pg 123]</span></p> + +<p>“Why, when a storm is coming up a camper +must loosen up on his tent ropes, because when +the canvas gets wet it pulls pretty strongly on +the ropes, and if they haven’t been attended +to they pull right out of the ground. If that +business hasn’t been done I’ll have only myself +to blame, for I neglected to tell you all about +it. Never gave it a thought, though I should +have at the time we dug the trenches around +the tents.”</p> + +<p>“It is a mighty good thing that we did dig +the trenches,” put in Buck, all crouched in a +heap. “Those fellows would be good and wet +by this time if we hadn’t.”</p> + +<p>“I don’t doubt but what they are right now,” +said Ted, seriously. “With a fall of rain like +this those trenches couldn’t possibly carry off +all of the water. I think that we’ll all have to +do some drying out when we get the fires +started again and get back to normal!”</p> + +<p>“The lightning is letting up, but listen +to that thunder!” remarked Buck. “That’s +heaven’s artillery for fair!”</p> + +<p>A full and weary hour dragged by while they +remained there in the shelter of the big rock +waiting for the storm to cease. The lightning +had moved on across the mountain and the<span class="pagenum" id="Page_124">[Pg 124]</span> +thunder was about to follow. The rolls of the +pealing concussions now came to them in a +more muffled state and the rain was beginning +to thin out though it did not cease to fall. They +had hopes of making a break when the thunder +and lightning had passed away.</p> + +<p>“We won’t stay here just for the sake of +the rain,” said Ted. “We couldn’t possibly +get any wetter than we are, so as soon as we +are sure that there will be no more lightning +we’ll make a dash for it.”</p> + +<p>“Better be careful of your dashes,” warned +Buck. “The ground has become very slippery +and we’ll have to watch our steps.”</p> + +<p>“We’ll keep our eyes wide open,” promised +Ted. “I guess we can go now.”</p> + +<p>The five wet and stiff boys stood up straight, +stretching their aching muscles. After the +game of the evening, the chase over the mountains, +and the thorough wetting, all of them felt +worn out and stiff. It was with genuine +pleasure that they looked forward to the return +to the camp, for the exercise alone.</p> + +<p>“It isn’t going to do us much good to get to +camp,” said Drummer. “There won’t be any +wood to start a fire with.”</p> + +<p>“This storm has taught me a big lesson,”<span class="pagenum" id="Page_125">[Pg 125]</span> +said Ted. “Hereafter we’ll have a shelter for +a pile of dry wood, for just such an emergency +as this. But don’t forget, Drummer, there are +warm blankets for us to wrap around us when +we do get there.”</p> + +<p>“That is so,” the other realized, brightening. +“That will help a lot.”</p> + +<p>They hurried away from the big rock and +made their way to the best of their belief +toward their camp. They had not gone very +far, however, before Bob cried out in dismay.</p> + +<p>“My lantern is going out! Guess all the oil +is burned up.”</p> + +<p>With a flutter his light went out, leaving them +with but one good lantern among them. For a +moment they were at a loss, for the mountains +were very dark and slippery and if the last +light went out their case would not be a happy +one.</p> + +<p>“Well, we still have one left and there must +be a little oil in the other lanterns,” said Ted. +“We’ll push along with the one light and if +that goes out we’ll refill my lantern with the +oil from the others.”</p> + +<p>They continued on their way for some time, +moving in the general direction of the camp. +The ground was indeed muddy and treacherous<span class="pagenum" id="Page_126">[Pg 126]</span> +and they were compelled to watch every footstep. +As they rounded a point on the mountain +Buck paused and pointed to a light below them.</p> + +<p>“Hello, we have certainly wandered off of +our course, all right! There is the cabin of +that unsociable fellow that the farmer told us +about.”</p> + +<p>They looked down into the slight valley to +the cabin before them, noting with some envy +the lighted windows, speculating on the warmth +and cheer which was inside. The light in the +cabin was a good one and the square panes of +glass released broad floods of yellow illumination. +As they looked the door opened and a +tall man came to the door looking out.</p> + +<p>“Duck the lantern!” whispered Buck, and +Ted dropped it behind a bunch of bushes.</p> + +<p>The man looked up at the sky, apparently +wishing to see if the storm had passed over. +He was much as the farmer had described him +and he was dressed in an odd costume for a +backwoods cabin, for he had on a soft white +shirt and white flannel trousers.</p> + +<p>“My, my, what a nice looking pioneer he is!” +muttered Buck as the man retired.</p> + +<p>“Buck, do you know what I think?” asked +Ted, slowly.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_127">[Pg 127]</span></p> + +<p>“What?”</p> + +<p>“I wouldn’t be a bit surprised if that man is +the one who has been annoying us in our +camp!”</p> + +<p>There was a moment of silence and the boys +all looked at Ted. “What makes you think +so?” Buck asked.</p> + +<p>“You remember what that farmer told us +about the very unfriendliness of the man? I +wouldn’t be surprised if he just resented our +camping anywhere near him and he tried to +chase us away.”</p> + +<p>“You think he is the man we chased, with +the lantern, tonight?”</p> + +<p>“I don’t know. Anyway, he had time to get +back to his cabin and change his clothes. I +wouldn’t be a bit surprised to find that he is +the one. But come on, we won’t get anywhere +by just standing around here.”</p> + +<p>They continued on their way to camp, talking +over Ted’s theory, and the more that they +talked of it the more plausible it seemed. They +felt that they had made an important discovery.</p> + +<p>“Maybe he has tired of his effort to scare +us away,” said Buck.</p> + +<p>“I hope so. We’re not going, anyway.”</p> + +<p>“Hurrah, there is the camp!” cried Charlie,<span class="pagenum" id="Page_128">[Pg 128]</span> +as they reached the bottom of the slope and +started across the basin towards the tents.</p> + +<p>Ted was in the lead and he quickened his +steps, looking ahead into the darkness. There +was a sound of scrambling and jumping which +he could not understand and the spot looked +curiously empty.</p> + +<p>“Why, the tents are all down!” he exclaimed, +running forward.</p> + + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> + +<div class="chapter"> +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_129">[Pg 129]</span></p> + +<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_XIII">CHAPTER XIII<br> +<span class="fs70">BUCK MAKES A DISCOVERY</span></h2> +</div> + +<p>The one lantern carried by Ted threw but a +poor light over the scene of the camp but it +was enough for the arriving boys to see that +all of the tents were down, apparently blown +over from the storm. The first two were down +altogether, canvas and poles, while the last two +consisted of flapping canvas on the poles. +While they looked they were joined by the other +boys, who came jumping and running from the +truck, where they had taken a poor refuge +during the storm.</p> + +<p>“Oh, boy, I’m glad you are back!” exclaimed +Plum, fervently, catching Ted by the sleeve.</p> + +<p>“What happened here?” Ted asked.</p> + +<p>“Why, the storm blew the tents down. We +were all under the canvas and keeping pretty +dry, except for some water which leaked in +from the trenches, when all of a sudden there +was a blow of wind and the tents were down. +It even carried over the poles on two of the<span class="pagenum" id="Page_130">[Pg 130]</span> +tents, or else we knocked them down getting +out, I don’t know which. But we were soaked +and tried to get in the truck and pull a piece +of canvas over our heads, but it didn’t do us +much good.”</p> + +<p>Apparently, it had not. All of them were as +wet as the five who had been trailing. With +the tents down and all of them dripping they +presented a sorry sight which even the flicker +of the one lamp could not make up for. Looking +backward, the evening did not seem to have +been a success.</p> + +<p>“Well, only one thing to do,” directed Buck, +briskly. “Let’s locate our axes and hunt dry +wood for a fire.”</p> + +<p>“There isn’t any dry wood,” a boy objected.</p> + +<p>“We can get dry wood by taking a fairly +large log and chopping off the wet outside,” +explained Buck. “In that way we’ll get down +to the heart of it and find something that we +can burn. You know where that dead log is +back of the springs, and you can surely cut +something dry out of that big fellow. Come on, +I’ll show you.”</p> + +<p>Buck went to the mass of canvas which had +been his own tent and lifting the soggy material, +felt inside for his axe, which he had no<span class="pagenum" id="Page_131">[Pg 131]</span> +trouble in locating. The other boys procured +theirs and then they went off in a body to hunt +up dry wood, a seemingly impossible process. +But Buck had had to deal with wet wood before +in his camping experiences.</p> + +<p>“Now, here is this log,” he told them. “The +outside looks pretty wet, and it is wet. Start +cutting it away in slices, this way.” With his +axe he split the wood along the upper side, +tearing off the wet strips and tossing them to +one side. “Now, here is some that looks fairly +dry,” he went on, as they cut deeper. “This +stuff will do very nicely for our fire.”</p> + +<p>The younger boys were surprised to find that +there was indeed a goodly supply of dry wood +in the old log and they gathered a large heap +of it and took it back to the camp. Buck knew +that they were going to need lots of it, for it +was impossible to think of going to bed that +night. The wet canvas could not be put up and +the entire camp would have to be dried out. +They would need wood for the entire night.</p> + +<p>“They are all excited and won’t mind staying +awake all night,” he reflected, as he carried +an armful of wood back to the fireplaces.</p> + +<p>Here he found Ted down on his knees cleaning +out the wet mass of ashes which had been<span class="pagenum" id="Page_132">[Pg 132]</span> +the evening’s fire and when these had been +raked out and scattered to one side, some paper, +which came from under the seat of the truck +was stuffed into the stone fireplaces and the +wood was piled so as to catch fire. A match +was applied and the tiny spurt of flame which +immediately jumped up was a very welcome +one. The one faithful lamp was still going and +had done its duty well.</p> + +<p>Carefully they fed the flame with splinters +of wood, and the building of the fire took care, +for the log wood was not thoroughly dry, but +had in it enough moisture to make it a problem. +It smoked and drove them away from the fire +more than once, but they were pleased to see +that it did burn. Some good fuel was added +in the form of a canned goods box which had +been under the truck and so was not very wet. +Around the blaze created by this wood they +dried their clothing as much as they could.</p> + +<p>“We can’t go to bed tonight, can we?” Tom +Clayton asked.</p> + +<p>“No, we couldn’t get the tents up tonight, +because we’ll have to dry them,” replied Ted. +“But the night won’t last so very long now. +When we do get everything fixed up we’ll put +in the daytime sleeping, if we feel that way.”</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_133">[Pg 133]</span></p> + +<p>“I certainly would like to go to sleep right +now!” yawned Drummer, stretching himself.</p> + +<p>“I guess most of us would,” nodded Buck. +“But everything is against us. How would +you like to snuggle down under that canvas +right now?”</p> + +<p>“Ugh, not while it is as wet as it is!” cried +Drummer. “I’d rather stand up around the +fire all night!”</p> + +<p>“Is everything soaked, blankets, sweaters +and everything?” Ted asked.</p> + +<p>“Yes,” replied Buck. “As soon as the canvas +fell on the stuff it all got soaked, at least +in the tents where the poles went down. I don’t +know about the other two.”</p> + +<p>Some of the boys rummaged under the canvas +and found that blankets were damp and +not too wet to put on, and immediately they +returned with blankets over their shoulders. +Others had not been so lucky and they crowded +close to the fire. As morning came on another +group went out and hunted for wood, bringing +back a large supply. The fire had been effective +but not perfect, and the smoke had chased them +from side to side of the fireplace.</p> + +<p>It was the first really disagreeable camp experience +that these boys from the club had ever<span class="pagenum" id="Page_134">[Pg 134]</span> +had and some were plainly discouraged by it +while others enjoyed the novelty and adventure +of it. The conversation by the fire became more +cheerful and soon jokes and laughter took the +place of brooding silence. The five who had +trailed the man with the lantern told their +experiences and those who had remained in +camp told theirs.</p> + +<p>“We were just standing around watching +your lights when the storm was first heard,” +related Plum. “We hoped you’d come down +right away, but you didn’t and then the old +storm hit and we dug for the tents. We sat in +there pretty dry except for some water that +came in around the bottom of the tent and then +all of a sudden there was a little blow and the +tent I was in came down! Seemed like the canvas +on one side just collapsed, the back pole +seemed to come down in a hurry and I guess we +knocked the rest down when we tried to get +out from under. The rest was the same as we +was, scrambling out of tents and looking for +somewhere to go, when we thought of the truck +and climbed in there.”</p> + +<p>“I knew that it blew pretty hard when we +were up there under the rock,” remarked Ted.<span class="pagenum" id="Page_135">[Pg 135]</span> +“But I didn’t know that it blew hard enough +to blow down the tents.”</p> + +<p>“The wind must have been stronger down +here than it was up there,” suggested Bob.</p> + +<p>“That is hardly possible, because the wind +always blows harder on a higher level than in +a basin, such as this spot is. I can see how a +wind would blow down one tent but it seems +funny that it should blow down four of them. +However, I guess it must have just swooped +down in a sudden gust and done the job.”</p> + +<p>“Which way did our tent buckle in?” Buck +asked Plum.</p> + +<p>“From the left side,” was the answer.</p> + +<p>“Couldn’t have,” said a boy, promptly. +“Ours went in on the right!”</p> + +<p>“One of you must be wrong,” said Buck. +“The wind must have come from one direction +to have force enough to flatten out the tents, +and it would have hit either on the right or the +left side and not on both. How about you fellows +in the first two tents?”</p> + +<p>“Ours went in on the left,” said a boy from +the second tent.</p> + +<p>“But ours collapsed on the right,” said Tom +Clayton.</p> + +<p>Buck snatched up the lantern. “I thought<span class="pagenum" id="Page_136">[Pg 136]</span> +there was something funny about that tent business +all along,” he said. “Wait until I come +back.” He strode off with the lantern, leaving +them wondering.</p> + +<p>Buck went to the tents and placed the lantern +on the ground. The canvas had fallen in a confused +mass and he was compelled to fish under +it for the ropes. He located the ropes which +had been pegged into the ground and examined +them carefully. Without saying anything he +examined the others, passing from tent to tent.</p> + +<p>“Find anything?” Ted hailed him, from the +fire.</p> + +<p>“Yes, sir!” was the vigorous answer. “These +tent ropes were cut!”</p> + +<p>“What!” cried Ted, leaping to his feet.</p> + +<p>“That is just what happened. Come here.”</p> + +<p>The entire group clustered around Buck as +he held up ropes from two of the tents. “Look +here. One fellow says his tent collapsed from +the left and another fellow says his let go from +the right. Good reason why. Somebody stood +between two tents and cut the ropes under cover +of the storm. Of course the tents went down +on opposite sides, and I suppose the man +shoved the back poles and skipped to the next +two tents and cut the ropes there. He didn’t<span class="pagenum" id="Page_137">[Pg 137]</span> +have time to knock over the uprights there, because +the boys were swarming out, so he left +that to them and probably took to the woods. +Look at these ropes.”</p> + +<p>There was not the slightest doubt in the world +that the ropes to the tents had been cut, and cut +with a sharp knife which had required no second +cuts. They stared at the ends of the ropes in +amazement.</p> + +<p>“We didn’t hear anybody,” said Plum. +“Probably you wouldn’t, with the noise of +the storm. If we want any additional proof +that the ropes were cut and not pulled, look at +the tent pegs. They are all in the ground as +they were when we left and the other pieces of +the rope are still attached. There is no doubt +that you boys had a visitor while we were chasing!”</p> + +<p>“It might have done us more good to have +stayed at home and minded our business,” +smiled Ted.</p> + +<p>“Maybe. Say, how near the end of the storm +did this thing happen?”</p> + +<p>“Almost at the end,” said Plum. “Just +when the thunder was going away.”</p> + +<p>“Then that kills our theory about the man +in the log cabin,” Buck said to Ted.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_138">[Pg 138]</span></p> + +<p>“Yes, it does,” replied his chum. “He +couldn’t possibly be the one, because if he had +been in on this he couldn’t possibly have returned +to his house and changed his clothes.”</p> + +<p>“No, he is out of it,” agreed Buck. “But +who in the world can be doing all this business? +I tell you, I’m getting sick and tired of it and +I’m going to break loose before long and hunt +somebody down.”</p> + +<p>“The trouble with your breaking loose is that +we don’t know who to hunt down!” smiled Ted.</p> + +<p>“No, that is the trouble. But someone is responsible. +I don’t believe it is any supernatural +element, either, or if it is, that ghost +carries a fine sharp knife! When it gets light +enough we’ll have to look around for footprints.”</p> + +<p>“It won’t be long before it is light now,” +said Charlie, glancing at the sky.</p> + +<p>The last of the darkness was beginning to +break in the east, a broad bar of yellow-white +light was appearing. Far over in the west the +last of the stars began to fade and as the minutes +ticked off the band of light spread and +broadened and the aspect of the woods changed. +The darkness withdrew and the flush of a new +and beautiful day appeared.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_139">[Pg 139]</span></p> + +<p>“Golly, I never was so glad to see the daytime +come!” sighed Drummer, as they stood +around the fires watching the advance of the +day.</p> + +<p>“I guess none of us ever was,” agreed Buck. +“And could I eat!”</p> + +<p>“Then let’s get at it right now,” said Ted. +“We’ll have an early breakfast and then get +to work. We are going to have a busy day.”</p> + + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> + +<div class="chapter"> +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_140">[Pg 140]</span></p> + +<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_XIV">CHAPTER XIV<br> +<span class="fs70">THE STORY OF THE BLACK RIDERS</span></h2> +</div> + +<p>The sun seemed to burst forth from the sky, +flooding over the camp as it did so, and never +before had the great ball of fire seemed so comforting +and cheerful. The fires were going +briskly and the coffee was sending out its +tempting aroma. Drummer, warming up +throughout, was inspired to joke.</p> + +<p>“Hey, you fellows!” he cried. “Who is going +to take their morning dip in Bear Creek?”</p> + +<p>A medley of groans greeted him and he grinned. +“We ought to toss you in for even suggesting +such a thing!” grinned Buck, as he fried +the bacon.</p> + +<p>The touch of the sun turned the camp into a +new place. Their spirits rose visibly and all +the uncertainty of the night passed away. No +one felt the loss of sleep, and while the breakfast +squad was busy another detachment took +the wet canvas and spread it out to dry. The +blankets and all personal effects were next in +line and were hung on convenient limbs to partake +of the beneficial sun.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_141">[Pg 141]</span></p> + +<p>Fortunately for them it was a warm day and +things began to dry at once. As the heat increased +they began to shed outer garments so +as to give them a chance to dry also. The chill +was out of their bodies and they felt perfectly +normal.</p> + +<p>“I feel better than I did before I got all +wet!” declared one boy.</p> + +<p>“You’ll probably have a reaction later on,” +advised Ted. “I mean that you’ll probably get +tired and want to sleep. We’ll all try a little +sleep after we get the tents up again.”</p> + +<p>The call for breakfast was now issued and +disregarded by no one. With whoops of delight +they trooped around, tin plates thrust forward, +and for several minutes the cooks were busy +young men. Never before had breakfast tasted +so good, and there was a general satisfaction +expressed.</p> + +<p>“The cooks are putting their best into it this +morning,” said Drummer.</p> + +<p>“No differently than other mornings,” +smiled Ted. “But you are hungrier.”</p> + +<p>After breakfast the camp was cleaned up, the +canvas reversed and the blankets treated in the +same manner. There was also another problem +before them and this had to do with the icebox. +It had filled up with water and they had to +take everything out of it, pull out some of the<span class="pagenum" id="Page_142">[Pg 142]</span> +tin sheeting, and allow the water to seep into +the ground.</p> + +<p>“We didn’t make it water-tight,” said Buck.</p> + +<p>“No, and the rain last night was so hard that +it just settled above the cover and leaked +through. I see now where we have made a mistake. +Instead of sinking the ice chest so deep +we ought to build it up a bit and have the cover +above ground, with sloping sides, so that the +water would run away from it. In that way a +few drops might leak in, but not a couple of +quarts as it did last night.”</p> + +<p>Later in the day they made the improvement +and did not have any further trouble with wet +weather in regard to their provisions. Then +they turned their attention to the tents, after +having looked around back of them for footprints, +but there were none, so they gave it up.</p> + +<p>“We might find some way back in the +bushes,” said Ted. “But we’ll look ’em up +some other time. Let’s see what we can do +with the tents.”</p> + +<p>They presented quite a problem, for the cut +rope had to be tied together. There was no +extra rope to be had and while they were tieing +pieces together Ted had an idea.</p> + +<p>“Look here, I’ve got an idea which will keep +us from using pegs or having to tie all these +ropes to the smaller pieces.”</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_143">[Pg 143]</span></p> + +<p>“What is it? I don’t see how—”</p> + +<p>“The tent ropes on one side of each tent are +still tied to the pegs, aren’t they?”</p> + +<p>“Sure.”</p> + +<p>“Well, the ropes have been cut on the sides +of the tents facing each other. Instead of +bothering to tie new ropes and peg them down, +lets tie the ropes from each tent together and +simply lay a heavy log across the ropes. That +will be heavy enough to hold down the canvas +and when it rains again we won’t have to loosen +ropes because as the canvas tightens it will +simply raise the weighing logs a little bit.”</p> + +<p>“Say, that’s fine! We’ll do that!” approved +Buck.</p> + +<p>On the sides of the tents where the cut ropes +faced each other the boys tied them together +and then came the problem of logs. They did +not want to use old half-rotted logs and they +did not care to cut down good trees. Buck suggested +that they seek out some trees that were +dead but still standing, and this they did, finding +more than enough of such trees. As soon +as the best ones had been picked out they cut +them down to the desired length, brought them +back to camp, and then laid them across the +ropes which stretched from tent to tent. Immediately +they weighed the canvas down by +their pressure on the ropes much as pegs would<span class="pagenum" id="Page_144">[Pg 144]</span> +have drawn them tightly, and altogether proved +themselves satisfactory.</p> + +<p>“By George, any camp where they had more +than one tent, could do that, and it would be +an improvement on pegs!” approved Buck.</p> + +<p>“Well, not exactly an improvement,” Ted +shook his head. “Pegs give a more direct and +downward pull. But the logs make a good substitute. +It surely makes the camp look funny.”</p> + +<p>The sight of the three logs hanging on the +ropes between tents might have puzzled anyone +who did not understand them, but the boys were +content with their work. The camp was now in +good condition and the reaction set in soon after +the noon meal. The excitement and work had +kept them all wide awake, but now yawns began +to be heard from them.</p> + +<p>“All of you fellows who want to can turn +in for a good sleep,” said Ted. “Just roll up +in your blankets and snooze away! Everyone +who doesn’t feel like sleeping will please be +quiet and give the others a chance.”</p> + +<p>“I’d like to know who won’t be sleeping,” +Bob smiled, rubbing his eyes.</p> + +<p>“I’m not going to sleep right away,” replied +Ted. “Buck and I are going over to the farmhouse +where we buy the fresh supplies and get +some stuff. When we get back we’ll turn in.”</p> + +<p>The other boys straggled off at once to their<span class="pagenum" id="Page_145">[Pg 145]</span> +tents, and wrapping themselves in their +blankets, fell asleep without any trouble. Fortunately, +the sun had passed far enough behind +the trees so that the rays did not beat down on +the tents and they had no great difficulty in +getting to sleep. Ted and Buck put empty +knapsacks on their backs and started off for +the farmhouse where they bought their provisions.</p> + +<p>“I certainly won’t mind a little sleep myself,” +yawned Buck, as they left the camp.</p> + +<p>“I won’t either,” his companion remarked. +“But we’ll get back in time to snatch a few +hours when we do get back.”</p> + +<p>“Think we’ll learn anything from Farmer +Crane?”</p> + +<p>“I don’t know, but I hope so. This thing is +getting serious. So far the boys haven’t been +bad about it, although some of them are pretty +scared at times, but I don’t know how long it +will last. The uncertainty of it wears us down. +We don’t know when somebody is going drop +in and play a trick on us. I want to find out +what it is all about.”</p> + +<p>“If we find the person who is doing it,” said +Buck, slowly, “we’ll surely tell him a thing +or two!”</p> + +<p>“If we ever catch him around the camp we’ll<span class="pagenum" id="Page_146">[Pg 146]</span> +turn him over to the police in short order,” +was Ted’s grim promise.</p> + +<p>The farmer was glad to see them and he listened +with interest to their story of the cutting +of the tent ropes during the storm. It was felt +that there was no need to tell him anything else, +for fear that it would get abroad too much. The +farmer was interested and excited.</p> + +<p>“Somebody must have a grudge agin you +fellers!” he cried. “Nobody’d be doing that +for fun.”</p> + +<p>“It must be somebody up this way, then,” +said Ted. “Somebody doesn’t want us around. +We thought it was that fellow you spoke to us +about, the man who lives over in the log cabin, +but he couldn’t have been the one, because we +saw him a few minutes before all this happened.”</p> + +<p>“Can’t think of no one else, ’less it could of +been old Jerry Jackson, who lives over in Hogs’ +Hollow,” mused the farmer.</p> + +<p>“Where is Hogs’ Hollow?”</p> + +<p>“’Bout a mile beyond where your camp is. +It is a swampy sort of a place not fit for nothin’ +but hogs to live in, and old Jerry has a shack +there. But he never bothers no one and I don’t +know why he’d ever want to chase you out of +there.”</p> + +<p>“I guess he couldn’t have anything to do with<span class="pagenum" id="Page_147">[Pg 147]</span> +it,” agreed Ted. “By the way, what is that +house way up on the mountain, the one where +the furniture is still in the place? Looks like +it was furnished and never used.”</p> + +<p>“Oh, that’s the Bainbridge place,” was the +reply. “Rich feller by the name of Bainbridge +built that house for his wife and it sure was a +handsome dwellin’! I saw it when it was first +finished, and I want to tell you it had more gilt +and brass and blue and everything than any +place I ever saw. Well, Bainbridge was lookin’ +forward to bringin’ his wife up there—she’d +never seen it—when she decided she wasn’t +goin’ to live up in no mountains, and she finally +up and run off with somebody else. Bainbridge +spent a lot of time mopin’ around the place +and acted like he was half-crazy, and then finally +he disappeared. Nobody knows where he is +today.”</p> + +<p>“That fellow over in the cabin isn’t Bainbridge, +is he?” Buck asked, quickly.</p> + +<p>“Oh, no! I know both of ’em by sight, and +that ain’t him. No, unless Bainbridge’s ghost +is hangin’ around that old house. I don’t know +where he is.”</p> + +<p>They paid for their provisions and then +tramped back to camp, discussing the affair between +them. Nothing definite appeared to have<span class="pagenum" id="Page_148">[Pg 148]</span> +been learned from the farmer and they decided +to keep a stricter lookout in the camp.</p> + +<p>“If we ever hear anybody around in the +bushes we’ll have to make a dash for them,” +said Buck.</p> + +<p>Arriving at the camp they found it apparently +deserted and perfectly quiet, but a glance +into the tents showed that all of the boys were +asleep. Very quietly they packed the provisions +in the improved ice chest, and then as +quietly crawled into their blankets for a nap. +For the next three hours the camp was so still +that anyone looking down upon it would have +decided that it was deserted, and then, as the +coolness of the evening came on, first one and +then another began to stir, until the whole camp +was awake.</p> + +<p>Supper was eaten and then they sat around, +content to remain in the camp. Just before +they turned in there was a dispute about the +Black Riders and Ted was called upon.</p> + +<p>“It was started by a man named Simon +Reed,” he said.</p> + +<p>“I don’t think many of us know the story,” +Alfred Paulson said, thoughtfully. “Won’t you +tell it to us, Ted?”</p> + +<p>“You want me to tell you the story of the +Black Riders?” Ted asked.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_149">[Pg 149]</span></p> + +<p>There was a general nod of assent. He looked +at his watch, shaking his head.</p> + +<p>“It is getting too late now,” he said. “But +I’ll tell it to you after supper tomorrow night.”</p> + +<p>Back of them a stick broke sharply and a few +of them turned their heads to look in the direction +of the tents. But in the talk that followed +no one paid any further attention to it.</p> + +<p>On the following evening, after the supper, +Ted faced an expectant group of boys. They +were ranged in a bow formation, with the ends +drawn in toward the middle, and Ted stood +near the fire. They were very quiet and he began +at once.</p> + +<p>“Most of you fellows know something about +the history of the Revolutionary War at the +time that Washington and his men were in Valley +Forge, about forty miles from here, and the +British were having a gay old time in Philadelphia. +The British and the Hessians were all +around here, a fine, fully equipped army of men, +while the ragged, cold, heroic Americans were +freezing over in Valley Forge. That was in the +winter of 1777 and 1778, if my memory serves +me correctly, and things in this particular part +of the country were in pretty bad shape.”</p> + +<p>“There was a man down in Germantown by +the name of Simon Reed, and he was a patriot +who had never run away even in the face of the<span class="pagenum" id="Page_150">[Pg 150]</span> +British. He knew that up in these mountains +there were some wild, hard-fighting farmers, +and he used to slip out this way nights to get +them organized. Right in this hollow they used +to meet, all dressed in black, all of them riding +black horses, and here they’d make up their +plans to annoy the British. They used to go +stealing out of here and lay in wait for stray +British baggage trains, and then they’d swoop +down on them and capture them. All through the +winter they did such good work for Washington +that they came to be recognized as the Black +Riders. You know, during the Revolution, +there were a number of cracker-jack bands of +fighting men who just hung onto the British +flanks and worried them to death, Marion’s men +in the South, and Morgan’s Riflemen, Light-Horse +Harry Lee’s men, and others. These +Black Riders were a smaller bunch, but they +helped a lot.”</p> + +<p>“After awhile things got so hot for them +around here that Washington had them taken +into the regular army as part of Light-Horse +Harry Lee’s division and they ceased to be +known as the Black Riders from then on. But +people around here always remembered them +from the days before they joined Lee and this +spot had always been known as their camp.”</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_151">[Pg 151]</span></p> + +<p>“Gosh, that’s a great story!” exclaimed +Drummer.</p> + +<p>“It must have been great to have met here +and planned their raids,” said another boy, +looking around him.</p> + +<p>“Wish I could see what one looked like,” +said Bob Gilmore.</p> + +<p>The words were scarcely out of his mouth +when something happened which left the boys +speechless with wonder. There was a soft flare +of light near them and they all turned their +heads toward the end of the camp nearest the +foot of the mountains, to where a flat, moss-covered +rock jutted out. There on the rock, +lighted by the soft, noiseless glow, was a black +horse and seated upon it, a rider dressed entirely +in black, with a wide black hat pulled over his +face. The glow burned only for a brief second, +but in that second horse and rider stared +straight ahead, and then the flare went out, and +the Black Rider and his black horse disappeared +from view.</p> + + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> + +<div class="chapter"> +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_152">[Pg 152]</span></p> + +<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_XV">CHAPTER XV<br> +<span class="fs70">MUTINY</span></h2> +</div> + +<p>The silence that succeeded the vision of the +Black Rider on the rock was a vast and throbbing +one, and the senses of the boys reeled +slightly under the shock. Ted still stood in his +position staring toward the rock on which the +fascinating thing had showed, his heart beating +like a trip-hammer and his mouth curiously +dry. In the very atmosphere there was a sense +of unreality.</p> + +<p>The figure had been real, yet ghostly. All of +them were sure that they had seen an actual +man seated on a very real horse exposed for an +instant on the rock, and yet the very immoveableness +of it inspired a feeling of awe. There +was no second flush of light and nothing broke +the silence.</p> + +<p>Then the tongues of the boys were unloosed +like a flood and they all talked at once. They +scrambled to their feet, confused and uncertain. +The fire had burned so low that the darkness +pressed in tightly upon them, and a few, +with more presence of mind than the rest, threw<span class="pagenum" id="Page_153">[Pg 153]</span> +some fresh wood on the fire, where it blazed +up and dimly showed the rock upon which the +Black Rider had appeared. But there was no +sign of him now.</p> + +<p>“What in the world do you suppose that +was?” Buck demanded, bounding to Ted’s +side.</p> + +<p>“You certainly have me,” was the fervent +reply. “I never saw anything like it in my life. +Bob had just said that he would like to see a +Black Rider and one just glowed out. It is beyond +me.”</p> + +<p>“If anybody believes in ghosts, that was +surely a ghost of a former Black Rider,” said +Buck. “But there is a trick in it somewhere. +Look how he just glowed and then went out. +Come on, let’s investigate that rock.”</p> + +<p>Without argument Ted took the lantern and +he had taken two strides before Buck could +catch up with him. Ted was trying to get the +incident straight in his mind and he was eager +to see that rock. A few of the boys straggled +after them, but the bigger group remained near +the campfires.</p> + +<p>Arriving at the rock the two older boys +quickly bent forward and looked at the flat top +of the big stone. There was a slight film of +moss on it and the moss was marked by the feet<span class="pagenum" id="Page_154">[Pg 154]</span> +of a horse, very faintly, but marked, nevertheless.</p> + +<p>“Well, it was a sure enough horse, anyway,” +commented Ted, as he kept flashing the light +around the rock. “Look here!”</p> + +<p>He pointed out a thin white line with purple +edges which ran across the rock. Buck studied +it, but for the moment its meaning escaped him.</p> + +<p>“What is it?” he asked.</p> + +<p>“Evidently it was a line of powder, something +like flashlight powder, only calculated to +burn longer,” explained Ted. “Whoever led +the horse out here set a powder train and then +got on the horse and waited. He must have +been able to hear all that we said around the +campfire, and Bob’s words gave him just the +cue he wanted. Somehow or other, maybe by +a small pocket battery wire, he set off the powder +and played spirit, if that is what he was +meant to be.”</p> + +<p>“I guess that is so,” nodded Buck. “Say, +you remember that snapping sound we heard +last night?”</p> + +<p>“Yes, and I guess I see what you mean. +This fellow must have heard us planning and +then he planned a little plan of his own. I’ll +bet that fellow is in and around our camp more +than we know about!”</p> + +<p>“Believe me, we must lay our hands on that<span class="pagenum" id="Page_155">[Pg 155]</span> +fellow,” said Buck, grimly. “We had better +begin to lay some traps for him when we get +back.”</p> + +<p>“Yes, we’ve simply got to get him. Come +on and see if we can follow the tracks of the +horse’s hoofs.”</p> + +<p>They were able to find the spot where the +horse had stepped onto the rock and a few hoof +prints nearby, but the man who had arranged +the thing had done his work well. For yards +around the ground was half rock and no print +showed.</p> + +<p>“No use hunting around any more tonight,” +said Ted, after they had spent a half hour in +fruitless effort. “In daylight we might be able +to see something worth while, but never with the +light of the lantern. I think those hoofs must +have been muffled.”</p> + +<p>“Oh, there is no doubt of that,” replied Buck. +“There was no sound when the horse was led +out on the rock and no sound when he retreated. +This man knows what he is doing.”</p> + +<p>“Yes, and do you know, we’re dealing with an +educated man and no Jerry Jackson from +Hogs’ Hollow. This man knows more than one +thing and when we find a man who is a historian +we’ll have our man. He knew just how a Black +Rider should be dressed and he did the thing to<span class="pagenum" id="Page_156">[Pg 156]</span> +perfection. Maybe he is doing it for a big joke, +I don’t know.”</p> + +<p>“But cutting our tent ropes is no joke, I don’t +care how well educated a man is!” reminded +Buck, as they made their way back toward the +camp.</p> + +<p>“Oh, I agree with you there and I must confess +that I can’t begin to see his idea. If he +just wants to get rid of us, he is going to a lot +of trouble, because we aren’t going. On the +other hand, is there something around there +that he doesn’t want us to see or know it is +going on?”</p> + +<p>“That is something we’ll have to find out,” +Buck answered. “I hope we find out soon, too, +because this stuff is getting my goat. Well, I +see that the boys are still around the fires. They +must have received a pretty rough shock this +time.”</p> + +<p>As the two chums approached the group they +noted that there were two distinct sections of +it, one centering around Drummer and the other +around Ralph Plum. They were strangely silent +as the two leaders came in and no one asked a +single question.</p> + +<p>“Well, somebody likes to play jokes on us, +and that Black Rider one was a good one,” +smiled Ted.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_157">[Pg 157]</span></p> + +<p>“That wasn’t a joke, Thorn,” said Ralph +Plum, quietly.</p> + +<p>“Well, I suppose it was a joke,” countered +Ted. “We found that somebody had put some +light powder on the rock and then lighted it so +as to show himself off as a Black Rider. If +they didn’t do it for a joke, I don’t know what +they did it for.”</p> + +<p>“Well, some of us are through with this +camping trip,” said Plum. “We’re going +home!”</p> + +<p>Ted counted the boys who were grouped +around Plum. “Seven of you,” he said, coolly. +“All of you going home?”</p> + +<p>“Yes, they are going home and I’m going to +take them home,” sneered Plum, his self-control +breaking down. Each day had added to his +irritation at the small part he played in the +camp and he was aroused at the chance which +had come his way. “These boys aren’t safe +in this camp and I’m going to take them home +and let their parents know that I brought them +safely home, too!”</p> + +<p>Ted smiled slightly. “Yes, I’m pretty sure +that you’ll do that, Plum!”</p> + +<p>Ralph Plum stepped closer and tapped Ted +on the chest. “You know just a little too much, +Thorn! I don’t like the way you have been +running this camp, anyway. I’m one of the<span class="pagenum" id="Page_158">[Pg 158]</span> +older fellows here and I wasn’t even made a +tent captain. My family gave money to this club +and I don’t even get any recognition out of it. +I told you several days ago that this camp +wasn’t safe and you wouldn’t listen and go +somewhere else. Now, I’m going to take these +boys home with me, and you won’t stop me!”</p> + +<p>Ted’s temper trembled dangerously, but he +turned to the other boys. “Do you boys want +to go home?” he asked them. They looked at +each other and then one or two nodded.</p> + +<p>“I don’t think they really want to go,” cried +out Drummer, angrily. “Plum has been telling +them that they ought to go home and making +up big yarns about something happening +to them if they don’t get out of here! All he +wants is to get them home and get a lot of +credit for it!”</p> + +<p>“Say, you just keep your——” began Plum, +lunging toward Drummer, who immediately +struck an attitude of defense.</p> + +<p>“Wait a minute!” Ted cut in, stopping +Plum’s rush. “Is it true that you have been +working up fear in the minds of the boys?”</p> + +<p>“No!” shouted Plum. “But some of us decided +that we have had enough of this camp and +that we are going home. You can’t stop us, +Thorn.”</p> + +<p>“I don’t want to stop you,” replied Ted,<span class="pagenum" id="Page_159">[Pg 159]</span> +quietly. “If you want to go, you can go ahead. +I can’t keep you here by force and I wouldn’t +try to. Only, you are doing the very thing that +the unknown person wishes you to do. Somebody +is trying to scare us out of this camp and +they haven’t succeeded in doing it yet. Now +you decide that you will go home and admit +defeat to this man who wishes you to clear out. +Not very brave, is it?”</p> + +<p>“Never mind about brave!” growled Plum. +“There is only one reason why you don’t want +to give up the encampment and that is because +you are afraid the trustees will say that you +gave it up and they won’t ask you to be big +boss another year!”</p> + +<p>“I hadn’t thought of it that way,” smiled +Ted. “Are you thinking of starting for home +tonight?”</p> + +<p>“No, but we will the first thing in the morning,” +promised Plum.</p> + +<p>“All right,” nodded Ted. “When the daylight +comes if there are any of you who still +think that you want to go home, why, just march +right ahead. The rest of us will finish out our +vacation here in Black Riders’ Camp.”</p> + +<p>“You bet we will,” said Bob Gilmore.</p> + +<p>“You are welcome to do it,” retorted Plum. +“It is as plain as can be that somebody doesn’t<span class="pagenum" id="Page_160">[Pg 160]</span> +want us around here, so why should we hang +around?”</p> + +<p>“Who has a right to chase us out of this +camp?” demanded Buck.</p> + +<p>“I don’t know, but I do know that I won’t +stay here any longer,” said Plum flatly, and he +walked off with his own friends, one of whom +Ted was surprised to note was the small Clayton +boy. He excused the little fellow in his mind.</p> + +<p>“Oh, well, he’s pretty young and he’s probably +scared,” he thought.</p> + +<p>The rebels hung around the tents talking and +the loyal party stood at somewhat of a loss +near the fire. Buck was inclined to be more +vigorous about it than Ted was.</p> + +<p>“That Plum needs a good punch on the +nose!” he declared, with emphasis.</p> + +<p>“I guess he’d go home, punch or no punch,” +grinned Ted.</p> + +<p>“Yes, but he’d really draw those youngsters +with him just on his own arguments. You +ought to talk to them and try and keep them +here with us.”</p> + +<p>“I’m going to wait until morning before I +say anything,” said Ted. “By that time some +of the boys will have experienced a change of +heart. Tonight they are scared and that will +take time to work off. Did he try to win over +all of you fellows?”</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_161">[Pg 161]</span></p> + +<p>“Yes,” replied Charlie. “When you had gone +to examine the rock he told us that the place +was unsafe and that he was sure that some +dangerous spirit was controlling the camp. +Drummer asked him if he believed in ghosts and +he said no, but he wasn’t going to stay in the +camp any longer. He worked on the smaller +fellows by saying that you would never give +up until something serious happened to somebody, +because the club was going to pay you +and Buck something and if you didn’t make the +camp a success you wouldn’t be paid.”</p> + +<p>“Well, that is news to us,” Ted smiled to his +chum.</p> + +<p>“The same old argument every agitator uses +when he wants to start trouble,” said Buck.</p> + +<p>“Well, let’s turn in and forget it until morning,” +advised Ted.</p> + +<p>They passed the silent group near the tents +and entered the shelters, proceeding at once to +get undressed. It looked for a moment as though +the ones outside were going to remain up, but +they straggled in at last and went to bed. As +Ted was crawling in the small boy came in and +started to undress.</p> + +<p>“I’m not going, Ted,” he said. “I’m going +to stay with you.”</p> + +<p>“Good boy!” was Ted’s only comment.</p> + +<p>The night was peaceful and in the morning<span class="pagenum" id="Page_162">[Pg 162]</span> +the two bands again formed in groups, the ones +who were going to leave sticking close to Plum +and the others working at the meal as though +nothing had happened. The rebels did their +share but said nothing and they ate in an unbroken +silence.</p> + +<p>Besides Tom Clayton there had been another +desertion from the ranks of those who were +leaving. Alfred Paulson refused to go with +Plum and his party. The new section leader +tried to argue him into it.</p> + +<p>“No, Ted is the leader of this camp,” said +Alfred, firmly.</p> + +<p>“He was the leader of it, you mean!” Plum +said loudly. “Pretty soon he’ll be leading himself +home all alone! Something else will happen +around here and then the rest of the fellows +will come running home, so you might just as +well come now.”</p> + +<p>“I’m going to stay right here with Ted!” +said Alfred, stubbornly.</p> + +<p>The breakfast was over and the rebels who +were on committees helped to put the camp in +order. When it was over with Plum spoke to +his four young companions and they went +straight to their tents and began to get their +duffle together. The others stood and watched +them in silence for a time.</p> + +<p>“Confound it, this breaking up of the camp<span class="pagenum" id="Page_163">[Pg 163]</span> +will give us somewhat of a black eye!” +grumbled Buck.</p> + +<p>“No it won’t.” Ted shook his head. “But +it won’t do this camp site any good.” The ones +who were about to depart were now ready and +they stood around waiting for something. Ted +sauntered over to Plum.</p> + +<p>“Going to walk all the way home?” he asked, +as his own friends gathered around.</p> + +<p>“Sure! I guess we can do it, can’t we?”</p> + +<p>“You can, of course. It is between thirty and +forty miles, and the fellows you are taking with +you aren’t used to any such hikes as that. You +have planned to camp somewhere by the road, +of course? You are going to buy food somewhere, +too, aren’t you?”</p> + +<p>“I’ll attend to that,” was the confident reply. +“I have money and we can camp anywhere in +a field. Don’t you worry, Thorn, I will manage. +I don’t do things like you do.”</p> + +<p>“No, you don’t,” agreed Ted, softly, his +hands sunk in his pockets.</p> + +<p>Plum turned to Ted’s tent, a frown on his +face. “Come on, hurry up!” he cried, angrily, +and to Ted’s surprise Tom Clayton appeared +with his pack on. The little fellow did not look +happy.</p> + +<p>“What is the matter, Tom?” Ted asked. +“Did you have a change of heart?”</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_164">[Pg 164]</span></p> + +<p>“No, but Plum says I better come home,” +replied the boy. “He says if I don’t he’ll tell +my mother and she’ll come up here and take +me home. I don’t like to leave you, but I don’t +want my mother to worry.”</p> + +<p>The careless look vanished at once from Ted’s +face and his hands came out of his pockets. He +squared his shoulders as he looked Plum in the +face.</p> + +<p>“He won’t go home and tell your mother, +Tom,” the camp leader said, quietly. His tone +changed and hardened as he pointed his finger +at the trouble-maker. “You, Plum, take off +your pack, because I’m going to give you a good +thrashing!”</p> + + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> + +<div class="chapter"> +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_165">[Pg 165]</span></p> + +<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_XVI">CHAPTER XVI<br> +<span class="fs70">THINGS ARE SETTLED MAN-FASHION</span></h2> +</div> + +<p>For a moment after Ted made his announcement +there was a complete silence as the boys looked +from one to the other of them. Plum just stared +at Ted, who looked him levelly in the eyes.</p> + +<p>“You’re going to what?” demanded Plum, +slowly.</p> + +<p>“I’m going to give you a sound thrashing for +being a trouble maker in this camp and for trying +to force Tom to go home with you,” Ted repeated.</p> + +<p>His last wish was to stage a fight in front +of the small boys, for he did not wish to set an +example of fighting if he could help it. There +was no physical reason why he should not engage +Plum in combat, because the boy, though +younger, was broader of shoulder and heavier +than he was, but Ted was determined that he +had something definite coming to him for his +actions. He rather hoped that Plum would back +down, so that the smaller boys would not be +treated to an exhibition of a fight between two<span class="pagenum" id="Page_166">[Pg 166]</span> +older boys, but he felt warmly that Plum deserved +a trouncing.</p> + +<p>But as it so happened, Plum was in no mood +to back down. Eagerly he welcomed the prospect +of a fight and on the previous night he +had purposely pushed Ted rather roughly on the +chest with the sole object of angering him and +starting a fight. He knew now that he would +have to prove himself in the eyes of his friends +and show his leadership. Long ago and more +than once he had looked Ted over with a calculating +eye and the conclusion that he could +“lick” him at any time had been in his mind +for several days. It was with visible joy that +he accepted the invitation for battle.</p> + +<p>“You’re going to thrash me, eh?” he sneered, +thrusting forward his chin. “So that’s what +you think you are going to do, is it? Why, if I +couldn’t tie you up in a knot I’d go back home +and join a kindergarten!”</p> + +<p>“Join whatever you please, but take your +pack off,” nodded Ted.</p> + +<p>The pack was slipped off in a rush and the +coat followed. Ted stood ready and waiting +while Plum rolled up his sleeves. The other +boys crowded around, some of the smaller ones +looking a bit scared. Tom Clayton put in a +last word.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_167">[Pg 167]</span></p> + +<p>“You mustn’t fight on account of me,” he +said, looking distressed.</p> + +<p>Before Ted could reply Plum struck in with: +“Don’t worry, we aren’t going to fight over +you, kid. This Thorn has had a trimming coming +to him for a long time and I’m going to +give it to him! He’s been the big boss around +here for some time and he has put it on thick. +Telling us when to go to bed and when to get up +and when to eat and when to do everything, +like he was the king of the country or something! +When we fellows who are going home +do get home we’ll go off on a camping trip of +our own and we’ll do things to suit ourselves. +Get on guard, Thorn!”</p> + +<p>“Wait a minute!” cried Buck, who was burning +to take Ted’s place, but who kept quiet with +some difficulty. “This affair has to be run right. +Two minute rounds, and I’m the boss! You +start and finish when I say so!”</p> + +<p>Plum dropped his hands to his side. “Say, +this is a fight, not a boxing match! I want to +lick him in a hurry and I don’t want to have +to stop right when I’m going strong.”</p> + +<p>“If you want to do it in a hurry, two minutes +ought to be plenty of time,” retorted Buck. +He took out his watch. “Here, all the rest of +you get back and form a big circle. When I say<span class="pagenum" id="Page_168">[Pg 168]</span> +time you start and when I say time again, you +stop. Got that clear, Plum?”</p> + +<p>“Sure. Let’s get going and stop all the hot +air!”</p> + +<p>Buck looked at his watch, and then, “Time!” +he called.</p> + +<p>Ted and Plum faced each other grimly, +squared off for the battle.</p> + +<p>In his crouching attitude Plum looked bulky +and menacing, while Ted looked cool and alert. +Plum began to advance, his steps cautious and +his fists poised in the attitude of a boxer. He +had taken lessons in the art and was no novice +at it, while Ted had confined his activities to +neighborhood scraps which had been informal +affairs and in which he had been as often beaten +as victorious. But he had no fear of Plum, +who was to be counted on for more in the line +of bluster and noise than for anything else.</p> + +<p>They were close now and Ted tried a light +shot which was quickly blocked by the other +boy. Plum then jabbed quickly at the camp +leader with his right, stopped the blow halfway +and landed with his left on the shoulder. That +tap, light as it was, started the fight off in earnest, +for Ted bored in, disregarding a few shots +at close range and the fight was actually on.</p> + +<p>Plum knew how to box well and most of the +close-in blows which Ted directed toward him<span class="pagenum" id="Page_169">[Pg 169]</span> +were deftly and completely blocked. In return +he shook Ted up, planting his blows almost at +will, though Ted kept his chin covered up. When +Buck called time for the first round they had +just warmed up.</p> + +<p>Ted retired to one side of the ring to recover +his breath and Plum walked across to the other. +“How many rounds is this thing going to be?” +Ralph demanded.</p> + +<p>“It will go on until one of you admits that +he is licked,” replied Buck. He glanced again +at his watch. “Time is up. Go to it.”</p> + +<p>This time Plum was out to win. He rushed +in with his head down and his heavy fists swung +like battering rams. Ted was forced to put +all the strength he had into his footwork, for +Plum was on the march and would not be +denied. He had the weight to keep on coming +and Ted was unable to stop him. There was +no cautious poking this time, but serious rushing +and stepping aside. To keep his feet at all +Ted was forced to move fast.</p> + +<p>During this round, busy as he was, Ted saw +that he was making a mistake by allowing Plum +to get the start. With a rushing start and the +power of a heavier body the big boy had everything +his own way and it was impossible for +Ted to do more than keep him off. From his +football playing Ted was fast and nimble, but<span class="pagenum" id="Page_170">[Pg 170]</span> +he hadn’t gone into the argument just to run +around the ring. Plum must be punished or he +would draw most of the boys away from the +camp and spoil a perfectly good Summer.</p> + +<p>When the round was over he thought seriously +of the affair in which he was engaged. +It was no good natured argument that didn’t +matter very much whether he won or not. He +realized that he must win, or the breaking up of +the camp would be a blow from which he would +not recover in a long time. Most of the boys +would desert him and return home with Plum, +he was sure, and the failure would make the +trustees of the club regret their choice of him +as the leader. Boys naturally follow the one +who can lead, even if that leadership is attained +by the use of ready fists, and Plum, swaggering +in the triumph of the physical victory, could +split the camp so as to spoil its effectiveness. +It was imperative that he win the fight before +him, not only for the good of the camp, but for +the effect it would have on the minds of the +boys.</p> + +<p>He looked across at Plum and saw that he +was breathing heavily. Plum was not an outdoor +boy in the strictest sense of the word and +he did not play on any athletic team. He was +just naturally strong and he did enjoy boxing, +a subject he knew something about, as a dozen<span class="pagenum" id="Page_171">[Pg 171]</span> +sore spots, combined with a split lip, led Ted +to believe. But his wind was not good and his +chest rose and fell in a way that looked painful.</p> + +<p>“My best bet is to make him run around +after me this round and then finish him in the +next,” thought Ted, as Buck called time again.</p> + +<p>Plum again charged and Ted side-stepped, +leading him a chase around the ring. The boys +had been rather silent the first two rounds but +now, gripped with excitement, they called the +names of their favorites, and Plum’s name was +as prominent as Ted’s. Just as Plum had calculated +his readiness to fight and his swagger +had won the smaller boys to him and they were +loudly shouting for his success.</p> + +<p>Ted found difficulty in keeping out of Plum’s +way and his movements annoyed the other. +“Come on, fight, and don’t run away!” roared +Plum. “If you are scared, just quit! I’ve got +you licked, anyway!”</p> + +<p>The speech was an unfortunate one, for in +giving it the trouble-maker had raised his head +and carelessly lowered his arms a bit. Most +of the blows so far had been body blows, both +boys keeping their faces well sheltered, but as +Plum spoke Ted jabbed a blow at him which +Plum was unable to guard against. It landed +with a resounding smack against his cheek bone<span class="pagenum" id="Page_172">[Pg 172]</span> +and his head jarred. As he hesitated in surprise +Ted hooked one into his ribs.</p> + +<p>By this time Plum was on guard again and +stung to fury he waded in while Ted retreated. +Around the ring they went, Plum making a +furious attack which was beginning to break +down Ted’s guard. Just then Buck called time +and Ted stepped back.</p> + +<p>Plum turned to Buck, his eyes furious and +his face red. “I don’t care a hang about time!” +he shouted. “I didn’t want to make this a boxing +match, anyway, and I won’t make it one! +I’m going to show Thorn that he can’t boss me +and tell me he’ll thrash me and that’s what +I’m going to do. Come on, you, put up your +hands!”</p> + +<p>“Nothing doing!” snapped Buck, leaping into +the circle and thrusting himself in between +them. “You’re going to run this according to +rules!”</p> + +<p>“Like fun I am! You get out of the way or +I’ll take you on!”</p> + +<p>“With the greatest of pleasure!” promptly +cried Buck, squaring off.</p> + +<p>“I’d just as soon give it to you as to him!” +yelled Plum. This was a well calculated piece +of acting, and the boys who stood for Plum felt +him rise heroically in their eyes.</p> + +<p>Ted pushed Buck to one side. “This is my<span class="pagenum" id="Page_173">[Pg 173]</span> +fight, Buck, old man. Put your watch away, because +this is a fight to the finish!”</p> + +<p>Buck reluctantly allowed himself to be pushed +out of the ring, at the same time pushing his +watch back in his pocket. Then Ted advanced +determinedly on Plum and the latter began a +crouching advance on him. There was now no +more boxing and no more dodging around. +Plum was tired and his breath came heavily, +while Ted was filled with quiet, steady purpose. +He felt that there was but one thing to do, and +that was to wade in and finish up the other boy +as rapidly as possible. When they came together +with a shock there was no more boxing +and feinting, but they stormed in close and exchanged +punches with determination.</p> + +<p>Here Ted found that he was equal at least +of the other and they traded some jarring +punches at close range. The breath of the +heavier boy was growing shorter, while Ted +was in no way distressed. With a mighty lunge +Plum shot a stiff punch at Ted’s face, and the +latter, drawing his head to one side, countered +with a sharp one to Plum’s ribs. Plum grunted, +turned, and Ted found his jaw unguarded for +an instant. He found it a moment later with +his left fist, and as Plum staggered Ted bored +in for the finish.</p> + +<p>And it was the finish. Fighting blindly, Plum<span class="pagenum" id="Page_174">[Pg 174]</span> +gave ground and lost his grip on his guard. In +bewilderment he raised and lowered his hands +and Ted, keenly alive to what was going on, +punished him at will. A left to the jaw and +another right to the cheek sent Plum down in +a heap, while Ted stood panting, waiting for +him to get up.</p> + +<p>But Plum was through and he knew it. +Moaning feebly, he felt of his jaw and his face, +which was beginning to swell. Unsteadily he +got to his feet.</p> + +<p>“Ready for more?” Ted asked, quietly.</p> + +<p>“No, I’ve had enough,” Plum gasped, wiping +a cut lip. “I’m—I’m going home.”</p> + +<p>Ted turned to the others around him. “Plum +is going home. Are any of you fellows going +with him?”</p> + +<p>There was no reply. They looked from Plum +to Ted but no one spoke. Slowly Plum rolled +down his sleeves, put on his coat and slung +his pack on his shoulders.</p> + +<p>“Anybody going with me?” he asked, keeping +his eyes away from Ted and Buck.</p> + +<p>No one spoke up and the boys who were +ready to go looked foolishly at the ground. Ted +spoke to them sharply.</p> + +<p>“This is the last call,” he said. “If any of +you are going with Plum, go now! But if you +don’t go with him, remember that you are to<span class="pagenum" id="Page_175">[Pg 175]</span> +stay here, subject to the orders of Buck and myself, +and we’re not leaving this spot until Labor +Day unless something happens that we couldn’t +stay to face. So if you want to leave, leave +now.”</p> + +<p>Still no one moved and Plum put on his hat, +his air one of sullen defiance. He looked around +him sneeringly.</p> + +<p>“All right, you kids just stay here and hang +around Thorn, if you want to!” he said. “But +I’ll fix this camp! I’m going home and tell all +over town what is happening, and I’ll bet your +fathers and mothers will come running for +you.”</p> + +<p>“You just go ahead and do that, Plum!” advised +Buck. “When the parents come out here +we’ll show them that we are still in camp and +that you were the only one who got scared and +ran home! You, the biggest boy in the camp, +went home, because you were afraid to stay!”</p> + +<p>At once Plum saw his case. He could not +possibly remain in camp after his thrashing +from Ted and if he went back to town and told +any stories the result would be as Buck had +pictured it. He had lost all around and the +knowledge was a bitter one.</p> + +<p>He turned and walked out of the camp without +a word or a backward glance.</p> + +<p>They stood and watched him go in silence,<span class="pagenum" id="Page_176">[Pg 176]</span> +the ring still unbroken. Then first one boy +and then another of the ones who had packed +to go with him, shed his knapsack and blanket, +tossing them in the tents. The atmosphere +seemed to have cleared magically.</p> + +<p>“Well, sir!” enthused Buck, slapping Ted +on the back. “That was a bang-up fight! Now +that he is gone things will be a little sweeter +around here. He was the big disturbing +element.”</p> + +<p>“Except the fellow who has been annoying +us all this time,” reminded Ted.</p> + +<p>“Yes, that is so. If we could only get rid +of him as you did of Plum.”</p> + +<p>“Maybe we can,” said Ted. “I have thought +out a plan to trap that party.”</p> + + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> + +<div class="chapter"> +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_177">[Pg 177]</span></p> + +<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_XVII">CHAPTER XVII<br> +<span class="fs70">BUCK’S SQUAD TAKES THE FIELD</span></h2> +</div> + +<p>Ted refused at the time to reveal the details +of his plan for trapping the person who was +annoying them in their camp, but he promised +that he would later on. Feeling that a good +part of the morning had been wasted in the +details of his fight with Plum, he preferred that +they get things done around the camp. This +was attended to and then he and Buck had two +important matters to attend to.</p> + +<p>The first was that of seeking the tracks of +the horse who had posed on the rock on the +previous evening, with a view to tracing the +animal in the hope of obtaining some clue as +to its owner. They went to the rock and +searched carefully around, moving away from +it with eyes alert to pick up the mark of a +hoof, but the ground around was too rocky to +help them any. Some fifty feet away from it +they found one print but that was all, and they +finally gave it up as a bad job.</p> + +<p>“When that fellow brought the horse down +to the rock he made a good job of it,” Ted admitted,<span class="pagenum" id="Page_178">[Pg 178]</span> +mopping his forehead. “He didn’t mean +that we were to find any hoof prints.”</p> + +<p>“But a horse is pretty heavy, and I should +think he would be bound to leave marks,” murmured +Buck.</p> + +<p>“Well, there is a way to do everything,” said +Ted, with a grin. “I remember a trick I used +to work on my father. I used to go swimming +over in Tier’s Pond that summer you were away +and the only way to get there without hoofing +it was to take the horse and carriage, because +I was small then and didn’t have the old car. +But I knew if my dad saw the wheel prints and +the hoof prints in the gravel, he’d know I had +taken the carriage and the horse, which he +didn’t want me to take, so I put a couple of +blankets down and walked the horse across +them, then went back and picked up the first +one and put it down ahead of the horse’s hoofs, +and in that way we got out of the drive without +leaving a mark. When I came back at night I +used to spread them out again and get in without +so much as a trace showing. Maybe that +is what our friend of last night did.”</p> + +<p>“I wouldn’t doubt it. He had everything +carefully planned, and we’ll have to hustle some +to catch up with him.”</p> + +<p>After lunch the two leaders went to the farmhouse +and there Ted used the telephone to call<span class="pagenum" id="Page_179">[Pg 179]</span> +Lawyer Calvert. When the president of the +club got on the wire Ted told him the events +of the past few days and narrated his reason +for thrashing Plum. The lawyer listened without +comment until he was finished.</p> + +<p>“You did just what was right, Thorn,” he +told Ted. “That boy had it coming to him for +a long time. When he gets in town I’ll see to +it that he doesn’t spread any stories around +among the parents. But are you sure that +everything is all right? You don’t need any +special protection?”</p> + +<p>“I don’t think so, Mr. Calvert,” replied Ted. +“So far we have managed to stand it and I +think that we’ll be able to face it to the end. +I have some plans for setting a trap for the +man, whoever he is, and I think we’ll fix him +so that he’ll stay away. If things should get +serious I would let you know, and if necessary +abandon the camp, but I’m pretty sure that it +won’t come to that.”</p> + +<p>“All right, just as you say. You are in complete +charge and I rely on you. If you need +any more money with which to buy provisions, +call me and I’ll see to it that you get it.”</p> + +<p>Ted promised to do so and with that the conversation +came to an end. The farmer and his +wife had listened openly to the conversation on<span class="pagenum" id="Page_180">[Pg 180]</span> +Ted’s part, and they quite frankly let him see +it in their subsequent words.</p> + +<p>“Sho, you boys havin’ a little trouble down +to your camp, ain’t you?” the farmer said, as +Ted joined Buck in the kitchen of the house.</p> + +<p>“Yes, but we’ll get at the bottom of it pretty +soon,” affirmed Ted. “By the way, if you +should hear from any one around that they know +anything about it, you might let me know.”</p> + +<p>“I’ll sure do that,” promised the farmer. +“Anybody ought to be ashamed to go botherin’ +you while you ain’t doing nothing but enjoyin’ +yourself campin’.”</p> + +<p>“I’d be scared to death to stay down there at +night,” the farmer’s wife shook her head.</p> + +<p>The next move on Ted’s part was strange +even to Buck. They went to Montvery and +there Ted bought ten cheap flashlights.</p> + +<p>“What is the idea?” Buck demanded. “We +have lanterns in the camp and we don’t really +need flashlights. A few of us have them already +and there is plenty of oil for the lamps.”</p> + +<p>“I know, but I want every boy to have a +flashlight. It is part of the plan which I will +unfold when we get back to camp.”</p> + +<p>When they arrived at the camp they found +the boys in swimming, with their clothing piled +in plain sight on the bank of Bear Creek. “We +didn’t trust this place,” Drummer confided.<span class="pagenum" id="Page_181">[Pg 181]</span> +“We were afraid if we left the clothes in the +tent somebody would walk off with ’em or make +them vanish or something!”</p> + +<p>When they were all out and dressed Ted +called them in a knot around him. They stood +away from the tents and the tress, out in the +open space.</p> + +<p>“I want to tell you what I have in mind out +here where no one could possibly be listening,” +he began. “So many funny things happen +around here that I’m afraid to talk for fear +that my words will be overheard. What I wanted +to tell you is this: Up until now this pest has +been scaring us and running away, laughing up +his sleeve—if he has a sleeve! We don’t know +enough about him to know how he does dress, +unless he’s a fake Black Rider all the time. +Every time he has bothered us we sit here looking +dazed and let him get away from us. Now, +my idea is this: to create two distinct squads, +a camp squad and a chasing squad. We’ll settle +after awhile who is to be who, but for the +time being we’ll see what each one is to do.”</p> + +<p>“This afternoon I bought flashlights for those +who haven’t any and from now on, as soon as +it gets dark, we’ll wear ’em on our belts. Don’t +leave them in your tents for a single minute! +We have lanterns in the tents, but by the time +we get the lanterns lighted and started off, the<span class="pagenum" id="Page_182">[Pg 182]</span> +would-be terror could get a good start and we’d +never nail him. Because the chasing squad is +to form and run after the man the minute +there is a suspicious sound around the camp!”</p> + +<p>There was a stir of expectancy and the boys +looked a bit startled but more pleased than anything +else. Ted went on: “Buck will be the +head of the chasing squad and I’ll take care of +the camp squad. The reason I don’t want every +one to go running out and chasing up the mountain +is because I don’t think the camp should +ever be left alone. The chasing squad will be +composed of the fastest runners, and also the +biggest fellows, just in case you have to use +any force on anyone, though it isn’t likely that +a bunch of boys such as we are could ever +handle a grown man, but if we can get a line on +the direction he runs in we’ll begin to learn +something.”</p> + +<p>“You get the point, don’t you? As soon as +there is any unusual noise, Buck’s squad forms +and runs in that direction. The rest of us stay +in camp and guard it against surprise. I’ve +got another thought in regard to trapping a +visitor, but this one will do for now. From +this time on we’ll be doing something besides +sitting still and just listening and looking +scared. Now, lets pick squads.”</p> + +<p>The biggest and oldest boys, seven in number,<span class="pagenum" id="Page_183">[Pg 183]</span> +were immediately picked for Buck’s squad +and the rest were reserved for the camp watch. +Some of the boys were disappointed because +they couldn’t run with the active group, but +Ted was determined to make his two sections +effective. There was a lot of chattering on the +subject and the leader was compelled to warn +them to keep things quiet.</p> + +<p>“Think they will be eager for action when +the time comes?” Buck asked.</p> + +<p>“I guess they will. They know that a bunch +of them will be in action and that makes a +difference. I think it will work out.”</p> + +<p>The flashlights were passed out and from that +time on the boys carried them on their belts +and longed for action. But two nights sped by +without anything unusual happening and they +began to think that everything was over, when +the third evening brought action suddenly.</p> + +<p>They were sitting around the campfire when +there was a sliding sound back of them and a +tiny avalanche of dirt and stones rolled down +behind the tents. There was a crashing noise +as though someone had landed in the bushes, +and then, as they peered in a startled manner +toward the rear of the camp they saw a figure +bolt into the shrubs near the springs.</p> + +<p>“There he goes! Go after him!” shouted +Ted, and Buck frantically pulled at his flashlight.<span class="pagenum" id="Page_184">[Pg 184]</span> +The other boys followed his lead as he +darted off, and in an instant the peaceful camp +was demoralized. The eight boys on the chasing +squad were running across the camp toward +the springs and the others who were to remain +in camp were urging them on at the top of +their lungs.</p> + +<p>Drummer joined Buck and they came to the +bottom of the rise, pushing their way up it with +their lights turned on. They could hear the +sound of the running man in front of them, and +it was evident that he had thrown all caution +to the wind in an endeavor to get away from +them. On flat ground Drummer would not have +been able to keep up with his chief, but his +sturdy legs were good for climbing and he was +able to remain pretty close to Buck’s side. Back +of them the other boys ran along, forgetting +nervousness in the excitement of the chase.</p> + +<p>The camp lay far behind them now and they +noted that the man was taking a course off in +the direction which Farmer Crane had told +them was the way to Hogs’ Hollow. If this +was the man from that region he would speedily +lose them, for it was evident that he knew the +country and at the first opportunity he would +conceal himself and let them hunt for him at +will. But just now he seemed to be putting all +of his strength and skill into his running. He<span class="pagenum" id="Page_185">[Pg 185]</span> +had no light and must have been very familiar +with the surrounding country.</p> + +<p>He was drawing ahead of them now and the +noise of his running footsteps was growing +dimmer. The country became wilder and rocks +protruded jagged heads above the mountain +soil. The woods had given way to open country +thickly sprinkled with bushes and before they +had run many yards further they came across +a narrow road that was little more than a wagon +track. Drummer and Buck were becoming +winded and the other boys had dropped out +of the swift running, though they were still +advancing.</p> + +<p>A stone wall, long and low, loomed up before +them and beyond a set of stones which seemed +more orderly than the ones they had encountered +thus far in their run, attracted their +attention. The flashlights revealed the fact +that they were grave stones and they had arrived +at a little country graveyard. They +stopped to get breath.</p> + +<p>“Ow, that was a tough run!” gasped Drummer, +leaning on the wall.</p> + +<p>“You bet it was!” agreed Buck, as two other +boys came up. “I think he went across this +graveyard.”</p> + +<p>“I don’t hear him,” said Bob, listening intently.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_186">[Pg 186]</span></p> + +<p>All sounds of the pursued had ceased and the +night was silent except for the murmur of the +voices of the other boys, who now came up and +joined them. Buck and Drummer had made +enough noise in their running to serve as a +permanent guide for the others.</p> + +<p>“Maybe he ran right across it and is still +going,” said Charlie, nodding toward the quiet +graveyard.</p> + +<p>“I don’t know, but I’m going in and see if +he is hiding behind a stone,” announced Buck.</p> + +<p>His followers looked startled and uneasy and +he noted the look. “You fellows stay here and +I’ll just take a quick look,” he said, stepping +over the wall. “Put your lights out.”</p> + +<p>“I’ll go with you,” declared Drummer, lifting +one foot over the wall.</p> + +<p>“No, you stay here with the boys. There +aren’t many stones in the yard and it will only +take me a moment. I’ll be right back, so keep +absolutely quiet.”</p> + +<p>With that Buck began his search, looking behind +the stones by the light from his flash. The +graveyard was a little longer than he had been +able to make out from the rays of his light, and +he kept moving away from the boys in the road. +Back of every stone he flashed the light, but +found nothing.</p> + +<p>He was now at the far end of the country<span class="pagenum" id="Page_187">[Pg 187]</span> +cemetery and one large monumental stone alone +remained. He stepped toward it, pressing the +button on the flashlight, for he allowed it to go +out after each flash. As he did so he stepped +around the big stone and instantly sensed the +presence of someone in the darker shadow behind +the shaft.</p> + +<p>But before he could step back or press on +his light a strong arm was thrown around him +and a rough, horny hand was clapped over his +mouth.</p> + + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> + +<div class="chapter"> +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_188">[Pg 188]</span></p> + +<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_XVIII">CHAPTER XVIII<br> +<span class="fs70">AN UNEASY CAMP</span></h2> +</div> + +<p>The boys who had remained in the camp +stood watching and listening as the field squad +rushed off on the trail of the man who had +slipped down into their camp. Small as the +boys were, every one of them wished earnestly +that he had been included in the party delegated +to do the active work, and it was with some +envy that they saw their more favored comrades +run out of the circle of light and enter +the black belt of the woods.</p> + +<p>But Ted had no intention of allowing them +to stand around and watch. There were things +to do and he knew that action would relieve +them of some of their stored up feelings.</p> + +<p>“All right, fellows,” he called to them. +“Let’s get on the job and build big fires. We +don’t know what time the other boys will get +back, and when they do we want to have the +fires going briskly. Get your axes and we’ll +snap to it.”</p> + +<p>“There is a pile of wood near the fire now,” +pointed out one boy.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_189">[Pg 189]</span></p> + +<p>“Yes, but that wood is going on right now,” +replied Ted, piling the pieces of cut wood on +the red fires. “We will have to hustle and cut +up a big supply so that Buck and the boys will +have a guide when they come back. Light the +lanterns and we’ll get busy.”</p> + +<p>The lanterns were lighted and they plunged +into the fringe of the woods. The sound of +several axes rang out as their owners began +to chop the wood for the fire supply. The lanterns +were placed on the ground and made a +neat ring near them and in the circle of this +ring they chopped off dead limbs and split logs. +As soon as the wood was collected they carried +it back and piled it beside the fires.</p> + +<p>Both fires were now going at their best and +the light cast from them lighted up the camp +from all angles. Some of the boys would have +stopped with their first load, but Ted knew that +they might have to wait a long time before their +companions returned, so he kept them at the +task. The pile grew and grew until it towered +above their heads, and in this way fully an +hour went by. At last Ted felt that they had +enough.</p> + +<p>“All right, that will be enough,” he called.</p> + +<p>The work was not yet all over, for the wood +which had been dragged in required to be split +into convenient lengths, although some of the<span class="pagenum" id="Page_190">[Pg 190]</span> +big logs were piled on entire. While the work +went on they kept looking up toward the mountain, +but no sound reached them and they speculated +on the fact.</p> + +<p>“They must have had to run a long way,” +said Alfred, as he split wood.</p> + +<p>“I guess they went clear over the mountain,” +nodded Ted. “It may be that they are trailing +the man.”</p> + +<p>“You don’t suppose that anyone has hurt +them, do you?” another boy asked, anxiously.</p> + +<p>“I hardly think so,” smiled Ted. “One man, +no matter how strong he is, would have a big +job in front of him if he tried to run off with +that bunch of fellows. I guess they’ll be back +pretty soon.”</p> + +<p>But the time dragged on and the boys became +silent, glancing restlessly up the mountain side. +Ted, looking at his watch, saw that it was eleven +o’clock.</p> + +<p>“A good two hours since they went away,” +he thought, somewhat anxiously. “Oh, well, +I suppose time seems longer when you are waiting +for something than it does if you aren’t. +If we only knew what was going on we’d feel +better.”</p> + +<p>He tried to keep the conversation brisk but +the boys would not react. They were visibly +oppressed, and they showed in their dogged<span class="pagenum" id="Page_191">[Pg 191]</span> +silence that they were uneasy. Although none +of them believed for a moment in anything +ghostly, they found the vague stories of the +camp a distinct hindrance to their peace of +mind and the feeling of depression was heavy +upon all of them. Ted wondered if there was +not something that they might do to ward off +the feelings which gripped them off, and he +was thinking busily along this line when a +sound reached their ears.</p> + +<p>It was a low-pitched moaning and it seemed +to come from a point above their camp, in the +pine thicket which covered the knoll there.</p> + +<p>They looked in the direction of the sound, +their blood chilling under its influence. It was +weird and mournful, and the icy shivers ran +up and down the spine of more than one of the +young boys. Ted was not in a comfortable +state of mind himself, but he knew that something +had to be done about it. He leaped to his +feet.</p> + +<p>“Come on, we’ve got to see if anyone is hurt +up there!” he called, reaching for his lantern. +The other boys followed him closely and he +passed around the tents and ran rapidly up +the incline toward the pine clump. The groaning +had ceased as soon as they had started for +the place from which the disturbing sounds had +come.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_192">[Pg 192]</span></p> + +<p>They arrived in the grove in a group, the +lanterns flashing generous beams around them, +but there was no one to be seen. Thinking that +someone might be concealed in the bushes they +thrust their lights in there and looked closely, +but there was no sign of a living person, and +as only a living being could produce the sound +which had startled them so profoundly, they +half expected to see someone who had been injured +in some manner. But although they +searched the grove they could not find a trace +of anyone.</p> + +<p>“That’s funny,” commented Ted, now more +annoyed than frightened. “The groans came +from here, didn’t they?”</p> + +<p>“Sure they did,” was the ready response.</p> + +<p>“Well, the groaner has moved somewhere +else,” said Ted, half angry and half jokingly. +“We won’t even be able to find any footprints, +because there is such a carpet of pine needles +that a print wouldn’t show. Confound this +whole business, I——”</p> + +<p>From across the camp, and on the other side +of Bear Creek, came the groaning sound again. +The boys stirred and looked anxiously at Ted.</p> + +<p>The hot blood surged into his face and he +would have liked nothing better than to have +come to instant physical encounter with the +groaner. While he waited to control his hot<span class="pagenum" id="Page_193">[Pg 193]</span> +anger the groans came in long drawn out wails +that, under the circumstances, chilled their +blood. Besides being angry Ted was also +puzzled.</p> + +<p>“Buck and his squad chased that fellow up +the mountain,” he said aloud. “I wonder if +he could have slipped around them and come +back? Maybe he just wanted to lead them off +on a chase.” Abruptly he turned to the boys. +“Come on back to the camp.”</p> + +<p>They followed him in silence back to the camp +and as soon as they entered the circle of light +cast by the fires the groaning ceased. A weighty +silence succeeded.</p> + +<p>“Fellows,” Ted addressed them, in a low +tone. “There isn’t any use of us running all +around trying to find out who this practical +joker is. He’ll just run us ragged, so let’s +retire into the center tent and stay there until +Buck and his squad gets back. We can watch +everything that goes on from the flap of the +tent and by keeping under cover we’ll make +the chap who is so fond of tricks either show +himself or shut up!”</p> + +<p>They all crowded under the canvas of the +second tent, glad for the shelter, frail as it was. +From their position some of the boys could +look out and watch the other tents and all of +them could watch the fire. Ted did not go into<span class="pagenum" id="Page_194">[Pg 194]</span> +the tent at once, but took a lantern and made +sure that his flashlight was at his side.</p> + +<p>“You fellows stay here and keep a sharp +lookout,” he directed. “I’m going down to see +if there is any way for anyone to cross the +creek.”</p> + +<p>“Going all by yourself?” a boy asked, his +eyes staring in awe.</p> + +<p>“Yes, but I’ll be right back,” nodded Ted. +“See you later.”</p> + +<p>He walked off, leaving them to chatter in a +hushed way among themselves, and going at +once to the creek, took his course along it and +away from the camp. He knew that there was +a shaky old wood bridge down the creek at +some yards from the camp, and while he had +told the boys that he was going only that far, +Ted secretly determined to cross and have a +look at the rather marshy ground on the other +side of the curving stream. He was almost certain +that he would find nothing, but he wanted +to look nevertheless.</p> + +<p>“But I mustn’t allow anything to happen to +me,” he thought, anxiously. “These boys +would be leaderless at least until Buck got back, +and there is no telling what might happen to +them. I mustn’t be gone long, either.”</p> + +<p>He came to the bridge, which he had found +one day in his wanderings, and he crossed it,<span class="pagenum" id="Page_195">[Pg 195]</span> +his footsteps sounding hollow and damp as his +shoes pressed the rotted boards. On the other +side he stepped ashore into a slippery species +of soil that gently oozed water as his foot +struck and sank slightly into it. The bushes +here were thick and he was compelled to force +his way through them. Before going beyond +the bridge he lowered his lantern and looked at +the soft earth and at once perceived something +which excited his closest attention.</p> + +<p>There was the imprint in the dirt of a large +shoe.</p> + +<p>The shoe was evidently a good one and +showed no sign of wear, while the heel of it was +quite new and left impressions which proclaimed +it to be a rubber one with regulation +holes and a trade mark which was too faint to +be of more than passing value to him. But the +sight of the print alone caused him to rejoice +that at last there was a clear record.</p> + +<p>“Now, I’ll just see where this print leads to,” +he thought and started off. A moment later +he halted as another thought came to him.</p> + +<p>“The prints don’t return. Suppose the man +is hiding in the bushes, just waiting for me!”</p> + +<p>The reflection made his skin creep and for +a moment he fought a growing desire to turn +and go back. But after an instant of indecision +he fought it off. “I’ll have to chance it and go<span class="pagenum" id="Page_196">[Pg 196]</span> +on. I won’t go far from camp, and if I do see +anyone, I can fight it out or run like a streak. +I won’t cross the bridge, either, I’ll cut right +across the ground and jump into the creek and +swim it. Don’t know if I’m foolish or not, but +here goes!”</p> + +<p>With every sense on the alert he walked forward, +eyes straining, ears pitched for a sound, +ready to retreat at a moment’s notice. It was +no easy task to follow the footprints and look +around him at the same time, but he managed +to do it as he advanced. At a point opposite +the camp he came to a complete halt and marked +the spot where the man had evidently stood +when he delivered the groans, for there the soft +ground was foot-printed lavishly. From that +spot the man had gone off down the stream +away from the camp until he had come to the +creek at a point where rocks protruded so far +above the stream that he had found it easy to +walk across and take to the woods alongside of +the camp. Ted noted that the ford was out of +sight of the tents and while they were going into +the tents the man had evidently crossed the +low part of the stream and had entered the +woods at a point not far from where Buck and +his squad had entered it.</p> + +<p>“After he finished his groaning he must have +decided that he had scared us enough,” mused<span class="pagenum" id="Page_197">[Pg 197]</span> +Ted, as he stood there peering around. “Confound +him, if I ever get my hands on him, I’ll +knock his head off, provided I’m big enough! +What anyone should take all the trouble to try +and scare a bunch of fellows out of camp for +is more than I can figure out!”</p> + +<p>He crossed the stream at the point where the +mysterious man had crossed and made his way +back toward the camp, coming up alongside of +the fires, in plain sight of the anxiously waiting +boys. They were greatly astonished to see him +come from the opposite direction from that in +which he had started.</p> + +<p>He opened his mouth to call out a cheery +greeting to them and then his mouth remained +open, no sound issuing from it for the moment. +In the pine grove above them he detected a +spurt of fire, and the next instant a dry bush +burst into crackling flame. He awoke from his +temporary muteness.</p> + +<p>“Come on boys, on the jump!” he shouted. +“Grab all the pails you can get hold of! The +woods are on fire!”</p> + + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> + +<div class="chapter"> +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_198">[Pg 198]</span></p> + +<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_XIX">CHAPTER XIX<br> +<span class="fs70">DRUMMER SAVES HIS CHIEF</span></h2> +</div> + +<p>It was with a sinking heart and a quick flash +of chilling fear that Buck felt himself in the +grasp of the unknown man back of the cemetery +monument. The attack had come so quickly +that, added to the mystery and uncanniness of +the place and hour, his mind whirled for the +moment. The hand over his mouth was rough +and horny, calloused apparently by hard labor, +and the arm which encircled his body and +pinned his own arms to his sides was a strong +and sinewy one, the thin but whip-like cords of +which he could feel even through his clothing.</p> + +<p>His fingers still rested on the button of his +flashlight and the thought occurred to him to +light it. But as though reading his thought +the strange individual swung down a long, lean +hand and swept it from his grasp. Buck might +have used his light for a weapon had he thought +about it, but just now his thoughts and impressions +were too confused to allow for anything +constructive.</p> + +<p>Still keeping his hand over Buck’s mouth and<span class="pagenum" id="Page_199">[Pg 199]</span> +his thin arm around his body with a grip of +steel, the man peered out around the tall stone +to see if anyone was following the leader. He +could see the group of boys merely as shadows +a little darker than the sky, for at the point +where they were standing there was no woods +background and as the cemetery was high on +a ridge of the mountain the boys were outlined +like uneasy shadows against a black sky. Seeming +to derive comfort from the fact that Buck +was all alone, the man started to drag him off.</p> + +<p>But in this period of time Buck had recovered +his presence of mind. The man who had him +was very little taller than he was, his body +was thin and he seemed to be nearer middle +age than young. All in all, Buck was huskier, +but for all that, the man who held him had +muscles of steel. There was no doubt that he +was a native mountain character and he was +ready for any emergency. Buck wished fervently +that he could get his mouth free and +also gain the use of his arms. He felt that with +the use of his arms he could match himself up +favorably with the man who held him.</p> + +<p>Just as the man began to drag him off, Buck +began a frantic attempt to break away. He +jerked his head back in an effort to free his +mouth, but the man immediately dug his long +fingers into Buck’s cheeks. The pain infuriated<span class="pagenum" id="Page_200">[Pg 200]</span> +the boy and he increased his struggles. He +fought to free his arms, exerting all of his +strength to do so.</p> + +<p>The attempt was futile. Like a winding whip +the thin arm tightened even more closely until +the wind was almost forced from his body. +Then Buck began a foot attack.</p> + +<p>This nearly succeeded, for the man was not +prepared for it. Buck gave his nearest foot a +kick that made the man grunt with pain, and +for a moment it looked as though he was going +to go over. But he recovered his ground and +once more began his dragging process. Fighting +stoutly but vainly, Buck was dragged along.</p> + +<p>They moved away from the big stone toward +the far wall, the captor finding his progress a +hard one, due to the energetic squirming of +Buck. The boy expected a fierce warning any +minute from the man and perhaps a blow to +silence him, but the mountaineer was depending +on his strength alone to carry Buck off and +not so much as a single word came from him. +Half dragging and half carrying Buck, he made +his way to the wall furtherest away from the +boys. The grass in the cemetery was soft and +wet and Buck’s fighting progress made no +sound.</p> + +<p>They arrived at last at the wall and the man +heaved Buck up and over like a sack of wheat<span class="pagenum" id="Page_201">[Pg 201]</span> +and jumped with him over the low barrier. +They were in the open field, with a few apple +trees around and the deep woods a few scant +yards away. Toward this dense wall of the +thicker trees the determined man began to drag +Buck, who by this time had succeeded in prying +open his fingers so as to breathe between them.</p> + +<p>Something unexpected happened. There was +a swish near them which puzzled them both. +The captor stopped in some bewilderment and +then something hard struck him on the side of +the temple, causing him to grunt and hesitate +in his progress.</p> + +<p>Back at the wall the boys had watched Buck’s +progress as he went from stone to stone with +his flashlight and they had remained quiet while +he had worked his way deeper and deeper into +the quiet graveyard. Drummer felt somewhat +grieved that his leader had not taken him along +but he kept the fact to himself. Buck’s light +was seen once far down in the cemetery, close +to a towering monument, and it was seen no +more. Time dragged on heavily.</p> + +<p>Impatiently, the boys waited at the wall, +standing close together in the darkness. The +quietness of the lonely country, the association +of the graveyard and the uncertainty of the +whole enterprise made them want to give up +the affair and return to the camp. They thought<span class="pagenum" id="Page_202">[Pg 202]</span> +somewhat wistfully of the warm campfires and +their friends below, and they were anxious to +get back. Before long they became restless +and nervous.</p> + +<p>“Confound it, wish he’d come back!” +grumbled a boy.</p> + +<p>“He’ll be right back,” reassured Drummer, +secretly uneasy.</p> + +<p>For the past few seconds Drummer had been +smelling something that appealed to him. There +must be an apple orchard nearby he decided, +and where there was an orchard there must +surely be apples. That particular brand of +fruit was a great favorite with the stout boy, +and after peering around for a moment or two +he decided that the orchard must be at the end +of the graveyard wall. He began to edge off in +that direction.</p> + +<p>“Where you going?” Bob whispered.</p> + +<p>“To see if I can pick up an apple,” was +the answer, as Drummer moved off.</p> + +<p>Under the circumstances no one else was interested +in apples and Drummer went alone. +At the end of the wall he instinctively reached +for his flashlight which he had hung on his belt, +and then he realized that he could not use it.</p> + +<p>“Better not,” he decided. “I might give our +position away, and Buck would be mad. I’ll<span class="pagenum" id="Page_203">[Pg 203]</span> +hunt around in the dark and I guess I can find +some on the ground.”</p> + +<p>The apple trees were now before him and he +stopped under the first tree, looking up. There +were apples on the tree he was able to make +out, but all of them were beyond his reach. +He had no intention of climbing the tree at that +time, though he made up his mind to visit the +old orchard at some later time and help himself +to the apples on the tree.</p> + +<p>He reached down, wishing for the added help +of his light but deeming it prudent not to employ +it. There were apples on the ground and +his groping fingers found four of them without +any trouble. There were others nearby, but +he straightened up with a big one in his hand +and carefully felt along the surface of it.</p> + +<p>“Got to be careful about eating them in the +dark,” he reflected. “Don’t want to go eating +any worms! This one feels all right.”</p> + +<p>He raised his head, and against the break +between the woods and the sky, saw something +that for the moment chilled his blood.</p> + +<p>A man who looked for the moment like a goblin +or some horrible creature from another +world, was apparently half-carrying and half-dragging +a big sack of meal after him as he +crept toward the woods. But the sack struggled<span class="pagenum" id="Page_204">[Pg 204]</span> +and moved and in that instant Drummer’s eyes +were opened fully.</p> + +<p>He remembered the last flash of Buck’s flashlight +and the long silence from the graveyard. +It was plain at once that the man they had +been chasing was carrying off his chief and for +a brief second the stout boy was on the verge +of yelling at the top of his lungs. One hand +dropped toward his flashlight and then he remembered +the apple in his hand. It was hard +and Drummer was a fairly good shot.</p> + +<p>Trembling with excitement, he threw it +toward the two figures before him. It went +wide of the mark, it seemed to the boy and he +stooped down and hastily gathered up the +apples at his feet. Calming down somewhat, +he began to throw them with more care, and +a grunt told him that his second apple had +struck someone. He hoped it had not hit Buck, +but he kept on hurling apples.</p> + +<p>There was a fierce struggle before him and +just as his fingers closed over his flashlight, his +last apple having been exhausted, he heard +Buck’s voice.</p> + +<p>“He got away!”</p> + +<p>Drummer snapped on his flashlight and in +the beams of it he saw the man running across +the orchard toward the woods. Buck was three +or four yards behind him, but the man was<span class="pagenum" id="Page_205">[Pg 205]</span> +increasing his speed at every stride and it +looked hopeless. Drummer joined in the chase.</p> + +<p>When the apple had struck the man on the +head he had hesitated, bewildered, and in that +instant Buck renewed his passionate attempt +to break loose. This time he succeeded in freeing +his mouth and one arm, which he attempted +to wind around the man who had for so long +held him a captive. Two more apples swished +past them at top speed and the man now +changed his tactics. He no longer desired to +hold Buck, but seemed more than anxious to +get away. He loosed his hold on Buck and +wrestled with him in a short, fierce match, +finally breaking Buck’s hold and turning to flee. +The last apple hurled by Drummer struck the +man in the back and he made off like a flash +toward the woods. It was then that Buck +shouted and took up the chase, somewhat +winded from his recent battle.</p> + +<p>The man gained the woods well ahead of +him and wound his way in and out among the +trees, too anxious to get away to slow up for +a lack of light. Buck had no light and Drummer’s +flashlight was too far back of him to +be of any use. He could hear the boys chattering +as they took up the chase, but on the edge +of the woods Buck halted, realizing the futility +of it.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_206">[Pg 206]</span></p> + +<p>He was winded and dissatisfied and the man +who had plunged into the woods knew them +so well that to follow him would be a pure +waste of time. Drummer caught up with him, +puffing with the exertion and excitement.</p> + +<p>“Go-going to chase him?” panted the hero +of the apple bombardment.</p> + +<p>“No use,” declared Buck, as the others came +up, lights all turned on. “We’d never get him +in these woods. He knows them too well. You +can’t even hear him, now.”</p> + +<p>They stood there listening, but nothing but +unbroken silence came from the depths of the +forest. The rest of the boys did not desire to +press the matter if Buck did not, and they stood +there for some time, listening with awe to +Buck’s story of his adventure. Many were the +exclamations that followed it.</p> + +<p>“Boy, you certainly did me a service when +you began to peg those apples!” Buck told +Drummer, laughing. “That artillery fire halted +his advance and gave me my turn at the game. +You certainly used your head!”</p> + +<p>“Well, that’s just once when my appetite +came in handy,” grinned the fat boy.</p> + +<p>“It surely did! Next time anyone comes +around bothering the camp we’ll just send you +out with a basket of apples and we can sleep<span class="pagenum" id="Page_207">[Pg 207]</span> +in peace all night! Well, come on back to the +graveyard, I want to get my flashlight.”</p> + +<p>They all climbed over the low wall and went +back to the spot where Buck had been captured +by the man behind the monument and there on +the ground they found his flashlight. Beside +it, resting against the base of the stone, they +found a battered lantern.</p> + +<p>“I wondered what had become of his lantern,” +said Buck, picking up the battered object. +“Just an ordinary old farm lantern, +which doesn’t tell us much, but we’ll take it +back to camp with us.”</p> + +<p>“I won’t be sorry to get back to camp,” said +Charlie.</p> + +<p>“Pretty soft for the fellows in camp!” remarked +Drummer. “Just sitting around the +fires waiting for us!”</p> + +<p>“Let’s get back to the camp,” suggested +Buck. “They’ll be waiting up for us and worrying.”</p> + +<p>In a body they set out for the camp, feeling +better now that everything had turned out well, +although they were sorry that the man had +gotten away. “If we had gotten him we would +have solved the problem of our camp,” said +Buck. “But we’ll keep after him until we do +get him.”</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_208">[Pg 208]</span></p> + +<p>“Think he’ll come around the camp any +more?” Drummer asked.</p> + +<p>“Not for a while, anyway. I can’t say +whether he’ll come around again or not because +I don’t know what his object can be. But if +he doesn’t, we’ll go out and hunt him up, because +it is high time that he was brought +down.”</p> + +<p>They had run further away from the camp +than they had thought and it took them a long +time to reach the top of the mountain where +they could look down on the camp. The two +fires were burning brightly but no one was in +sight. This puzzled them and they halted, +studying the situation.</p> + +<p>“Funny, I wonder where they are?” muttered +Buck.</p> + +<p>“Look, somebody crossing the brook with a +lantern!” cried Bob, pointing.</p> + +<p>They saw a lone figure crossing the stones +of the brook below the spot where the creek +was deep enough to swim and Buck was sure +that the figure was Ted. They were so high +up and far away that they were unable to tell +accurately, but it looked to be the figure of the +camp leader. He entered the circle of light near +the fire, the lantern swinging by his side.</p> + +<p>Then something else claimed the attention of +the boys on top of the mountain. A flicker of<span class="pagenum" id="Page_209">[Pg 209]</span> +light came to them from the top of the ridge +back of the springs and then a bush flamed. +They saw the camp boys come running out +of their tents and look toward the fire, then +scurry off toward the truck at the edge of the +camp.</p> + +<p>Buck wasted no more time. “Come on, fellows!” +he called, as he started off. “The woods +are burning! We’ve got to help the camp +squad!”</p> + + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> + +<div class="chapter"> +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_210">[Pg 210]</span></p> + +<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_XX">CHAPTER XX<br> +<span class="fs70">A VISIT TO HOGS’ HOLLOW</span></h2> +</div> + +<p>The words which Ted shouted to the boys in +the tent struck them dumb for a moment, but to +their ears was borne the sound of the snapping +and crackling. They rushed out of the tent into +the open space of the camp, to see the dry pine +grove above them glowing with fire.</p> + +<p>Ted was running toward the truck for pails +and the boys, awakening to the seriousness of +the situation, followed him. Some of them +made a hurried trip to the cooking supplies +which were piled near the fireplaces, snatching +up the pots and pans. Ted pulled out all of the +pails which were in the truck and handed them +around as fast as possible.</p> + +<p>“Get water from the spring and go to it!” he +cried, passing out the last pail. Then, seizing +one which he had reserved for himself, Ted ran +up the slope, stopped at the spring to dip out +a supply of water, and then went on to the +thicket where the fire blazed.</p> + +<p>The pine grove had been a dry place with an +accumulation of dry leaves and dead bushes<span class="pagenum" id="Page_211">[Pg 211]</span> +and the whole thicket was now a raging furnace. +The month had been dry and except for +the big storm which had so thoroughly soaked +them the boys had not experienced any adverse +weather. The woods, as a consequence, was in +a receptive mood for a fire, and Ted’s heart +misgave him as he saw the blaze before him.</p> + +<p>“If this gets going full blast in the woods, +people will say that we started it, and there +will be the dickens to pay!” he groaned inwardly, +as he threw the water from his pail +onto the fire. “Oh, I do wish that Buck and +his squad was here to help us!”</p> + +<p>Boys who had not been able to supply themselves +with pails had seized anything handy +with which to beat at the edges of the fire and +they fought stoutly to beat it to submission. +The smoke was choking and the heat thrown +off was blistering. Ted, having emptied his +pail, raced down to the spring, to find another +problem confronting them.</p> + +<p>The two springs had been drained down to +mere trickles. A half dozen pails of water from +each had effectively emptied them and Ted did +not dare wait for the basins to fill up. There +was but one thing to do.</p> + +<p>“Fill your pails at the creek!” he cried, +and dashed off down the slope to Bear Creek. +Here he dipped his bucket into the black water<span class="pagenum" id="Page_212">[Pg 212]</span> +and ran back up the hill with it, splashing it +on the fire.</p> + +<p>“Good glory, we’ll never beat it at this rate, +and we simply have to!” was his despairing +thought.</p> + +<p>He remembered the large extra piece of canvas +in the truck, and abandoning his pail he +ran down the hill and procured the material. +Just as he was about to charge back up the +slope there was heard the sound of running +footsteps and Buck’s squad, nearly played out +from their hurried descent, arrived in the camp.</p> + +<p>“Buck!” shouted Ted, joyously. “You just +got here in time!”</p> + +<p>“I guess so!” was the panted reply. “Here, +let me have an end of that canvas and we’ll try +and smother some of the fire.”</p> + +<p>The boys who had just arrived in camp procured +flat pans, shovels and anything else that +came to hand and joined the almost exhausted +boys at the pine grove. Ted and Buck carried +the canvas up and each of them took an end. +This large section of material, when raised and +lowered by the two boys, snuffed out long, +ragged edges of flame, and by working busily +they soon had the fire under control. But their +work was by no means ended as yet. There +were dozens of individual spurts of fire still to +be put out and to these they gave their attention.<span class="pagenum" id="Page_213">[Pg 213]</span> +Two dead trees were beginning to blaze +and the two camp leaders quickly put them out, +so that the fire would not be noted by anyone +living nearby. At the present time they desired +no publicity.</p> + +<p>The last glimmer of fire had been put out and +the smoked and blackened boys stood silent for +a moment, panting heavily. The night had been +indeed a strenuous one, and the chasing squad +in particular was worn out completely. Their +long dash after the mountain man, their speedy +return, and the exertions around the pine grove, +had been as much as they could bear. Some of +the smaller boys were shaking decidedly, now +that danger was over, but the trembling was +the result of excitement and exhaustion.</p> + +<p>“Me for the spring!” exclaimed Drummer, +and a rush was immediately made for the cool, +fresh water. The basins had not yet filled but +there was enough for everybody and they drank +and drank and drank.</p> + +<p>“How’d that patch of pine get on fire?” +Buck asked Ted, waiting for all of the smaller +boys to quench their thirst before caring for +his own parched throat.</p> + +<p>“I haven’t the slightest idea,” Ted shook his +head. “But it was deliberately fired!”</p> + +<p>“By whom?”</p> + +<p>“I don’t know,” was Ted’s reply. “But we<span class="pagenum" id="Page_214">[Pg 214]</span> +have been annoyed by some one groaning +around all the time you were gone!”</p> + +<p>“I can’t figure that,” said Buck. “We chased +our man, and he captured me for about five +minutes. If you say that you were bothered, +then there is more than one prowler.”</p> + +<p>“Let’s get our drinks and then swap stories +down at the fire,” suggested Ted, dipping a +tin cup into the cool spring water as Buck did +the same.</p> + +<p>Gathering around the fire with fire-fighting +implements still in their hands they looked like +a band of Black Riders themselves, for their +clothing had become burned and their hands +and faces were black. Buck related his adventures +and then Ted told of the groans and his +search across the brook.</p> + +<p>“Well, all I can see is that there are two of +these fellows,” declared Buck, when Ted had +finished his story. “I’m beginning to wonder +if that one fellow didn’t purposely lead us a +merry chase just so that his companion could +fire the woods. You know, if the woods had +burned, the authorities around here would be +hot against us for having done it.”</p> + +<p>“I know that well enough,” nodded Ted. +“That’s why I just knew that we had to get +that fire out. I guess that things have become +so serious that we’ll have to get in touch with<span class="pagenum" id="Page_215">[Pg 215]</span> +Mr. Calvert and have some real action taken. +Next thing we know somebody will be getting +hurt or kidnapped or something. Yes, it looks +as though there are two of these fellows.”</p> + +<p>“I think that one of them is that Jerry Jackson, +from Hogs’ Hollow,” said Buck.</p> + +<p>“What makes you think that?”</p> + +<p>“The fellow that we chased ran in that direction +and I’m sure that he is the one. I suppose +he has a companion and they work together. +Tell you what let’s do, let’s go over +to Hogs’ Hollow tomorrow and call on Mr. +Jackson.”</p> + +<p>“All right, we’ll do it,” agreed Ted. “For +some reason he doesn’t want us to camp here, +and if we find him at home we’ll try and learn +why he doesn’t want us.”</p> + +<p>The boys were shaky with fatigue and Ted +ordered them to bed at once, while he and Buck +took lanterns and looked once more over the +ground which had been burned, hoping to find +some kind of a clue. But they were unable to +learn anything from the burned, down-trodden +soil.</p> + +<p>“Nothing to be learned here,” decided Ted, +as they went back to camp. “We’ll see what +we can find out at Hogs’ Hollow tomorrow.”</p> + +<p>That night the boys slept like logs, and had +anyone been minded to run away with the tents,<span class="pagenum" id="Page_216">[Pg 216]</span> +trucks or fires themselves, no one would have +known anything about it until daybreak at least, +and most of them not until much later in the +day. It was almost noontime before the whole +camp was awake and crowding around for +something to eat.</p> + +<p>“If anyone had run away with the whole +camp last night, I wouldn’t have known it,” +smiled Ted.</p> + +<p>“Shows what a bum general he is,” said Buck. +“He should have known that we would all be +half-dead and that he could have worked anything +he wanted to while we slept so soundly. +But we’re glad he is a bum general!”</p> + +<p>As soon as camp was cleaned up they began +to make plans for a visit to Hogs’ Hollow. It +was finally decided that only Ted and Buck +would go, and that all of the boys would remain +behind to protect the camp. With Charlie, Bob +and Drummer to counsel and lead the younger +boys they felt reasonably safe, and after talking +it over with those who were to remain in the +camp the two older boys started off.</p> + +<p>“I’m pretty sure that nothing will happen +in broad daylight,” was Ted’s final word to +them.</p> + +<p>“I guess not,” Bob had smiled. “We’ve got +Drummer with us, and even if we haven’t any<span class="pagenum" id="Page_217">[Pg 217]</span> +apples for him, to peg, maybe he can use potatoes +just as well!”</p> + +<p>Walking swiftly and heading in the general +direction which Farmer Crane had told them +to take toward Hogs’ Hollow, they quickly +covered the ground followed last night by +Buck’s squad and arrived at the cemetery. +Passing around the walls of the country graveyard +they entered the woods at a point close to +where the man had escaped on the previous +night and at once found themselves in a tangle +of forest much denser and wilder than that +which surrounded their own camp. The graveyard +itself was on the top of the mountain and +as soon as they entered the dark and cool woods +they began to go down into a valley.</p> + +<p>“Notice how the soil gets soft as soon as we +begin to go down?” asked Buck.</p> + +<p>“Yes, and I suppose the bottom of the valley +is quite marshy. I guess that is why they call +it Hogs’ Hollow.”</p> + +<p>Ted’s guess was a correct one. At the bottom +of the valley they struck a low, marshy +expanse of ground that kept them busy avoiding +muck holes. Tall bunches of weeds and +marsh grass grew in profusion and there was +a decidedly damp smell in the air.</p> + +<p>“Cheerful place!” grunted Buck.</p> + +<p>“Yes, not! This must be Hogs’ Hollow.<span class="pagenum" id="Page_218">[Pg 218]</span> +Only the animal for whom it is named would +enjoy this place. Now, all we have to do is +to find the shack that this man Jackson lives +in.”</p> + +<p>This was not an easy thing to do, for the +hollow was blanketed and screened by so many +bushes and clumps of small trees that they could +not see far before them. They had spent a good +three-quarters of an hour wandering around +when Ted sighted the object of their search +before him on a higher strip of ground.</p> + +<p>“There it is! There’s the shack we’re looking +for!”</p> + +<p>A rude hut, constructed of picked-up boards +and roofed with sections of tree bark, loomed +up before them on a tongue of land which was +slightly drier than the surrounding territory. +The hut was a large and rambling affair, with +a window on each side and a door which sagged +on leather hinges. A rusted stove pipe thrust +its way up through the bark roof, but no smoke +came from it. There was no sign of life around +the place and they debated the wisdom of walking +boldly up to it.</p> + +<p>“We might as well,” decided Ted. “We’re +here to have a talk with this Jerry Jackson and +we might as well plunge right into it. No use +sneaking around, because we have to make the +break sometime or other.”</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_219">[Pg 219]</span></p> + +<p>So they approached the hut openly, eyes and +ears alert for anything unexpected, but there +was no sign or movement of any kind. Ted +peered into a window and found that the place +was empty.</p> + +<p>“He isn’t at home,” he said. “Let’s see if +we can’t get in.”</p> + +<p>The sagging front door was unlocked and +with some degree of caution the two boys entered +the place, but it was indeed empty of life +and they looked around them with interest. The +furnishings of the hut were as rude as the outside +and they consisted of a discolored table, +a rickety-looking rocking chair and a firmer-looking +straight one, a rusted stove, a disordered +bunk, and various odds and ends. But +the object on the table caught and held their +eyes and they examined it closely.</p> + +<p>It was a long white cloth garment which +the dweller in Hogs’ Hollow was working upon, +for a needle still stuck into the cloth and a spool +of white thread stood beside it. There was a +hood to the thing and a cloth mask for the +face, a mask which was punctured with eye +holes and a slit where the mouth should be. The +two boys looked at it silently and then exchanged +glances.</p> + +<p>“A ghost suit, as sure as you are a foot +high!” Buck voiced the thought.</p> + + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> + +<div class="chapter"> +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_220">[Pg 220]</span></p> + +<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_XXI">CHAPTER XXI<br> +<span class="fs70">THE WATCHING POST</span></h2> +</div> + +<p>Ted nodded as he looked the suit over. It +was a coarse white sheet and the dweller in the +hut was taking some pains on the construction +of it. But there was no doubt as to its proposed +use.</p> + +<p>“Yes, sir, it’s a ghost uniform, if there is +such a thing!” smiled Ted. “And I guess I +have an idea where he intends to wear it!”</p> + +<p>“He isn’t going to a masquerade, I’ll bet +on that!” grinned Buck. “If I’m not mistaken +he’ll turn up pretty soon at our camp with this +nightgown on!”</p> + +<p>“When he does, we’ll take it off!” promised +Ted, grimly.</p> + +<p>“Shall we wait for him to come home and +then nab him?” Buck asked.</p> + +<p>“No the sight of this ghost costume has made +me change my mind, and if you agree to my +plan, we’ll work this thing out another way. +Let’s get out of here before he returns and wait +around camp until he does show up in this sheet +affair. Then, when we grab him, we’ll have<span class="pagenum" id="Page_221">[Pg 221]</span> +him just where we want him. If we accuse +him of anything now he can easily back out by +saying that he doesn’t know anything about it, +but if we catch him around the camp in this +suit we will have him just where he’ll find it +impossible to escape.”</p> + +<p>“That is all right as far as it goes, but how +are we going to know just what night he does +visit the camp? We don’t want a chase such +as we had the other night.”</p> + +<p>“No, but I have a plan for a trap. However, +let’s get out of here first and we’ll discuss it +on the way back. Now I’m particularly anxious +that he doesn’t catch us in here or know that +we have been here.”</p> + +<p>“All right. We haven’t disturbed anything, +have we?”</p> + +<p>Ted looked around thoughtfully and then +shook his head. “I guess not. We didn’t +touch anything and I’m glad we didn’t even +touch the suit. By the way, while we are here, +let’s see if there is any sign of that skeleton that +was in the bushes back of the camp.”</p> + +<p>They hunted hastily around for the skeleton, +looking in every corner and into a small closet +space off of the main room, but there was no +sign of the object which had so startled them. +Satisfied that they could not find anything, +which would add to their store of knowledge<span class="pagenum" id="Page_222">[Pg 222]</span> +concerning the man, and anxious to get out of +Hogs’ Hollow as soon as possible, they left the +hut, arranging the door as they had found it, +and struck at once off into the swampland +toward the higher ground. No words were exchanged +between them until they had quitted +the hollow and had arrived at higher ground, +where they started off side by side toward the +camp.</p> + +<p>“What is your idea about trapping the fellow +when he comes ghosting?” asked Buck, as +they skirted the cemetery and started along the +rough road.</p> + +<p>“Now that we have a fairly good idea that +he’ll visit us, we’ll prepare for him,” explained +Ted. “I guess that after the surprise attack +on him the other night he won’t come any too +near the camp in his white sheet, though he +must be going to show himself, or why bother +with a sheet at all? He may plan to reveal +himself on a rock as he did with the black horse +that time, but whichever way he plans it, I +guess we can be sure that he is coming sooner +or later. Now, if we’re going to be in the camp +we won’t have much chance to cope with him, +but we won’t be in camp!”</p> + +<p>“Won’t be in the camp!” Buck echoed. +“Where will we be?”</p> + +<p>“We’ll be outside of camp and hidden in a<span class="pagenum" id="Page_223">[Pg 223]</span> +clump of bushes, watching the camp to see what +happens. You know our tents back up against +the hill where the springs are and that will be +an advantage. My idea is for us to lift the +backs of the tents, creep out and along the +slope until we reach that bunch of maples on +the east side of the camp. Those trees are +pretty close together and there is a fine screen +of bushes, where we can lie in wait and watch +the camp.”</p> + +<p>“Oh, I see! Then if he gets to fooling around +back of the camp we can see him better than +we could if we were down in the camp.”</p> + +<p>“Yes, and not only that, but I think the sight +of an empty camp will lure him on. If he has +no evil intentions toward the camp I think that +sheer curiosity will draw him into it. Then, +from our watching post on the hill we can figure +out a plan to swoop down on him and surround +him. How does that sound to you?”</p> + +<p>“All right,” approved Buck, enthusiastically. +“But we’ll have to be regular Indians to crawl +from the tents to the maples!”</p> + +<p>“That is all right, we’ll be able to do it. Of +course, if he ever sees us at it, everything is +over, but we’ll just have to be so careful that +he won’t see us. If anyone is to do the seeing, +we’re the ones to do it. I’d like to catch him<span class="pagenum" id="Page_224">[Pg 224]</span> +red-handed prowling around the camp and then +we’ll have a clear case against him.”</p> + +<p>“Yes. But don’t forget that he must have a +helper. Things have happened in such a way +that he can’t possibly be doing them all by +himself.”</p> + +<p>“I realize that, and I don’t know whether +they’ll work in pairs or not, but I think if we +can get him we’ll have no trouble in getting his +friend, whoever he is. We’ll concentrate on +getting him and that will probably clear up the +atmosphere quite a bit.”</p> + +<p>They arrived at the camp, to find the other +boys anxiously awaiting them, though they had +not been idle. Preparations had been made for +supper and everything was ready to put on the +fire when they got back. The boys were at first +disappointed because they had not brought a +prisoner back with them, but Ted soon explained +his plan to them and they fell in with +it whole-heartedly.</p> + +<p>“That will mean we’ll be sleeping out in the +open for a few nights at least,” Ted told them. +“You see, when we crawl out there we’re not +going to just sit there for a few hours and then +go back into the tents. It is pretty likely that +this fellow will try his next piece of funny work +in the middle of the night, and when he does +we’ll want to be out of the camp and a whole<span class="pagenum" id="Page_225">[Pg 225]</span> +lot nearer to him than he thinks for. If he tries +anything more like setting the woods afire we’ll +be right on top of him before he can get very +far, and in order to do so we’ll want to camp +out and away from the tents. So tonight when +it gets dark we’ll let the fires die down a bit +and then we’ll go to our tents as though we intended +to turn in early. From in the tents we’ll +slip out the back one by one, each with his own +blanket, and we’ll make an outdoor camp in +the maple grove.”</p> + +<p>“Won’t it be cold outdoors?” a boy asked.</p> + +<p>“No, it won’t be. It is warm nights, as you +know, and it won’t hurt us a bit to sleep outside. +Of course, if a storm comes up we’ll crawl +back and wait until a better night comes along.”</p> + +<p>After supper that night they allowed the fires +to die away to a mass of red embers and then +one by one drifted into their tents. As soon as +they entered the shelters they rolled up their +blankets, strapped them on their shoulders and +one by one raised the back wall of the tents +and slipped out into the darkness back of the +tents.</p> + +<p>Here the blackness was intense and they +found that crawling was not necessary. Keeping +well to the darkness and out of the feeble +light from the fires they stole one by one to +the grove of maples and there assembled, until<span class="pagenum" id="Page_226">[Pg 226]</span> +all of them were in the place. This grove was of +ample size to hold them all and after some low-pitched +conversation, which Ted and Buck took +care to keep down and discourage, they spread +out their blankets and made their first attempt +at outdoor sleeping.</p> + +<p>Some of them went to sleep at once, while +others, finding sleeping under the stars a distinct +novelty, lay awake for some little time. +But all of them were getting used to the camp +life by this time and it was not long before all +of them slept soundly.</p> + +<p>Morning came without anything having happened +and they awoke in some disappointment. +Ted saw that he had omitted some important +part of his scheme.</p> + +<p>“We should have had them sneak back in +camp and come out of their tents, just as though +they had slept there all night,” he told Buck. +“If anyone is watching the camp and sees us +come out of here, they’ll catch on to the plan at +once. I never thought of that part.”</p> + +<p>“Tomorrow morning we’ll have to wake +up just before dawn and sneak back, to finish +our sleep in the tents,” nodded Buck. “I’ll tell +you what we do know. Suppose we go off into +the woods a short distance and then enter the +camp from a direction back of the springs? +Then, if anyone should be watching and sees us<span class="pagenum" id="Page_227">[Pg 227]</span> +come in, they’ll think we took an overnight hike +and are just getting in.”</p> + +<p>“Providing they didn’t see us going into the +tent for the apparent purpose of going to sleep +there,” reminded Ted. “But we’ll do it that +way and trust to luck.”</p> + +<p>They moved off into the woods and approached +the camp from a different direction from the +maple clump.</p> + +<p>The day passed pleasantly enough, the boys +enjoying the camp life and the swimming. That +evening, as they finished their suppers, a beautiful +full moon made its appearance in the sky.</p> + +<p>“Going to have a fine old moon to sleep under +tonight,” remarked Drummer.</p> + +<p>The act of retiring to the tents and stealing +off to the maple grove was again performed and +once in the grove they sat on their blankets and +talked in low tones. The night was so fine that +no one actually wanted to go to sleep, though it +was now the usual time.</p> + +<p>“Well, we might as well turn in,” yawned +Ted, beginning to unbutton his shirt. The +others reluctantly followed his example and +soon most of them had slipped in under the +blankets. Ted took a final look down at the +camp.</p> + +<p>The fires were low, almost out, in fact. The +brilliant moon lighted up the camp like a silvery<span class="pagenum" id="Page_228">[Pg 228]</span> +lantern and the entire landscape, done in silver +and black, was hauntingly beautiful. Ted felt +a flash of annoyance at the train of circumstances +which was compelling them to spend +the night away from their tents.</p> + +<p>“Too bad we have to fool around with those +fellows,” he grumbled, inwardly. “This would +be a beautiful night to lie in the tents and look +out at things. I wish—”</p> + +<p>He broke off in his thoughts and bent forward, +his eyes narrowed. Then he snapped his +fingers softly and hissed. The boys sat up in +their blankets.</p> + +<p>“What’s up?” Buck whispered, quickly.</p> + +<p>“Get up, but don’t make any noise, on your +lives!” was the thrilling reply, in a carefully +guarded tone. “There is a figure all in white +in the trees close to the creek!”</p> + + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> + +<div class="chapter"> +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_229">[Pg 229]</span></p> + +<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_XXII">CHAPTER XXII<br> +<span class="fs70">GHOST MEETS GHOST</span></h2> +</div> + +<p>There was only the faintest stir as the boys +followed Buck’s lead in tossing their blankets +aside and joined Ted at the bushes. Following +the direction which he had indicated, they found +that what he had said was the truth. Close beside +a tall tree, on the bank of the creek, stood a +figure shrouded entirely in white.</p> + +<p>The figure was motionless at the time, intently +regarding the silent camp before him. From the +direction in which his coming lay the boys guessed +that he had come up on the far side of Bear +Creek and had crossed over the stones at the +spot where Ted had previously crossed them. +The sight of the almost dead fires and the +strange silence of the camp was giving the +would-be ghost food for thought, though he +must have expected that the boys would be asleep +at the time of his coming. For two or three +minutes, a space of time which to the boys seemed +an age, he stood looking across the cleared +space before the tents and then he began to work +his way nearer to the empty camp shelters,<span class="pagenum" id="Page_230">[Pg 230]</span> +keeping always close to the trees which skirted +them.</p> + +<p>What his intentions were they could not +guess. He carried nothing in his hands and from +all appearances he was about to confine his efforts +at simply scaring them.</p> + +<p>“Look there!” suddenly gasped Drummer.</p> + +<p>They saw that he was looking off in the opposite +direction and back of the tents, but for +the moment could not make out what he had +seen.</p> + +<p>“What is it?” Ted whispered.</p> + +<p>“Another ghost!” was the answer. “Look, +back there in the bushes near the pine grove +where the fire was. By golly, there are two +ghosts!”</p> + +<p>Now they saw what had struck the fat boy’s +eyes. It was another figure dressed much in the +manner of the one near the front of the tents, +and it was crouching in the thicket back of the +tents. As they watched it too moved forward.</p> + +<p>“That is all right,” Buck said. “We’ve +known all along that there have been two of +them working together. While we chased one +of them, the other set the woods on fire. They +are both up to the same trick, and now we’ll +have to make up our minds how we’ll capture +them.”</p> + +<p>“I guess we had better divide into the same<span class="pagenum" id="Page_231">[Pg 231]</span> +squads that we had before,” said Ted. “Buck, +suppose your squad tries to catch the one coming +from the back of the tent and my squad will +try and run down the fellow sneaking along the +trees in front. But let’s see what they are up +to first.”</p> + +<p>“I suppose they think they’re going to appear +at the door of a tent and holler ‘Boo!’ to +scare us!” grumbled Buck.</p> + +<p>Those of the boys who had slipped off their +shoes now hastily put them on again, happy and +a bit nervous at the prospect of the coming +action. All of them still watched the two creeping +figures below as they drew nearer the tents.</p> + +<p>“I guess they are going to meet in front of +the tents and exchange signals,” commented +Buck, noting that the two men were drawing +together.</p> + +<p>And at that moment they did meet, but the +boys were surprised by the result.</p> + +<p>The ghost from the back of the tents stepped +out into the full glow of the moon and they saw +that his costume was slightly different than the +one which the ghost in the front of the camp +wore. There was no hood on the top of the second +spirit’s costume, but he had a cloth wound +around his head. At the same time the other +ghost stepped from the shelter of the last tree<span class="pagenum" id="Page_232">[Pg 232]</span> +and came face to face with the brother apparition.</p> + +<p>But there was no exchange of signals, no +friendly whispering of details. For a moment +the two ghosts stood staring at each other, +seeming to shrink within their shrouds and then +the ghost from the creek tossed his arms wildly +to the sky, and uttering a wild yelp, fled at top +speed toward the creek from which it had come. +The second ghost stood perfectly still for a moment +and then shot forward, hot on the trail of +the other one.</p> + +<p>While the astonished boys watched with bulging +eyes and open mouths the first ghost reached +the creek and jumped wildly for the stones upon +which he had crossed. He missed the first one +and plunged forward on his knees into a half +foot of water, to the accompaniment of a tremendous +thrashing and splashing. The second +ghost reached the edge of the creek just as the +first ghost regained his feet and made a sweeping +clutch at his shroud. There was a ripping +sound and the ghost uniform split from top to +bottom, but the ghost himself did not stop going. +Without a backward glance he ran across +the rocks and took to the woods. His pursuer, +disdaining the rocks, waded stormily in the +brook and took up the chase on the other side.</p> + +<p>And now the boys in the maple grove gave<span class="pagenum" id="Page_233">[Pg 233]</span> +way to peals of laughter which were surely +heard by the two running ghosts. For a moment +they had been paralyzed by the strange +spectacle below them, and then the humor had +struck them as the first ghost streaked his way +across the camp pursued by the irate second +sheeted figure. The fall into the creek and the +subsequent splashing chase caused them to +laugh so hard that they were weak. In their +ghostly readings and thoughts they had regarded +spirits, ghosts and goblins as dignified +creatures, and the sight of two of them running +a frantic race appealed to their senses of humor.</p> + +<p>Both ghosts had disappeared from sight as +they hurried down into the camp and went as +far as the creek, chatting and laughing over the +unexpected turn of events. The rate of speed +employed by both night prowlers made them +forget any thought that they may have had in +regard to chasing after them and they simply +hastened to the brook to see if they could hear +or see anything more of the two ghosts who had +generously provided them with an evening’s +entertainment, but all was profoundly quiet.</p> + +<p>“Oh, boy, that was the best thing I’ve seen +in a long time!” laughed Ted, brushing the +tears out of his eyes. “The way that first ghost +lit out for the woods was a sight I wouldn’t have +wanted to miss!”</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_234">[Pg 234]</span></p> + +<p>“And the other fellow snatching his night +shirt off of him was another high spot!” +chuckled Buck. “But that little drama knocks +our theory into a cocked hat.”</p> + +<p>“You mean about these fellows working together?” +questioned Ted.</p> + +<p>“Sure. We thought that they were partners, +but each one of them must have something in +mind and they have been working alternately +on us. Certainly if they knew each other they +wouldn’t have acted like that when their ghosts +met each other!”</p> + +<p>“They certainly did shrink up at the first +sight of each other!” grinned Drummer.</p> + +<p>“I guess you are right about the fact that +they don’t know each other,” Ted agreed. “But +if that second fellow ever gets his hands on the +first ghost they’ll know each other!”</p> + +<p>“That was a case of professional jealousy!” +said Buck. “I have a feeling that we’ll never +be bothered with them again.”</p> + +<p>“That is hard to tell,” was Ted’s opinion. +“We’ll have to await events and see.”</p> + +<p>They watched the woods for a long time, hoping +to see some trace of the figures in white, but +they were unrewarded. Long after their usual +hour they remained around the replenished +fires, talking and laughing over the ghost chase.</p> + +<p>“Well, we’re still a long way from knowing<span class="pagenum" id="Page_235">[Pg 235]</span> +what they are hanging around here for,” Buck +said as they finally turned in.</p> + +<p>On the following day Buck and Ted again +left the camp in charge of the older boys and +went for a hike over the mountains. They +wanted to see if there was any trace of the flight +and also to pay a visit to the hut in Hogs’ Hollow +and question Jerry Jackson point blank.</p> + +<p>“For all the fun we had out of them, they still +have got to take the responsibility for firing +the woods,” Ted said.</p> + +<p>“Yes, but now we don’t know which one of +’em did it! The first thing we have to do is to +find out who did what.”</p> + +<p>“The quickest way to do that is to locate this +Jerry Jackson and see what he knows about it +all,” said Ted.</p> + +<p>“Sure. I’m pretty sure that the ghost who +crossed the creek was Jerry Jackson.”</p> + +<p>“So am I, because he fled in the direction +of the hollow. We’ll soon find out.”</p> + +<p>But in this Ted was mistaken. When they +reached the crude hut of the swamp dweller one +glance inside the place showed them that he had +abandoned his home, probably for good. Everything +except the bare furniture was out of the +shack and it looked bleak and forlorn.</p> + +<p>“Skipped out!” cried Buck, looking around.</p> + +<p>“Yes, gone completely, and I guess we’ll<span class="pagenum" id="Page_236">[Pg 236]</span> +never find him again. I’ll bet he is making for +new country right now. Well, that means that +we are rid of one ghost and all we have to do +is to keep a sharp watch out for the other.”</p> + +<p>There was nothing more to be learned at the +shack in Hogs’ Hollow, so the two boys left the +place and returned to the top of the mountain. +Here they wandered along looking for any signs +which might be clues to the doings of the past +few weeks, and they passed above and beyond +the camp. They kept up their exploration until +the sun began to set and dusk crept in from the +east.</p> + +<p>“We might as well go back,” suggested Ted. +“We’ve seen a lot of mountain country but +we haven’t learned anything.”</p> + +<p>“All right. By the way, there is the cabin +of that unsociable gentleman down there.”</p> + +<p>Buck pointed to the cabin with the barbed +wire fence and as they glanced down at it the +front door of the cabin was opened and the tall +man who resided there came out. To their astonishment +he took a board which was lying +beside the door, and placing it across the door, +drove several nails into it. For the first time +they noticed that the boards were on the windows +and that the cabin was being closed up.</p> + +<p>“Hello, he is leaving us!” muttered Ted.</p> + +<p>“Seems so. He has on a long coat and a cap.<span class="pagenum" id="Page_237">[Pg 237]</span> +Guess he doesn’t intend to come back this +season.”</p> + +<p>The man went to the small shed in the rear +of the yard and opened the doors, leading out +a black horse. He then pulled from the other +side of the shed a small two-seater carriage and +proceeded to harness the horse to it. When this +was done he nailed a board across the door of +the shed and then carelessly threw the hammer +over the fence into the woods.</p> + +<p>“Pretty free with his hardware!” said Buck.</p> + +<p>The man climbed into the seat of the carriage, +spoke sharply to the horse and then rolled out +of the yard as the horse started off. He turned +the horse’s head toward the cities and they +gathered speed as they went. Ted grasped +Buck’s arm.</p> + +<p>“Take particular notice of that horse!” he +cried. “It’s a black one!”</p> + + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> + +<div class="chapter"> +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_238">[Pg 238]</span></p> + +<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_XXIII">CHAPTER XXIII<br> +<span class="fs70">A GAME OF NICKY NIGHT</span></h2> +</div> + +<p>Buck nodded at once. “It was just beginning +to dawn upon me,” he said. “Something about +the horse was attracting my attention and for +a while I wasn’t able to gather what it was. Now +I see what it is. There goes our Black Rider!”</p> + +<p>“Or else his horse. It looks remarkably like +the horse on the rock. Well, if that is the +ghost who chased the Hogs’ Hollow ghost away +from our camp, what can be his game? Both +of them must have distinct ideas, because I +don’t think there can be any connection between +Jerry Jackson and that man!”</p> + +<p>“When you ask me questions, ask me something +that I’ll have half a chance to answer!” +grumbled Buck. “But look at that man go! He +doesn’t look as though he is just going away +for a short time. Looks as though there was a +good reason for leaving, as though some one +is hard on his trail.”</p> + +<p>“He probably has his own ideas and we’ll +never find out what the answer is,” said Ted.<span class="pagenum" id="Page_239">[Pg 239]</span> +“But I’m pretty sure that the fooling around +our camp is over with.”</p> + +<p>“I agree with you there,” nodded Buck, as +they started back toward the camp. “This man +seems to be leaving us for good and I’m pretty +sure that Jerry Jackson will be too scared to +come around again. But I certainly would like +to know what they were after.”</p> + +<p>“So would I, and if we ever run across Jackson +we’ll try and make him tell us. But as for +the other one, he’s gone and we’ll never learn +anything from him.”</p> + +<p>When they arrived in the camp they were +joyously received and their recital of events +was eagerly listened to. At the statement that +events of an unusual nature were over with +there was a mingled feeling of relief and dissatisfaction.</p> + +<p>“Hurrah, now we can enjoy ourselves and +sleep in peace at night!” whooped Bob, tossing +his hat high.</p> + +<p>“Yes, but think of not knowing what those +fellows were running around for!” growled +Drummer. “That spoils everything.”</p> + +<p>“Why?” demanded Bob. “Do we have to +know why they were playing ghost?”</p> + +<p>“Of course we should,” retorted Drummer. +“When we get home we’ll want to tell people +about it and there won’t be any fun in ending<span class="pagenum" id="Page_240">[Pg 240]</span> +up by saying that we don’t know what it was +all about. More than likely folks will think we +dreamed it.”</p> + +<p>“We all had the same dream, then,” returned +Bob. “But it would be a lot more satisfactory +to know the rest of it.”</p> + +<p>“When we go for fresh supplies of food +we’ll try and find out if anything is known of +the whereabouts of Jerry Jackson,” promised +Ted.</p> + +<p>“If you don’t find anything out can we go +scouting around the country and try to find +him?” a boy asked, eagerly.</p> + +<p>Ted smiled. “No, I guess we won’t go as +far as that. If he ever comes near the camp +again we will make every effort to capture him, +but I think that if we go roaming around the +mountains just with the purpose of finding him, +we will only be wasting our time and perhaps +stirring up trouble. From the looks of his hut +over there in the hollow I’d say that he had +decided to leave this part of the country for +good.”</p> + +<p>That night there was a fine bright campfire +meeting and the time between supper and bed +time was enjoyed without fear of unexpected +happenings. They talked and sang and told +ghost stories, none of which satisfied them as<span class="pagenum" id="Page_241">[Pg 241]</span> +had the ending of the one which they had witnessed +from the maple grove.</p> + +<p>“No ghost story will ever mean anything to +me again unless one ghost chases the other +across the camp and pulls his nightie off!” +laughed Buck.</p> + +<p>At the recollection there was a hearty laugh +and Ted saw that the unexpected ending of the +series of mysterious events which had taken +place around the camp had cheered and brightened +them. He noted that there was a great +deal of difference in the boys. At the start of +their trip some of them had been frightened, +uneasy, panicky, but now they had changed. +All of them had broadened and looked brighter +and manlier than when they had started out. +Little Tom Clayton had developed into a +sturdy, self-reliant boy and his too-doting +mother was about to receive a surprise when +her formerly pale, angelic-looking boy returned +from the camp. Ted knew that Mr. Clayton +would be more than pleased.</p> + +<p>“It has certainly done them a world of good,” +he thought, as they turned in that night. “The +whole trip has been a success, and I hope the +trustees of the club will be satisfied. Too bad +we can’t make a full report on the meddling +ghosts, but we’ll have to let that go, I suppose.”</p> + +<p>On the following day he and Buck took a trip<span class="pagenum" id="Page_242">[Pg 242]</span> +to the farmer’s house and there they related to +the farmer and his wife the recent adventures +which they had had. The good couple were astonished.</p> + +<p>“I could have sworn it was Jerry Jackson, +after I got thinkin’ it over,” declared Farmer +Crane. “So he has cut loose and run away, +eh? I guess you’ll see no more o’ him. But +you can’t guess what he would be pesterin’ you +for, eh?”</p> + +<p>“No, we can’t see why he should try scaring +us out,” Buck answered, as Ted shook his head. +“Mr. Crane, I wish you could have seen him leg +it for the other ghost, when the second party +got after him!”</p> + +<p>The farmer roared heartily. “After you fellers +go, so you won’t be annoyed by curious +folks, I’m goin’ to tell that one around,” he +declared. “Too many people ’round here thinks +this Black Riders’ camp is a haunted spot, but +maybe after I tell ’em that one ghost up and +run the other out of your camp and pulled his +shirt off’n him, they’ll get a little sense into +their heads. What you think about that, Ma?”</p> + +<p>His wife shook her head. “Some of ’em you +could tell anything to, and they’d still believe +that the place was alive with spooks!” she said, +wisely.</p> + +<p>“If you ever hear anything from Jerry Jackson,<span class="pagenum" id="Page_243">[Pg 243]</span> +let us know,” Ted requested, as they were +leaving.</p> + +<p>“I surer than the dickens will!” was the +reply. “If he ever comes around here I’ll make +him speak up.”</p> + +<p>They left the farmer and returned to camp +with a fresh supply of food, talking over camp +plans for the balance of the summer. They had +now but a week and a half until it would be time +to return home.</p> + +<p>“In all this excitement the time has slipped +by like magic,” remarked Ted.</p> + +<p>“Yes, Labor Day is almost here. Time hasn’t +lingered any, I’ll say that. But now that things +have settled down we ought to enjoy every +minute of the remaining time. Not that I haven’t +enjoyed it up to the present time, but we won’t +have to go running over the mountains every +once in awhile and sleeping out in the woods. +Have you enjoyed the job of managing a big +camp?”</p> + +<p>“Of helping to manage it, you mean,” corrected +Ted. “I know that you’ve stood back +and allowed me to run most things, but don’t +forget that you are a partner in this. Yes, I’ve +enjoyed it and I’ve learned a lot from it.”</p> + +<p>The rest of the week passed away without incident, +the boys enjoying it keenly. Now that +there was no eternal watch to be kept they felt<span class="pagenum" id="Page_244">[Pg 244]</span> +a lifting of a weight and from that time on they +were able to give their whole attention to their +sports and instruction. The two leaders taught +them many useful things about camp life, especially +in the matter of conscientious neatness, +and by this time every boy could swim more or +less efficiently. At night the campfire talks +were enjoyed and long, health-giving sleeps +rounded off their activities.</p> + +<p>More than once the boys spoke of their enjoyment +of the mountain chase game, so much so +that Ted spoke to Buck about it.</p> + +<p>“What do you think of starting a game of +Nicky Night after supper?”</p> + +<p>“Fine! I haven’t played it in years! Let’s +do it.”</p> + +<p>Few of the boys had ever played Nicky Night, +a game that was going out of date when Ted +and Buck were smaller. To the eager listening +group Ted explained it.</p> + +<p>“Just as in the mountain chase, you go out in +groups of two,” he told them. “Only, in this +game there is no use of lanterns. In groups of +twos we’ll follow you. Now, here is the idea: +the fellows who go out first split up in twos and +drift off up the mountains, and when they have +found what they think is good ground for hiding, +they start yelling as loud as possible, +“Nicky Night!” “Nicky Night!” Those in the<span class="pagenum" id="Page_245">[Pg 245]</span> +camp immediately set out after them and as the +pursuing squad gets nearer the “Nicky Night” +yellers sink their voices, disguise them in every +way, and try to throw them off the track. The +two who are after the “Nicky Nights” must +touch them before they are prisoners, even if +you have to climb a tree or hang over a cliff to +do it! The Nicky Nights will stay out until the +pursuers have to give up, and then they come +in. If more Nicky Nights get in than are captured, +they win the game. You can run away +or climb trees or do anything you want to, but +the skill in the game is to throw the others off +of the track by the use of a disguised voice.”</p> + +<p>The boys were keen to try the new game and +the sides were made up as at the time of the +mountain chase game. Now that Plum had left +the camp there was one short, and to make +things even one boy volunteered to remain in +camp and take care of the fires. It had been +agreed that Ted’s group would take to the +mountains this time, and they soon left the +camp in a group, to split up and spread out as +they progressed.</p> + +<p>Fifteen minutes after they had left the camp +the first blood-stirring cry floated down from the +mountains. “Nicky Night!” came in a disguised +voice, and “Nicky Night!” was repeated +by another voice at some distance from it.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_246">[Pg 246]</span></p> + +<p>Buck’s squad took the field at once, and he +went off with Drummer in the direction of one +of the voices. The other groups started off +on the trails of other Nicky Nights. As Buck +and Drummer progressed up the side of the +mountains they heard the voice before them, +high-pitched and weird.</p> + +<p>“That sounds like Ted,” decided Buck, as +they made their way forward. “We’ll run him +down, in spite of his disguised voice. Good +thing there is a generous slice of moon tonight, +or we’d have a tough time finding our way.”</p> + +<p>The Nicky Nights before them heard them +coming and immediately began a retreat, for +the voice was next heard further off. On both +sides of them they could hear other cries of +“Nicky Night” and a few seconds later a cry +of triumph, “We’ve got you!” One set of +Nickys had been captured. The pair before +Buck and Drummer still retreated.</p> + +<p>“They’ll probably take to a tree pretty soon +and allow us to go under them,” said Buck. +“That’s the thing we have to look out for. +There, what did I tell you! That ‘Nicky Night’ +came from the air!”</p> + +<p>The last “Nicky Night” had indeed come +from the air, a weak and treacherous cry, and +they pushed on until they came to an open +space. Here they found the house which some<span class="pagenum" id="Page_247">[Pg 247]</span> +of the boys had been in and where Ted had seen +the man with the lantern roaming around.</p> + +<p>“Hello, here is that old house with all the furnishings,” +exclaimed Buck.</p> + +<p>“Yes, and the Nicky Nights are hiding up +there in the cupola on the porch roof!” cried +Drummer excitedly. “I just saw something +move up there. Come on and get them!”</p> + +<p>“I don’t know how to get into that tower +room from the house,” said Buck.</p> + +<p>“We won’t get in through the house. Let’s +climb the front porch,” replied Drummer.</p> + +<p>“All right. But there must be a door from +the main part of the house into that cupola, and +they may escape.”</p> + +<p>“Never mind, we’ll chase them through the +house,” said the sturdy fat boy.</p> + +<p>Buck stepped onto the low porch, quickly +“shinned” his way up the supporting roof support, +and reached the low front porch roof. +Drummer followed him with remarkable agility +and they swiftly crossed the roof and looked +into the little octagon cupola.</p> + +<p>The moonlight sent a half light into the place +and for a single instant they thought that the +place was empty. Then, as they became accustomed +to the place, they saw a lone figure +crouching along the wall, trying to conceal itself +in the darker shadows of the little tower.<span class="pagenum" id="Page_248">[Pg 248]</span> +The boys drew in sharp breaths and their skins +prickled as the man rose from his place of concealment. +He knew that he had been observed +and his hand fumbled for the knob of the door +which opened into the main house.</p> + +<p>Buck had a flash of inspiration. He jumped +over the low sill into the cupola.</p> + +<p>“No you don’t, Jerry Jackson!” he cried.</p> + + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> + +<div class="chapter"> +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_249">[Pg 249]</span></p> + +<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_XXIV">CHAPTER XXIV<br> +<span class="fs70">MYSTERIES ARE CLEARED UP</span></h2> +</div> + +<p>The man who stood before them, seeking to +open the door leading into the house was indeed +the lone dweller from Hogs’ Hollow. He had +heard the two approaching boys and had hidden +himself in the cupola of the abandoned house, +not dreaming for a moment that they would +enter the place. He had heard the scratching +made by them as they climbed the porch and +their appearance at the open front of the little +tower took him by surprise. For a single moment +his little eyes gleamed with an impulse +of violence, but Buck looked fairly husky and +Drummer, though short, was stocky. The man +spoke up in a high voice.</p> + +<p>“What you fellers want? I ain’t done nothing +to you!”</p> + +<p>“You are Jerry Jackson, aren’t you?” Buck +asked, striking a match and looking closely at +the tall, stooped old man. Jackson was past +middle age and his hair was a tangled gray +mass which hung far below the line which would +have been marked by a collar had he possessed<span class="pagenum" id="Page_250">[Pg 250]</span> +one. His clothing was ragged beyond description.</p> + +<p>“Yes, I’m Jerry Jackson, but you got nothing +against me,” was the whining reply. The old +man held something behind him all the time +with his left hand and Buck had an uneasy feeling +that it might be something in the nature of +a weapon. He kept his eyes narrowly on the +man as he continued to question him.</p> + +<p>“You say we haven’t anything on you, eh? +How about scaring us, cutting down our tents, +posing on a rock with a horse, and setting fire +to the woods!”</p> + +<p>The man stirred indignantly. “I never did +set on no horse or set the woods on fire!” he +cried, vehemently. “I’ll tell you all I ever done +to your camp. I walked through it with a lantern +the first night you got there, and I blew +that conch shell to scare you. I was the one +who cut the ropes on your tents, because you +had to go and chase me all over the mountain, +durn yore hides! While you fellers was gettin’ +a soakin’ I slipped down and cut the ropes. +Then you chased me another night when I was +hangin’ around yore camp, the night I tried to +tote off one ’o you, and somebody pegged apples +at me! But I never used no horse or set fire +to anything.”</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_251">[Pg 251]</span></p> + +<p>“You paid another visit to the camp, the time +the ghost chased you,” reminded Buck.</p> + +<p>“Yes, and if anybody set yore camp on fire, +that feller must have done it, ’cause I didn’t.”</p> + +<p>“Did you hang a skeleton in the woods?” +Buck asked.</p> + +<p>“Don’t know nothin’ about no skeleton,” was +the dogged reply.</p> + +<p>“All right, I guess I can see your part in it +all,” replied Buck. “Now, Jerry Jackson, why +did you do it? What was the idea of trying to +scare us out of a camp that was our own?”</p> + +<p>The man looked uneasy and cast about him +with restless eyes. He shifted his foot and +looked down.</p> + +<p>“I dunno, I must have been crazy,” was the +answer.</p> + +<p>“That won’t do, my friend!” Buck cried, +sharply. “You are going to speak up and tell +the truth or we will hand you right over to the +authorities! Out with it now!”</p> + +<p>“Well, I didn’t want you boys around here +because I was lookin’ for some money that was +supposed to be hid in this house,” replied the +man, fearing to keep the truth back. “A crazy +feller named Bainbridge lived here and he died +a short time ago. I heard that there was some +money in the house and I been lookin’ for it. +Just when I was goin’ good you boys had to<span class="pagenum" id="Page_252">[Pg 252]</span> +come snoopin’ around. ‘I’ll get rid of ’em,’ I +sez, ‘I’ll play ghost and scare ’em back to +town.’ So I tried it, but you fellows wouldn’t +go.”</p> + +<p>“No, you are right there. Was that why you +lowered a lantern down a chimney on a rope +one night?”</p> + +<p>“Yes. How’d you know——”</p> + +<p>“My friend saw you. Is that where you found +the money at the bottom of the chimney?”</p> + +<p>“Yes, there it was—Here! Hold on! I didn’t +find any money!”</p> + +<p>Buck smiled grimly at the tone of alarm. He +had observed in the semi-gloom the end of a tin +box back of the man.</p> + +<p>“Yes you did, Jackson. You are holding a +tin box back of you and there is money in it. +But you needn’t worry, we won’t touch it. All +I want you to do is to go back to camp with us +and tell your story to our camp leader.”</p> + +<p>“If I do, you won’t take my money or have +me arrested?” eagerly asked the old man.</p> + +<p>Buck made the promise and the three of them +left the house by the stairway and took up the +journey to the camp. Both boys were on the +alert lest the man give them the slip and remained +close to his side, but he made no attempt +to get away and they reached the camp after a +silent trip. All of the other boys were in and<span class="pagenum" id="Page_253">[Pg 253]</span> +anxiously awaiting them. Ted hurried forward.</p> + +<p>“We were just beginning to worry about you +two,” he said. “Your side won this time, Buck, +and you two are the only squad that didn’t get +your men. Who is this with you?”</p> + +<p>“Jerry Jackson, the ghost—or one of the +ghosts—of Black Riders’ Camp!” was the +triumphant response.</p> + +<p>His words produced a decided stir and the +boys crowded around the unhappy mountaineer. +At Buck’s command the man related all to Ted.</p> + +<p>“Don’t take my money away from me, boys,” +he whined, in conclusion. “I ain’t never had +none, and I had to work pretty hard to find this. +Bainbridge is dead and there ain’t much in the +box.”</p> + +<p>“We don’t want your money, Jerry,” replied +Ted, feeling sorry for the grasping, miserable +old wretch. “I just wanted to know why you +kept us on the jump. If you were the one who +set the woods on fire I wouldn’t be disposed to +be nice about it, but the worst thing you did was +to cut the tent ropes, and we had that coming, +after a fashion, for chasing you all over the +mountains. Just remember this: if you ever +bother us again when we come here, we’ll turn +you over to the police speedily, I promise you.”</p> + +<p>Jackson promised never to come near the +camp again, and then he melted away in the<span class="pagenum" id="Page_254">[Pg 254]</span> +darkness, hugging the tin box to him. Late into +the night the boys talked it over.</p> + +<p>“That explains half of it,” remarked Ted. +“But it doesn’t explain the skeleton, the Black +Rider, the groans or the fire. Looks like we’ll +never get the story of that.”</p> + +<p>But the explanations came from an unexpected +source. On the Sunday before Labor +Day Mr. Calvert appeared in the camp, where +he was joyfully welcomed by the boys. He had +dinner with them and then unfolded some information +that had them listening eagerly.</p> + +<p>“You fellows are quite famous,” he smiled +at them. “Did you know that you chased a +notorious forger and counterfeiter out of this +region?”</p> + +<p>“No! How was that?” Ted asked.</p> + +<p>“Did you ever hear of a Dr. Hemple?”</p> + +<p>There was a swift exchange of looks. “The +name on the skeleton!” was the general cry.</p> + +<p>“Yes,” nodded the lawyer. “This Dr. Hemple +is a very clever bank note engraver and some +time ago he began to counterfeit money and he +forged his name to checks in the bargain. While +the police of several cities were looking for him +he used to retreat up here to a log cabin he has +somewhere around and only a few days ago he +was captured. Among his confessions was a +statement that he had hoped to make this region<span class="pagenum" id="Page_255">[Pg 255]</span> +his headquarters, but that a camp of boys had +refused to be scared out and he couldn’t have +men coming and going with a boys’ camp near +here. So he left the place and was later caught.”</p> + +<p>“I remembered the troubles you had had at +the camp and I went to see this Dr. Hemple. +He told me of the skeleton and about groaning +in the bushes and of setting the woods on fire. +Oh, I know that you are wondering about the +Black Rider part of it, too! He heard that Ted +was going to tell the story and that gave him an +idea. He muffled the feet of his horse and led +him out on a rock—that one over there?—and +then put some illuminating powder on the top +of the rock, which he touched off. He hoped +you’d think he was a dread spirit of the place, +but you refused to be scared away. But what +is his story of another ghost? He says he +masked one night to try and scare you away as +a ghost, but he claims that there was another +ghost around.” The lawyer looked puzzled as +the boys broke into peals of hearty laughter, +and Ted told him the story.</p> + +<p>The lawyer enjoyed it thoroughly. “Well, +you certainly have had a wonderful summer of +fun and adventure,” he remarked, and later he +spoke privately to Ted and Buck. “You boys +have done a fine piece of work here. All of +these boys look in the pink of good health, and<span class="pagenum" id="Page_256">[Pg 256]</span> +as for that little Clayton lad, his mother and +father won’t know him. He has developed physically +and he bears himself like a little man, +in contrast to his former timid way. I am proud +of the way you have handled these boys and +the other trustees are going to be, too.”</p> + +<p>“Thank you,” acknowledged Ted and Buck, +pleased with Mr. Calvert’s praise.</p> + +<p>On Labor Day they enjoyed their last few +hours of camp life and as soon as the big truck +arrived they pulled the supply truck up to the +road and the boys took their places in the big +vehicle. This time Drummer was in charge of +the boys and Buck rode in the front seat with +Ted. With a final cheer for the camp of the +Black Riders the trucks started down the road +and back toward the city.</p> + +<p>“Well, I’m mighty sorry to leave the camp,” +remarked Buck, as they rolled slowly along. +“I’ve seldom had a better or more exciting +time in my life.”</p> + +<p>“Nor I,” agreed his chum, with enthusiasm. +“Black Riders’ Camp will always have a soft +place in my heart.”</p> + +<p>The boys in the truck seemed to feel the same +way. The country road rang with their cheer +for the recent camping trip.</p> +<br> + +<p class="center no-indent fs80">THE END</p> +<br> + + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> + +<div class="chapter transnote"> +<h2 class="bold fs150">Transcriber’s Notes</h2> + +<ul> +<li>pg 26 Changed: high up in the mountans<br> +<span style="padding-left: 2em">to: high up in the mountains</span></li> + +<li>pg 28 Changed: stood on camparatively level ground<br> +<span style="padding-left: 2em">to: stood on comparatively level ground</span></li> + +<li>pg 40 Changed: migh be very bad for Ted<br> +<span style="padding-left: 2em">to: might be very bad for Ted</span></li> + +<li>pg 79 Changed: Some farmer around her must have owned it<br> +<span style="padding-left: 2em">to: Some farmer around here must have owned it</span></li> + +<li>pg 84 Changed: something that excited their curiousity <br> +<span style="padding-left: 2em">to: something that excited their curiosity</span></li> + +<li>pg 86 Changed: blanching the faces of he boys<br> +<span style="padding-left: 2em">to: blanching the faces of the boys</span></li> + +<li>pg 116 Changed: At the sharp exlamation in his tone<br> +<span style="padding-left: 2em">to: At the sharp exclamation in his tone</span></li> + +<li>pg 116 Changed: Then lantern was coming toward them<br> +<span style="padding-left: 2em">to: The lantern was coming toward them</span></li> + +<li>pg 136 Changed: on the right or the lef side<br> +<span style="padding-left: 2em">to: on the right or the left side</span></li> + +<li>pg 158 Changed: who immmediately struck an attitude of defense<br> +<span style="padding-left: 2em">to: who immediately struck an attitude of defense</span></li> + +<li>pg 165 Changed: For a moment after Ted made his announce-<br> +<span style="padding-left: 2em">to: For a moment after Ted made his announcement</span></li> + +<li>pg 166 Changed: But as it so happend<br> +<span style="padding-left: 2em">to: But as it so happened</span></li> + +<li>pg 185 Changed: You bet is was<br> +<span style="padding-left: 2em">to: You bet it was</span></li> + +<li>pg 191 Changed: a distinct hinderance to their peace<br> +<span style="padding-left: 2em">to: a distinct hindrance to their peace</span></li> + +<li>pg 197 Changed: come from the opposit direction<br> +<span style="padding-left: 2em">to: come from the opposite direction</span></li> + +<li>pg 217 Changed: maybe he can use po-toes<br> +<span style="padding-left: 2em">to: maybe he can use potatoes</span></li> + +<li>pg 226 Changed: I’ll tell you what we’ll do know<br> +<span style="padding-left: 2em">to: I’ll tell you what we do know</span></li> +</ul> +</div> + +<div style='text-align:center'>*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK 75217 ***</div> +</body> +</html> + diff --git a/75217-h/images/cover.jpg b/75217-h/images/cover.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..4f1fbc6 --- /dev/null +++ b/75217-h/images/cover.jpg diff --git a/75217-h/images/frontispiece.jpg b/75217-h/images/frontispiece.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..63d63b4 --- /dev/null +++ b/75217-h/images/frontispiece.jpg diff --git a/75217-h/images/title.jpg b/75217-h/images/title.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..7148d6d --- /dev/null +++ b/75217-h/images/title.jpg diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6312041 --- /dev/null +++ b/LICENSE.txt @@ -0,0 +1,11 @@ +This eBook, including all associated images, markup, improvements, +metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be +in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES. + +Procedures for determining public domain status are described in +the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org. + +No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in +jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize +this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright +status under the laws that apply to them. diff --git a/README.md b/README.md new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f332379 --- /dev/null +++ b/README.md @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ +Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for +eBook #75217 (https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/75217) |
